OPERATOR'S MANUAL

MARINE RADAR

FAR-2807(-D) Series
MODEL FAR-2107(-BB,-D) Series

(Fishing Specification)

www.furuno.co.jp
 The paper used in this manual
is elemental chlorine free.

・FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Nishinomiya, 662-8580, JAPAN

Telephone : +81-(0)798-65-2111
Fax : +81-(0)798-65-4200

All rights reserved. Printed in Japan A : JAN . 2011

B : FEB . 18, 2011
Pub. No. OME-35220-B
(DAMI ) FAR-21X7/28X7(FISH) *00017083511*
*00017083511*
* 0 0 0 1 7 0 8 3 5 1 1 *
IMPORTANT NOTICES
General
• The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual.
Wrong operation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury.
• Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO.
• If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.
• The contents of this manual and equipment specifications can change without notice.
• The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the
screens you see on your display. The screens you see depend on your system
configuration and equipment settings.
• Save this manual for future reference.
• Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by
FURUNO will cancel the warranty.
• All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of
their respective holders.

How to discard this product

Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For
disposal in the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance
(http://www.eiae.org/) for the correct method of disposal.

How to discard a used battery

Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery, see the
chapter on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a battery is used. Tape the + and -
terminals of battery before disposal to prevent fire, heat generation caused by short circuit.
In the European Union
The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of
batteries must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash
site. Take the used batteries to a battery collection site
according to your national legislation and the Batteries Directive
Cd
2006/66/EU.
In the USA
The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that
Ni-Cd and lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled.
Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to
local laws.
Ni-Cd Pb

In the other countries

There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols
can increase when the other countries make their own recycling symbols in the future.

i
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING
Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard
The radar antenna emits electromagnetic radio frequency (RF) energy which can be harmful,
particularly to your eyes. Never look directly into the antenna aperture from a close distance
while the radar ius in operation or eexpose yourself to the transmitting antenna at a close
distance. Distances at which RF radiation level of 100, 50 and 10 W/m 2 are given in the table
below.
Note: If the antenna unit is installed at a close distance in front of the wheel house, your
administration may require halt of transmission within a certain sector of antenna revolution.
This is possible. Ask your FURUNO representive or dealer to provide this feature.

Distance to Distance to
100 W/m2 10 W/m2
Radar model Trans. Unit Magnetron Antenna point point
FAR-2127/2827 RTR-079 MG5436 XN12AF 0.90m 9.00m
FAR-2127/2827 RTR-079 MG5436 XN20AF 0.50m 4.60m
FAR-2127/2827 RTR-079 MG5436 XN24AF 0.20m 3.30m
FAR-2117/2817 RTR-078 MG4010*2 XN12AF 0.30m 3.70m
FAR-2117/2817 RTR-078 MG4010*2 XN20AF 0.10m 2.20m
FAR-2117/2817 RTR-078 MG4010*2 XN24AF 0.10m 1.50m
FAR-2137S RTR-080 MG5223F SN30AF 0.10m 2.40m
FAR-2137S RTR-080 MG5223F SN36AF 0.10m 2.00m
FAR-2157 RTR-083 9M31 XN4A 1.20m 13.6m
FAR-2157 RTR-083 9M31 XN5A 1.10m 12.3m
FAR-2167DS RTR-084 MG5240F SN30AF 0.60m 8.90m
FAR-2167DS RTR-084 MG5240F SN36AF 0.40m 7.40m
FAR-2827W RTR-081 MG5436 XN20AF 2.20m 13.00m
FAR-2827W RTR-081 MG5436 XN24AF 1.50m 11.50m
FAR-2837S RTR-080 MG5223F SN30AF 0.10m 2.40m
FAR-2837S RTR-080 MG5223F SN36AF 0.10m 2.00m
FAR-2837SW RTR-082 MG5223F SN36AF 1.00m 8.50m
*1 XN12AF: 120cm, XN20AF: 198cm, XN24AF: 243cm, XN4A: 257cm, XN5A: 321cm,
SN30AF: 309cm, SN36AF: 377cm
*2 Or MAF1425B

ii
 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Use the proper fuse.
Do not open the equipment.
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage
Only qualified personnel to the equipment or cause fire.
should work inside the
equipment. Keep heater away from equipment.

Turn off the radar power Heat can alter equipment shape and melt
switch before servicing the the power cord, which can cause fire or
antenna unit. Post a warn- electrical shock.
ing sign near the switch
indicating it should not be Do not place liquid-filled containers
turned on while the antenna near the equipment.
unit is being serviced.
Fire or electrical shock can result if a liquid
Prevent the potential risk of spills into the equipment.
being struck by the rotating
antenna and exposure to Do not operate the equipment with wet
RF radiation hazard. hands.

Wear a safety belt and hard Electrical shock can result.

hat when working on the
antenna unit. Before servicing the radar, turn off
the appropriate external breaker.
Serious injury or death can
result if someone falls from Power is not removed from the radar simply
the radar antenna mast. by turning off its power switch.

Do not disassemble or modify the

equipment.

Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can

result.

Immediately turn off the power at the

ship's mains switchboard if water
leaks into the equipment or the equip-
ment is emitting smoke or fire.

Continued use can cause fatal damage to

the equipment.

iii
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING CAUTION
No one navigational aid should be relied The plotting accuracy and response of
upon for the safety of vessel and crew. this ARP meets IMO standards.
The navigator has the responsibility to Tracking accuracy is affected by the
check all aids available to confirm following:
position. Electronic aids are not
a substitute for basic navigational • Tracking accuracy is affected by course
principles and common sense. change. One to two minutes is required to
restore vectors to full accuracy after an
• This ARP automatically tracks abrupt course change. (The actual
automatically or manually acquired radar amount depends on gyrocompass
targets and calculates their courses and specifications.)
speeds, indicating them by vectors. Since • The amount of tracking delay is inversely
the data generated by the auto plotter proportional to the relative speed of the
are based on what radar targets are target. Delay is on the order of 15—30
selected, the radar must always be seconds for high relative speed; 30—60
optimally tuned for use with the auto seconds for low relative speed.
plotter, to ensure required targets will not
be lost or unwanted targets such as sea The data generated by ARP, AIS and
returns and noise will not be acquired video plotter are intended for
and tracked. reference only.

• A target does not always mean a land- Refer to official nautical charts for
mass, reef, ships or other surface vessels detailed and up-to-date information.
but can imply returns from sea surface
and clutter. As the level of clutter changes
with environment, the operator should
properly adjust the A/C SEA, A/C RAIN
and GAIN controls to be sure target
echoes are not eliminated from the
radar screen.

WARNING LABEL
Warning labels are attached to the
equipment. Do not remove any label.
If a label is missing or damaged,
contact a FURUNO agent or dealer
about replacement.

WARNING DISPLAY UNIT, PROCESSOR UNIT

To avoid electrical shock, do not Name: Warning Label (1)
remove cover. No user-serviceable
parts inside.
Type: 86-003-1011-1
Code No.: 100-236-231

WARNING ANTENNA UNIT

Radiation hazard. Only qualified
personnel should work inside scanner.
Name: Radiation Warning Label
Confirm that TX has stopped before
opening scanner.
Type: 03-142-3201-0
Code No.: 100-266-890

iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD ........................................................................................................ xi
PROGRAM NUMBER ........................................................................................ xiii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.............................................................................. xiv
SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................... SP-1
1. RADAR OPERATION.................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Turning on the Power .................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Transmitter ON ............................................................................................................ 1-1
1.3 Control Unit ................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.4 Main Menu................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.5 Operation by the On-Screen Boxes ............................................................................ 1-7
1.6 Cursor Menu.............................................................................................................. 1-10
1.7 Monitor Brilliance........................................................................................................1-11
1.8 Display Modes ........................................................................................................... 1-12
1.9 On-Screen Boxes and Markers ................................................................................. 1-13
1.10 Tuning the Receiver .................................................................................................. 1-15
1.10.1 Choosing the tuning method........................................................................... 1-15
1.10.2 Initializing tuning ............................................................................................. 1-15
1.10.3 Automatic tuning ............................................................................................. 1-16
1.10.4 Manual tuning ................................................................................................. 1-16
1.11 Aligning Heading with Gyrocompass......................................................................... 1-16
1.12 Presentation Modes................................................................................................... 1-17
1.12.1 Choosing presentation mode .......................................................................... 1-17
1.12.2 Description of presentation modes ................................................................. 1-18
1.13 Entering Own Ship's Speed....................................................................................... 1-22
1.13.1 Automatic speed input by log or GPS navigator ............................................. 1-22
1.13.2 Manual speed input ........................................................................................ 1-23
1.14 Choosing a Range Scale........................................................................................... 1-23
1.15 Choosing a Pulselength ............................................................................................ 1-24
1.15.1 Choosing a pulselength .................................................................................. 1-24
1.15.2 Changing pulselength ..................................................................................... 1-25
1.16 Adjusting the Sensitivity ............................................................................................ 1-26
1.17 Reducing Sea Clutter ................................................................................................ 1-27
1.17.1 Choosing method of adjustment ..................................................................... 1-27
1.17.2 Automatic reduction of sea clutter .................................................................. 1-27
1.17.3 Manual reduction of sea clutter....................................................................... 1-28
1.18 Reducing Rain Clutter ............................................................................................... 1-29
1.18.1 Automatic reduction of rain clutter .................................................................. 1-29
1.18.2 Manual reduction of rain clutter ...................................................................... 1-29
1.19 Measuring Range ...................................................................................................... 1-31
1.19.1 Showing, hiding the fixed range rings............................................................. 1-31
1.19.2 Measuring range by the variable range marker (VRM)................................... 1-32
1.19.3 VRM unit of measurement (B and C types) .................................................... 1-33
1.19.4 TTG to VRM indication ................................................................................... 1-33
1.20 Measuring Bearing .................................................................................................... 1-34
1.20.1 Measuring bearing .......................................................................................... 1-34
1.20.2 True or relative bearing................................................................................... 1-35
1.21 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL ......................................................................... 1-36
1.21.1 How to assess risk of collision by the offset EBL............................................ 1-36

v
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.21.2 Point of reference for origin point of offset EBL...............................................1-37

1.22 Measuring Range and Bearing Between Two Targets ...............................................1-38
1.23 Target Alarm ...............................................................................................................1-39
1.23.1 How to set a target alarm ................................................................................1-39
1.23.2 Acknowledging the target alarm ......................................................................1-40
1.23.3 Deactivating a target alarm..............................................................................1-40
1.23.4 Target alarm attributes.....................................................................................1-41
1.24 Off-Centering the Display...........................................................................................1-42
1.25 Interference Rejector..................................................................................................1-43
1.26 Echo Stretch...............................................................................................................1-43
1.27 Echo Averaging ..........................................................................................................1-44
1.28 Noise Rejector............................................................................................................1-45
1.29 Wiper..........................................................................................................................1-46
1.30 Target Trails................................................................................................................1-47
1.30.1 True or relative trails........................................................................................1-47
1.30.2 Trail time..........................................................................................................1-48
1.30.3 Trail gradation..................................................................................................1-48
1.30.4 Saving, copying target trails ............................................................................1-49
1.30.5 Trail level .........................................................................................................1-50
1.30.6 Narrow trails (B, C and W types) .....................................................................1-50
1.30.7 Longer trails (B, C and W types) .....................................................................1-51
1.30.8 Temporarily removing trails from the display ...................................................1-51
1.30.9 Trail stabilization in true motion .......................................................................1-51
1.30.10 Erasing trails ..................................................................................................1-51
1.30.11 Preventing sea clutter in true trails ................................................................1-52
1.31 PI (Parallel Index) Lines .............................................................................................1-52
1.31.1 Displaying, erasing PI lines .............................................................................1-52
1.31.2 Adjusting PI line orientation, PI line interval ....................................................1-53
1.31.3 PI line bearing reference .................................................................................1-53
1.31.4 Maximum number of PI lines to display...........................................................1-54
1.31.5 PI line orientation.............................................................................................1-54
1.31.6 Resetting PI lines ............................................................................................1-54
1.32 Origin Mark.................................................................................................................1-55
1.32.1 Entering origin marks ......................................................................................1-55
1.32.2 Origin mark stabilization ..................................................................................1-57
1.32.3 Deleting individual origin marks.......................................................................1-57
1.33 Zoom ..........................................................................................................................1-58
1.34 Markers ......................................................................................................................1-59
1.34.1 Heading line ....................................................................................................1-59
1.34.2 Stern marker....................................................................................................1-59
1.34.3 North marker ...................................................................................................1-59
1.34.4 Own ship symbol .............................................................................................1-60
1.34.5 Barge marker...................................................................................................1-61
1.34.6 INS marker ......................................................................................................1-61
1.35 Automatic Picture Setup According to Navigation Purpose .......................................1-62
1.35.1 Selecting a picture setup option ......................................................................1-64
1.35.2 Programming and saving picture setups .........................................................1-64
1.35.3 Restoring user settings....................................................................................1-66
1.35.4 Restoring default picture setup options ...........................................................1-66
1.35.5 Disabling unnecessary picture setups .............................................................1-67
1.36 Function Keys ............................................................................................................1-68
1.36.1 Activating function keys...................................................................................1-68
1.36.2 Programming function keys .............................................................................1-68

vi
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.37 Ship’s Position ........................................................................................................... 1-72

1.38 Second-trace Echoes ................................................................................................ 1-74
1.39 Brilliance of Screen Data ........................................................................................... 1-75
1.40 Watch Alarm .............................................................................................................. 1-76
1.41 Nav Data ................................................................................................................... 1-77
1.42 Text Window .............................................................................................................. 1-79
1.43 Customizing Operation .............................................................................................. 1-81
1.44 Alert Box.................................................................................................................... 1-83
1.44.1 Alarm description ............................................................................................ 1-84
1.44.2 Alarm list ......................................................................................................... 1-87
1.44.3 Outputting alarm signals ................................................................................. 1-88
1.44.4 Primary alarm ................................................................................................. 1-89
1.45 Interswitch ................................................................................................................. 1-90
1.45.1 Displaying antenna information ...................................................................... 1-90
1.45.2 Presetting antenna and display combinations ................................................ 1-91
1.45.3 Selecting an antenna ...................................................................................... 1-93
1.46 Cursor Data ............................................................................................................... 1-93
1.47 Performance Monitor ................................................................................................. 1-94
1.47.1 Activating, deactivating the performance monitor........................................... 1-94
1.47.2 Checking radar performance .......................................................................... 1-94
1.48 Own Ship Marker....................................................................................................... 1-96
1.49 Color and Brilliance Sets ........................................................................................... 1-97
1.49.1 Selecting color and brilliance set .................................................................... 1-97
1.49.2 Presetting color and brilliance set................................................................... 1-97
1.50 Reference Position .................................................................................................... 1-99
1.51 Switching Hub HUB-100 (option) ............................................................................ 1-101
1.52 Anchor Watch.......................................................................................................... 1-102
1.53 Drop Mark................................................................................................................ 1-103
1.53.1 Activating the drop mark feature................................................................... 1-103
1.53.2 Inscribing a drop mark .................................................................................. 1-104
1.53.3 Erasing a drop mark ..................................................................................... 1-104
1.54 Sub Monitor (A, B, C and W types) ......................................................................... 1-105
1.55 Net Cursor ............................................................................................................... 1-106
1.55.1 Activating the net cursor ............................................................................... 1-106
1.55.2 Setting net cursor dimensions, adjusting net cursor orientation ................... 1-107

2. RADAR OBSERVATION ............................................................................... 2-1

2.1 General........................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 Minimum and maximum ranges........................................................................ 2-1
2.2 False Echoes............................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)................................................................... 2-5
2.3.1 SART description .............................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.2 Showing SART marks on the radar display ...................................................... 2-6
2.3.3 General remarks on receiving SARTs............................................................... 2-7
2.4 RACON ....................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.5 Radar Target Enhancer (RTE)..................................................................................... 2-8

3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)............................................................................. 3-1

3.1 Usage Precautions ...................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Controls for TT............................................................................................................. 3-2
3.3 Activating, Deactivating TT.......................................................................................... 3-3
3.4 Entering Own Ship's Speed......................................................................................... 3-3
3.4.1 Echo-referenced speed input............................................................................ 3-3
3.5 Automatic Acquisition .................................................................................................. 3-5

vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.5.1 Enabling auto acquisition ..................................................................................3-5

3.5.2 Terminating tracking of targets (including reference targets).............................3-6
3.6 Manual Acquisition .......................................................................................................3-7
3.6.1 Setting manual acquisition conditions ...............................................................3-7
3.6.2 Manually acquiring targets.................................................................................3-7
3.7 Lost Target ...................................................................................................................3-9
3.7.1 Setting the lost target filter.................................................................................3-9
3.7.2 Enabling, disabling the lost target alarm............................................................3-9
3.8 TT Symbols and Attributes .........................................................................................3-10
3.8.1 TT symbols ......................................................................................................3-10
3.8.2 Choosing TT symbol (B, C and W types) ........................................................ 3-11
3.8.3 TT symbol brilliance......................................................................................... 3-11
3.8.4 TT symbol color ...............................................................................................3-12
3.9 Displaying Target Data ...............................................................................................3-13
3.9.1 Displaying target data......................................................................................3-13
3.9.2 Target list .........................................................................................................3-15
3.10 Vector Modes .............................................................................................................3-16
3.10.1 Description of vectors ......................................................................................3-16
3.10.2 Vector mode and length ..................................................................................3-17
3.11 Past Position Display .................................................................................................3-18
3.11.1 Displaying and erasing past position points, choosing past
position plot interval.........................................................................................3-18
3.11.2 Past position display attributes ........................................................................3-19
3.11.3 Past position display mode..............................................................................3-19
3.11.4 Stabilization in true mode ................................................................................3-20
3.12 Set and Drift ...............................................................................................................3-20
3.13 TT Collision Alarm (CPA, TCPA) ................................................................................3-21
3.13.1 Setting the CPA and TCPA ranges ..................................................................3-21
3.13.2 Acknowledging the TT collision alarm .............................................................3-22
3.14 Acquisition Zone.........................................................................................................3-22
3.14.1 Activating an acquisition zone .........................................................................3-22
3.14.2 Sleeping, deactivating an acquisition zone......................................................3-23
3.14.3 Acknowledging the alarm ................................................................................3-23
3.14.4 Acquisition zone reference ..............................................................................3-24
3.14.5 Acquisition zone shape and stabilization.........................................................3-24
3.15 TT System Messages ................................................................................................3-25
3.16 Trial Maneuver ...........................................................................................................3-26
3.16.1 Types of trial maneuvers .................................................................................3-26
3.16.2 Performing a trial maneuver ............................................................................3-27
3.16.3 Terminating a trial maneuver ...........................................................................3-29
3.17 TT Performance Test..................................................................................................3-30
3.18 Criteria for Selecting Targets for Tracking ..................................................................3-32
3.19 Factors Affecting TT Functions...................................................................................3-34

4. AIS OPERATION........................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Controls for AIS ............................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Showing, Hiding the AIS Display..................................................................................4-2
4.3 AIS Display Filter..........................................................................................................4-4
4.4 Activating Targets.........................................................................................................4-5
4.4.1 Activating specific targets manually...................................................................4-5
4.4.2 Activating all targets ..........................................................................................4-5
4.5 How to Sleep Targets ...................................................................................................4-6
4.5.1 Sleeping an individual target .............................................................................4-6

viii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.5.2 Sleeping all targets ........................................................................................... 4-6

4.6 Setting Up for a Voyage .............................................................................................. 4-7
4.7 Target Data .................................................................................................................. 4-9
4.7.1 Basic target data ............................................................................................... 4-9
4.7.2 Detailed target data......................................................................................... 4-10
4.7.3 Removing a target data display ...................................................................... 4-10
4.7.4 Canceling tracking on a target from target data display.................................. 4-10
4.8 AIS Symbol Attributes.................................................................................................4-11
4.8.1 AIS symbol brilliance .......................................................................................4-11
4.8.2 AIS symbol size and color ...............................................................................4-11
4.9 Past Position Display................................................................................................. 4-12
4.9.1 Past position plot interval................................................................................ 4-12
4.9.2 Past position points......................................................................................... 4-13
4.9.3 Past position display motion ........................................................................... 4-13
4.9.4 Stabilization in true motion.............................................................................. 4-13
4.10 Lost Target................................................................................................................. 4-14
4.10.1 Lost target filter ............................................................................................... 4-14
4.10.2 Enabling, disabling the lost target alarm ......................................................... 4-15
4.11 ROT Setting............................................................................................................... 4-16
4.12 AIS Collision Alarm (CPA, TCPA) .............................................................................. 4-17
4.12.1 Setting the CPA and TCPA ranges.................................................................. 4-17
4.12.2 Enabling, disabling the AIS collision alarm ..................................................... 4-17
4.12.3 Limiting the function of the collision alarm ...................................................... 4-18
4.13 Association of TT and AIS Targets............................................................................. 4-19
4.14 Own Ship’s Data........................................................................................................ 4-21
4.15 Messages .................................................................................................................. 4-22
4.15.1 Creating, saving messages ............................................................................ 4-22
4.15.2 Transmitting messages................................................................................... 4-23
4.15.3 Viewing messages .......................................................................................... 4-24
4.16 AIS System Messages .............................................................................................. 4-26

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION.................................................................... 5-1

5.1 General........................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 Display Modes ............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.3 Presentation Modes..................................................................................................... 5-2
5.4 Radar Map................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.4.1 Showing, hiding the radar map display............................................................. 5-3
5.4.2 Inscribing radar map marks and lines ............................................................... 5-4
5.5 Erasing Radar Map Marks and Lines .......................................................................... 5-6
5.5.1 Erasing individual radar map marks and lines .................................................. 5-6
5.5.2 Erasing all radar map marks and lines ............................................................. 5-7
5.6 Radar Map Corrections ............................................................................................... 5-8
5.6.1 Radar map correction ....................................................................................... 5-8
5.6.2 Cursor data correction ...................................................................................... 5-8
5.7 Chart Cards (A, B, C and W types) ............................................................................. 5-9
5.7.1 Displaying a chart ............................................................................................. 5-9
5.7.2 Chart position correction................................................................................. 5-10
5.7.3 Correcting cursor data .................................................................................... 5-10
5.7.4 Chart land color (B, C and W types) ................................................................5-11
5.8 Hiding, Showing Graphics on the Video Plotter Display ......................................... 5-12
5.9 Track.......................................................................................................................... 5-13
5.9.1 Plotting own ship’s track ................................................................................. 5-13
5.9.2 Plotting interval for other ships' tracks (A, B, C and W types) ........................ 5-14

ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.9.3 Auto target track (A, B, C and W types) ..........................................................5-15

5.9.4 Choosing track color (A, B, C and W types) ....................................................5-15
5.9.5 Erasing track from the menu, on the screen....................................................5-16
5.9.6 Erasing track with the cursor ...........................................................................5-17
5.10 Waypoints ..................................................................................................................5-18
5.10.1 Entering waypoints ..........................................................................................5-18
5.10.2 Editing, erasing waypoints from the menu.......................................................5-20
5.10.3 Erasing waypoints ...........................................................................................5-21
5.10.4 Waypoint list ....................................................................................................5-22
5.10.5 Displaying waypoint name and number...........................................................5-23
5.11 Nav Lines ...................................................................................................................5-24
5.11.1 Entering a new nav line ...................................................................................5-24
5.11.2 Editing a nav line .............................................................................................5-25
5.11.3 Nav line list ......................................................................................................5-26
5.11.4 Erasing a nav line............................................................................................5-27
5.11.5 Setting up nav lines .........................................................................................5-28
5.11.6 Displaying nav line, waypoint mark .................................................................5-30
5.12 Recording Data ..........................................................................................................5-32
5.12.1 Initializing memory (RAM) cards......................................................................5-32
5.12.2 Recording data ................................................................................................5-33
5.13 Replaying Data...........................................................................................................5-35
5.14 Deleting Files .............................................................................................................5-36

6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING...................................................... 6-1

6.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule...................................................................................6-2
6.2 Life Expectancy of Major Parts ....................................................................................6-3
6.3 Replacing the Fuse ......................................................................................................6-4
6.4 Replacement of Battery on GC Board..........................................................................6-4
6.5 Trackball Maintenance .................................................................................................6-5
6.6 Easy Troubleshooting...................................................................................................6-6
6.7 Advanced-level Troubleshooting ..................................................................................6-7
6.8 Diagnostics.................................................................................................................6-10

APPENDIX ...................................................................................................... AP-1

1. Menu Tree ..................................................................................................................... AP-1
2. Digital Interface.............................................................................................................. AP-8
3. Longitude Error Table (on 96 nm range scale) ............................................................ AP-29

INDEX............................................................................................................... IN-1
Declaration of conformity

x
FOREWORD
A Word to the Owner of
FAR-2807(-D)/FAR-2107(-BB,-D) Series
Congratulations on your choice of the FURUNO FAR-2807(-D)/FAR-2107(-BB,-D) Series
Radar. We are confident you will see why FURUNO has become synonymous with quality
and reliability.

For 60 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for innovative
and dependable marine electronics equipment. This dedication to excellence is furthered by
our extensive global network of agents and dealers.

Your radar is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine
environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless installed,
operated and maintained properly. Please carefully read and follow the recommended
procedures for operation and maintenance.

We would appreciate hearing from you, the end-user, about whether we are achieving our
purposes.

Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO equipment.

Features
• High-resolution 19-inch (FAR-2107-D), 20.1-inch LCD (FAR-2107(-BB)) or 23.1-inch LCD
(FAR-2807(-D)).
• This series of radar are available in the models shown in the table below. 2107 series
also available in "–BB", "-D" configuration. 2807 series also available in "–D"
configuration. For example, FAR-2117-BB, FAR-2117-D.
Model Band Monitor Output TR config.
10kW
10kW
FAR-2117 17 inch
25kW
25kW
FAR-2117 10kW UP
X-band
FAR-2127 20.1 inch 25kW
FAR-2157 50kW
FAR-2817 10kW
FAR-2827 23.1 inch 25kW
FAR-2827W 25kW DOWN
FAR-2137S 30kW
20.1 inch
FAR-2167DS 60kW UP
S-band
FAR-2837S 30kW
23.1 inch
FAR-2837SW 30kW DOWN

xi
FOREWORD

• Two types of trackball-equipped control units are available: RCU-014 (full keyboard) and
the RCU-015 (palm control). The trackball is easy to use thanks to the ergonomically
designed palm rest.
• Simplified operation with point-and-click menu operation.
• All functions are accessible by using the trackball alone.
• Applicable to HSC (High Speed Craft)
• TT, AIS, Radar Plotter and Interswitch supplied as standard.
• Meets the requirements in IEC 62388 (Maritime navigation and radiocommunication
equipment and systems - Shipborne radar - Performance requirements, methods of
testing and required test results).
• Meets the requirements in IMO MSC.192(79).
• Meets the requirements in IEC 62288 (Maritime navigation and radiocommunication
equipment and systems - Presentation of navigation-related information on shipborne
navigational displays - General requirements, methods of testing and required test
results).
• Target alarm watches for targets entering or exiting an alarm zone
• TCPA/CPA alarms
• Electronic parallel index lines
• 42 rpm antenna for high speed craft

xii
Radar Type and Function Availability
This radar series is available in five specification types to meet the requirements of Authorities,
and function availability depends on specification type. The table below shows those functions
that have limited availability. This manual provides descriptions for all functions in this radar
series, and we have endeavored to denote in the text those functions that have limited
availability. For detailed information on function availability, see the menu tree in the Appendix.
• IMO: IMO compliant
• A: Near-IMO specifications
• B: Non-Japanese fishing vessels
• C: Japanese fishing vessels
• W: Washington state (USA) ferry
Specification type and function availability

Type
Function
IMO A B C W
TT symbol No No Yes Yes Yes
selection
TT w/o gyro No No Yes Yes Yes
Color echo No No Yes Yes Yes
Mark w/line No No Yes Yes Yes
Pop-up No No Yes Yes Yes
guidance
Range 0.125, 0.25, Same as IMO 0.125, 0.25, Same as B Same as B
0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 0.5, 0.75, 1,
3, 6, 12, 24, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6,
48, 96 8, 12, 16, 24,
32, 48, 96,
120
Range unit nm only nm only nm, sm, km, nm, sm, km, nm, sm, km,
kyd kyd kyd
Stern-up No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Trails-Narrow No No Yes Yes Yes
Track-Other No Yes Yes Yes Yes
ship
Waypoint No No Yes Yes Yes
mark

xiii
PROGRAM NUMBER
PC Board Program No. Version No.
MAIN 035-9204 03.** (Merchant)
RFC 035-9202 01.**
KEY(REMOTE) 035-9203 01.**
ARPA 035-9212 01.**
** Minor modification

xiv
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
See page xix for detailed information about antenna units and radiators.

With FURUNO-supplied monitor

FAR-2117(-BB,-D)/2127(-BB,-D)/
FAR-2137S(-BB,-D)/2837S(-D)/2837SW(-D) 2817(-D)/2827(-D)/2827W(-D)
ANTENNA UNIT ANTENNA UNIT
(Performance Monitor PM-51* built in) (Performance Monitor PM-31* built in)

Waveguide
Waveguide or (For FAR-2827W(-D))
Coax cable
(For FAR-2837SW(-D))
TRANSCEIVER UNIT TRANSCEIVER UNIT
RTR-082 RTR-081
For FAR-2837SW(-D) For FAR-2827W(-D)

MONITOR UNIT
MU-190 (FAR-2107-D)
MU-201CR (FAR-2107(-BB,-D)
*
MU-231 (FAR-2107-D)
24 VDC
MU-231CR (FAR-2107(-BB,-D)
RU-3423

CONTROL UNIT
115/230 VAC
RCU-014
POWER SUPPLY UNIT (Keyboard)
PSU-007 or
(For FAR-2137S(-BB,-D)/2837S(-BB,-D)) RCU-015 24 VDC
OR (Trackball) or
POWER SUPPLY UNIT 115/230 VAC
PSU-011* Control Unit
(For FAR-2827W(-D)/2837SW(-D)) RCU-016
(Remote)
* Russian flag only PROCESSOR UNIT
RPU-013
Sub Display

Alarm
VDR
External Monitor
IEC-61162-1 Serial Data
(Input/Output) Navigator (INS, GPS, etc.)
IEC-61162-1 Serial Data
: Standard Speed Log
(Input)
: Option
Gyrocompass
: Dockyard supply
AD-100
Category of Units AIS 100-230 VAC
Antenna unit: Exposed to weather Track Control Unit
All other units: Protected from weather
Memory Card OR Memory Card
Interface Unit Switching Hub
Interface Unit
CU-200 x 2 HUB-100
CU-200

HUB has ports for connection of up to 7 processor units

AC spec

DC spec * These monitors have been approved by the IMO,

MU-190/201CR for CAT2, MU-231/231CR for CAT1.
Rectifier Transformer Unit If a different monitor is to be used, its effective diameter
RU-3424 RU-1803 must meet the applicable Category requirements:
RU-1746B-2 CAT 1: effective diameter 320 mm or higher
CAT 2: effective diameter 250 mm or higher
For installation and operation of other monitor,
see its manuals.

xv
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Blackbox type
FAR-2137S-BB FAR-2117-BB/2127-BB
ANTENNA UNIT ANTENNA UNIT
(Performance Monitor PM-51 built in (Performance Monitor PM-31 built in
(FAR-2137S-BB) (FAR-2117-BB, FAR-2127-BB)

VGA Monitor

CONTROL UNIT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT RCU-014
PSU-007 (Keyboard)
For FAR-2137S-BB or
RCU-015
(Trackball)

Control Unit
RCU-016
(Remote)
PROCESSOR UNIT
RPU-013
Sub Display

Alarm
VDR
External Monitor
IEC-61162-1 Serial Data
(Input/Output) Navigator (INS, GPS, etc.)
IEC-61162-1 Serial Data
: Standard Speed Log
(Input)
: Option Gyrocompass
: Dockyard supply
AD-100
Category of Units AIS 100-230 VAC
Antenna unit: Exposed to weather Track Control Unit
All other units: Protected from weather
Memory Card OR Memory Card
Interface Unit Switching Hub
Interface Unit
CU-200 x 2 HUB-100
CU-200

HUB has ports for connection of up to 7 processor units

AC spec

DC spec

Rectifier Transformer Unit

RU-3424 RU-1803
RU-1746B-2

xvi
 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Console type RCN-001/RCN-002

FAR-2117(-D)/2127(-D)/
FAR-2137S(-D)/2837S(-D)/2837SW(-D) 2817(-D)/2827(-D)/2827W(-D)
ANTENNA UNIT ANTENNA UNIT
(Performance Monitor PM-51 built in) (Performance Monitor PM-31 built in)

Waveguide
Waveguide or (For FAR-2827W(-D))
Coax cable
(For FAR-2837SW(-D))
TRANSCEIVER UNIT TRANSCEIVER UNIT
RTR-082 RTR-081
For FAR-2827W(-D)
For FAR-2837SW(-D)

CONSOLE
Alarm
RCN-001/002

VDR
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
PSU-007
For FAR-2137S(-D)/2837S(-D)
OR External Monitor
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
PSU-011*
(For FAR-2827W(-D)/2837SW(-D)
IEC-61162-1 Serial Data
(Input/Output) Navigator (INS, GPS, etc.)
* Russian flag only

IEC-61162-1 Serial Data

Speed Log
(Input)

Gyrocompass
PROCESSOR
UNIT AD-100
RPU-013

AIS
: Standard
: Option OR Track Control Unit
: Dockyard supply May also 100-230 VAC
be installed
externally. Memory Card
Category of Units
Memory Card Interface Unit
Antenna unit: Exposed to weather Switching Hub
Interface Unit CU-200
All other units: Protected from weather HUB-100 (Max. 2 total)
CU-200

AC spec

Transformer Unit
RU-1803

100-115 VAC/ 440 VAC

220-230 VAC 1φ, 50/60 Hz
1φ, 50/60 Hz

xvii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Console type RCN-003/RCN-004

FAR-2117(-BB,-D)/2127(-D)/2817(-D)/
FAR-2137S(-D)/2837S(-D)/2837SW(-D) 2827(-D)/2827W(-D)
ANTENNA UNIT ANTENNA UNIT
(Performance Monitor PM-51 built in) (Performance Monitor PM-31 built in)

Waveguide or Coax cable Waveguide

(For FAR-2837SW(-D)) (For FAR-2827W(-D))

TRANSCEIVER UNIT TRANSCEIVER UNIT

RTR-082 RTR-081
For FAR-2837SW(-D) For FAR-2827W(-D)

CONSOLE
Alarm
RCN-003/004

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

PSU-007 VDR
(For FAR-2137S(-D)/2837S(-D))
OR
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
PSU-011* External Monitor
(For FAR-2827W(-D)/2837SW(-D))

* Russian flag only

IEC-61162-1 Serial Data
(Input/Output) Navigator (INS, GPS, etc.)

IEC-61162-1 Serial Data

Speed Log
(Input)

Gyrocompass
PROCESSOR
UNIT AD-100
RPU-013

AIS
: Standard
Switching Hub
: Option HUB-100 Track Control Unit
: Dockyard supply

Category of Units
Antenna unit: Exposed to weather Memory Card Memory Card
Interface Unit Interface Unit
All other units: Protected from weather
CU-200 CU-200
(Max. 2 total)

AC spec

Transformer Unit
RU-1803

100-115 VAC/ 440 VAC

220-230 VAC 1φ, 50/60 Hz
1φ, 50/60 Hz

xviii
 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Antenna unit

FAR-2117(-BB,-D) RSB-096 (24 rpm)

FAR-2127(-BB,-D) RSB-097 (42 rpm)
FAR-2827(-D)
FAR-2137S(-BB,-D) RSB-098/099 (21/26 rpm, 200 VAC, 3ø, 50 Hz; 220 VAC, 3ø, 60 Hz;
380 VAC, 3ø, 50 Hz, 440 VAC, 3ø, 60 Hz)
RSB-100/101/102 (45 rpm, 220 VAC, 3ø, 50/60 Hz(HSC);
440 VAC, 3ø, /60 Hz(HSC))
FAR-2157(-BB,-D) RSB-106 (18/22 rpm, 200 VAC, 3ø, 50Hz, 220 VAC, 3ø, 60 Hz)
RSB-107 (22 rpm, 24 VDC)
FAR-2167DS(-BB,-D) RSB-111 (21/26 rpm, 200 VAC, 3ø, 50Hz, 220 VAC, 3ø, 60Hz)
RSB-112 (21/26 rpm, 380 VAC, 3ø, 50Hz, 440 VAC, 3ø, 60Hz)
FAR-2827W(-D) RSB-103 (24 rpm, powered by processor unit)
FAR-2837S(-D) Same as FAR-2137S
FAR-2837SW(-D) RSB-104/105 (21/26 rpm, 200 VAC, 3ø, 50 Hz; 220 VAC, 3ø, 60 Hz;
380 VAC, 3ø, 50 Hz, 440 VAC, 3ø, 60 Hz)

Radiator

FAR-2117(-BB,-D), FAR-2127(-BB,-D), FAR-2827(-D) XN12AF , XN20AF, XN24AF

FAR-2137S(-BB,-D) SN30AF, SN36AF
FAR-2157(-BB,-D) XN4A, XN5A
FAR-2167DS(-BB,-D) SN30AF, SN36AF
FAR-2827W(-D) XN20AF, XN24AF
FAR-2837S(-D) SN30AF, SN36AF
FAR-2837SW(-D) SN30AF, SN36AF

xix
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

This page intentionally left blank.

xx
FURUNO FAR-2157/2167DS

SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR/ARPA

FAR-2157/2167DS

1 ANTENNA RADIATOR
1.1 Type Slotted waveguide array
1.2 Beam width and sidelobe attenuation
X-band S-band
Radiator type
XN4A XN5A SN30AF SN36AF
Length 8 ft 10 ft 9.5 ft 12 ft
Beam width(H) 0.75° 0.75° 2.3° 1.8°
Beam width(V) 20° 25°
Sidelobe within ±10° -28 dB -26 dB -24 dB
Sidelobe outside ±10° -32 dB -30 dB -30 dB
Applicable type FAR-2157 FAR-2167DS
1.3 Polarization Horizontal
1.4 Rotation
FAR-2157 RSB-106: 18 rpm (50 Hz)/22 rpm (60 Hz), RSB-107: 22 rpm
FAR-2167DS 21 rpm (50 Hz), 26 rpm (60 Hz)
1.5 Wind tolerance Relative wind 100 kn
1.6 De-icer (option) On: When temperature goes down to +5°C
Off: When temperature goes up to +12°C

2 RF TRANSCEIVER
2.1 Frequency
X-band 9410 MHz ±30 MHz
S-band 3050 MHz ±30 MHz
2.2 Output power
FAR-2157 50 kW
FAR-2167DS 60 kW
2.3 Range, pulse repetition frequency (PRF), pulselength
PRF (Hz) Range (NM)
0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 72 96 120
1900 (SP) 0.08 µs
1100 (MP) 0.2 µs
600 (LP) 0.6 µs
600 (LP) 1.2 µs
nd
2 traced echo reduce mode (w/o short pulse): 500 Hz approx.
2.4 Duplexer Ferrite circulator with diode limiter

3 MONITOR UNIT
3.1 Screen Raster scan, daylight bright, yellow or green echoes in 32 levels
3.2 Scanning Non-Interlace at 64 kHz horizontal, 60 Hz vertical
3.3 Display
Size 20.1-inch color LCD
Display area 399 x 319 mm

SP - 1 E3522S01A-M
FURUNO FAR-2157/2167DS

Resolution 1280 x 1024 pixel

Effective radar diameter 308 mm (H: 64 kHz, V: 60 Hz)
Viewable range 1080 mm
3.4 Minimum range 22 m
3.5 Range discrimination 26 m
3.6 Range scales, Ring interval, Number of rings
Range (NM) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12
Ring interval (NM) 0.025 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2
Number of rings 5 5 5 3 6 6 4 6 4 6 4 6

16 24 32 48 72 96 120
4 4 8 8 12 16 20
4 6 4 6 6 6 6
3.7 Range accuracy 1% of the maximum range of the scale in use or 10m,
whichever is the greater
3.8 Bearing discrimination 1.18° (XN4A), 0.98° (XN5A), 2.5° (SN30AF), 2.0° (SN36AF)
3.9 Bearing accuracy ±1°
3.10 Presentation mode Head-up, Cursor-gyro, Course-up, North-up,
True motion (sea or ground stabilization)
3.11 ARPA Auto or manual acquisition: 100 targets in 0.2-24(32) NM
Auto tracking on all acquired targets
Tracking: 5/10 pts on all target
3.12 AIS Capacity: 1000 targets, Tracking: 10 pts on all target
Time of vector: Off/30s/1-60 minutes
3.13 Radar map 20,000 pts in radar mode, 6000 pts on IC card in chart mode
3.14 Acquisition zone 2 zones
3.15 Interswitch function Selectable from menu

4 INTERFACE
4.1 Heading signal Synchro signal (20-100VDC or 20-135VAC 50/60/400/500Hz) or
Stepper signal (20-100VDC), built-in interface (option) required,
AD-10 format or IEC61162-2
4.2 Speed log IEC61162-1
4.3 AIS IEC61162-2
4.4 Input data sentences ABK, ACK, ALR, BWC, BWR, DBK, DBS, DBT, DPT, DTM, GGA,
GLL, HDT, MTW, MWV, RMB, RMC, RTE, THS, VBW, VDM, VDO,
VDR, VHW, VTG, VWR, VWT, WPL, ZDA
4.5 Output data sentences ABM, ACK, ALR, BBM, OSD, RSD, TLB, TLL, TTD, TTM, VSD

5 POWER SOURCE
5.1 Monitor unit 24 VDC:2.3 A or 100-230 VAC: 0.7 A, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
5.2 Processor unit 24VDC or 100-115/220-230 VAC: 3.0/1.5A, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
5.3 Power supply unit
FAR-2157 main 100-115/220-230 VAC: 4.4/2.0A, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
FAR-2157 motor 24VDC: 4A or 200/220 VAC: 2.0A, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz

SP - 2 E3522S01A-M
FURUNO FAR-2157/2167DS

FAR-2167DS 220/380VAC: 3/1.5A, 3 phase, 50 Hz or

220/440VAC: 3/1.5A, 3 phase, 60 Hz
5.4 Antenna unit 200/220/380/440 VAC, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz
Antenna voltage input (100 kn)
Model 200 VAC, 3 φ 50 Hz, 380 VAC, 3 φ, 50 Hz,
220 VAC, 3 φ, 60 Hz 440 VAC, 3 φ, 60 Hz
FAR-2167DS 3.0 A 1.5 A
5.5 Console 115/230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
5.6 Transformer (option)
For single phase RU-1803: 440 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
For triple phase RU-5693: 110 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz
RU-6522: 220 VAC, 3 phase, 50 Hz
RU-5466-1: 440 VAC, 3 phase, 50 Hz

6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
6.1 Ambient temperature
Monitor/processor/transceiver/control/power supply unit
-15°C to +55°C
Antenna unit -25°C to +55°C (storage +70°C)
6.2 Relative humidity 95% max. at 40°C
6.3 Degree of protection
Monitor/processor/control/power supply unit IPX0
Antenna unit IPX6
6.4 Vibration IEC60945 Ed.4

7 COLOR
7.1 Monitor unit Chassis: 2.5GY5/1.5, Panel: N3.0 (fixed)
7.2 Processor/power supply unit 2.5GY5/1.5
7.3 Control unit N3.0 (fixed)
7.4 Antenna unit N9.5 (fixed)

8 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (PM-50)

8.1 PM-30 (X-band)
8.1.1 Frequency range 9370 to 9450 MHz
8.1.2 Input power +8dBm min, +28dBm max.
8.1.3 Output power -36dBm (2nd pulse max. output), -56dBm (2nd pulse min. output)
8.1.4 Step levels 7.5 to 10.5 dB (1st pulse to 2nd pulse)
8.2 PM-50 (S-band)
8.2.1 Frequency range 3020 to 3080 MHz
8.2.2 Input power -5dBm min, +15dBm max.
8.2.3 Output power -15dBm (2nd pulse max. output), -35dBm (2nd pulse min. output)
8.2.4 Step levels 9.0 to 11.0 dB (1st pulse to 2nd pulse)

9 SWITCHING HUB (HUB-100)

9.1 Access format CSMA/CD
9.2 Switching format Store and forward

SP - 3 E3522S01A-M
FURUNO FAR-2157/2167DS

9.3 Transmission speed Semi-duplex: 10 Mbps/100 Mbps, Full-duplex: 20 Mbps/200 Mbps

9.4 Cable category 10 BASE-T: Category 3 or higher STP cable
100 BASE-TX: Category 5 or higher STP cable
9.5 Maximum cable length 100 m
9.6 Number of ports 8 ports
9.7 Port functions Auto-MDI/MDI-X compliant (straight/cross cable auto-recognition)
EMC compliant (STP cable port)
3 LED injectors (Link/Act, Full-duplex/Collision, 100/10 Mbps)
9.8 Environmental conditions
Ambient temperature -15 to +50°C
Relative humidity 95% (at 40°C)
EMC IEC 60945
Degree of protection IPX0
9.9 Power source 100-230VAC: 0.1A or less
9.10 Color N3.0

SP - 4 E3522S01A-M
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.1 Turning on the Power
The [POWER] switch ( ) is located at the left corner of the control unit. Open the
POWER switch cover and press the switch to turn on the radar system. To turn
off the radar, press the switch again. The screen shows the bearing scale and
digital timer approximately 30 seconds after power-on. The timer counts down
three minutes of warm-up time. During this period the magnetron (transmitter
tube) is warmed for transmission. When the timer has reached 0:00, the
indication “ST-BY” appears at the screen center, meaning the radar is now ready
to transmit pulses.

In the stand-by condition, markers, rings, map, charts, etc. are not shown.
Further, ARP is cancelled and the AIS display is erased.

In warm-up and stand-by condition, ON TIME and TX TIME counts in hours and
tenths of hour appear at the screen center.

Note: Avoid turning the power on directly after it has been turned off. Wait
several seconds before reapplying the power, to ensure proper start up.

1.2 Transmitter ON
After the power is turned on and the magnetron has warmed up, ST-BY appears
at the screen center, meaning the radar is ready to transmit radar pulses. You
may transmit by pressing the [STBY/TX] key on the full keyboard or roll the
trackball to choose the TX STBY box at the bottom left corner of the display and
then push the left button (above the trackball). The label at the left-hand side of
the guidance box at the bottom right corner of the screen changes from TX to
STBY.

TX
STBY STBY / Guidance
box
TX STBY box
Radar display

1-1
1. RADAR OPERATION

The radar is initially set to previously used range and pulse length. Other
settings such as brilliance levels, VRMs, EBLs and menu option selections are
also set to previous settings.

The [STBY/TX] key (or TX STBY box) toggles the radar between STBY and
TRANSMIT status. The antenna stops in stand-by and rotates in transmit. The
magnetron ages with time resulting in a reduction of output power. Therefore, it
is highly recommended that the radar be set to stand-by when not used for an
extended period of time.

Quick start
Provided that the radar was once in use with the transmitter tube (magnetron)
still warm, you can turn the radar into TRANSMIT condition without three
minutes of warm-up. If the [POWER] switch has been turned off by mistake or
the like and you wish to restart the radar promptly, turn on the [POWER] switch
not later than 10 seconds after power-off.

Echo area
The echo display area for the non-IMO radar (B, C and W types) is available in
three configurations: round, wide, and full screen. You can select configuration
with 7 ECHO AREA on the ECHO menu.

Round Wide Full

1-2
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.3 Control Unit

Two types of control units are available: Control Unit RCU-014 (full keyboard)
and Control Unit RCU-105 (palm control).
EBL rotary control VRM rotary control
Wheel
Left button Right button

BRILL A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN

OFF ON OFF ON

1 2 3
EBL HL EBL VRM
OFF OFFSET MODE

4 5 6
F1 F2 OFF CU/TM INDEX MENU ACQ
CENTER RESET LINE

F3 F4
7
VECTOR
8
VECTOR
9
TARGET
+ TARGET
DATA
TIME MODE LIST
RANGE
ALARM STBY 0 TARGET
CANCEL ENTER
ACK TX TRAILS BRILL MARK
- CANCEL

Trackball Trackball
Module

Control Unit RCU-014 (full keyboard)

Wheel
Left button Right button

F1
Trackball
F2

F3
Trackball
F4 Module

Control Unit RCU-015 (palm control)

1-3
1. RADAR OPERATION

Control description

Control Description
Control Unit RCU-014 (full keyboard)
POWER Turns the system on and off.
EBL and VRM rotary controls Adjust EBL and VRM, respectively.
EBL ON, EBL OFF Turns the EBLs on and off, respectively.
F1-F4 Execute menu short cut assigned.
ALARM ACK Silences audible alarm.
STBY TX Toggles between stand-by and transmit.
BRILL Adjusts display brilliance.
A/C RAIN Suppresses rain clutter.
A/C SEA Suppresses sea clutter.
GAIN Adjusts sensitivity of the radar receiver.
HL OFF Temporarily erases the heading line while pressed.
EBL OFFSET Enables, disables the EBL offset. In menu operation, switches
polarity from North to South and East to West and vice versa.
MODE Chooses presentation mode.
OFF CENTER Shifts own ship position.
CU/TM RESET • Moves own ship position in 75% radius in stern direction.
• Resets the heading line to 0° in course-up and true motion
modes.
INDEX LINE Turns index lines on and off.
VECTOR TIME Chooses vector time (length).
VECTOR MODE Chooses vector mode, relative or true.
TARGET LIST Displays ARP target list.
CANCEL TRAILS Cancels all target trails. In menu operation it clears line of data.
ENTER MARK Enters marks; terminates keyboard input.
VRM ON, VRM OFF Turns the VRMs on and off, respectively
MENU Opens and closes the MAIN menu; closes other menus.
ACQ • Acquires a target for ARP after choosing it with the trackball.
• Changes a sleeping AIS target to an activated one after
choosing it with the trackball.
RANGE Chooses radar range.
TARGET DATA Displays target data for ARP or AIS target chosen with the
trackball.
TARGET CANCEL Cancels tracking on ARP, AIS or reference target chosen with
the trackball.
Control Unit RCU-015 (palm control)
POWER Turns the system on and off.
F1-F4 Execute menu short cut assigned.

1-4
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.4 Main Menu

You may access the MAIN menu from the full keyboard or by using the trackball.
In later sections only the procedure for menu operation by trackball is given.

Main menu operation by keyboard

1. Press the [MENU] key. The MAIN menu appears in the text area at the right
side of the screen.

[MAIN MENU]

1 [ECHO] Echo processing functions

2 [MARK] Mainly turns markers on/off.
3 [ALARM] Sets guard alarm functions; outputs alarm signal.
4 [ARP AIS] Sets ARP and AIS functions.
5 [PLOTTER] Chart and track functions
6 [CARD] Memory card functions
7 [NAV DATA] Turns nav data on/off.
8 [NAV LINE WPT] Processes nav lines and waypoints.
9 [CUSTOMIZE TEST] Customizes operation; executes diagnostics.

MAIN menu
2. Press the numeral key corresponding to the menu you wish to open. For
example, press the [2] key to open the MARK menu.
[MARK]

1 BACK
2 OWN SHIP MARK
OFF/ON
3 STERN MARK
OFF/ON
4 INDEX LINE BEARING*1
REL/TRUE
5 INDEX LINE*2 *1 W-type shows INDEX LINE1. Same choices as INDEX LINE.
1/2/3/6 *2 W-type shows INDEX LINE2. Same choices as INDEX LINE.
6 INDEX LINE MODE*3 *3 Shown when INDEX LINE is set to other than "1" .
VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL Not shown on IMO or A type.
7 [BARGE MARK] *4 IMO and A types show
8 EBL OFFSET BASE 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING (REL/TRUE)
STAB GND/STAB HDG/
STAB NORTH
9 [EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET]*4
0 RING
OFF/ON

MARK menu
3. Press the numeral key corresponding to the
item you wish to set. Useful keys in menu operation
4. Consecutively press the same numeral key To clear a line of numeric data:
pressed at step 3 to choose appropriate Use the [CANCEL TRAILS] key.
option and then press the [ENTER MARK] Switch between plus and minus,
North and South or East and West:
key to register your selection. Use the [2] key.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.

1-5
1. RADAR OPERATION

Main menu operation by trackball

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen. The
guidance box at the bottom right corner (see the illustration at the bottom of
the next page for location) now reads “DISP MAIN MENU.”

MENU

Menu box
2. Push the left button to display the MAIN menu.
[MAIN MENU]

1 [ECHO] Echo processing functions

2 [MARK] Mainly turns markers on/off.
3 [ALARM] Sets guard alarm functions; outputs alarm signal.
4 [ARP l AIS] Sets ARP and AIS functions.
5 [PLOTTER] Chart and track functions
6 [CARD] Memory card functions
7 [NAV DATA] Turns nav data on/off.
8 [NAV LINE WPT] Processes nav lines and waypoints.
9 [CUSTOMIZE TEST] Customizes operation; executes diagnostics.

MAIN menu
3. Roll the wheel or trackball to choose the menu you wish to open and then
push the wheel or the left button. For example, choose the 2 [MARK] menu
and then push the wheel or the left button.
[MARK]

1 BACK
2 OWN SHIP MARK
OFF/ON
3 STERN MARK
OFF/ON
4 INDEX LINE BEARING*1
REL/TRUE
5 INDEX LINE*2 *1 W-type shows INDEX LINE1. Same choices as INDEX LINE.
1/2/3/6 *2 W-type shows INDEX LINE2. Same choices as INDEX LINE.
6 INDEX LINE MODE*3 *3 Shown when INDEX LINE is set to other than "1" .
VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL Not shown on IMO or A type.
7 [BARGE MARK] *4 IMO and A types show
8 EBL OFFSET BASE 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING (REL/TRUE)
STAB GND/STAB HDG/
STAB NORTH
9 [EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET]*4
0 RING
OFF/ON

MARK menu
4. Roll the wheel to choose item desired and then push the wheel or the left
button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose option desired and then push the wheel or the left
button to register your selection.
6. Push the right button to close the menu. (Several pushes may be necessary
depending on the menu used.)

1-6
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.5 Operation Using the On-Screen Boxes

All radar functions can be accessed by using the trackball alone. This is done by
choosing the appropriate on-screen box with the trackball and operating the
trackball module to choose item and option. (See paragraph 1.9 for location of all
on-screen boxes.) On-screen boxes come in two varieties: Function selection
and function selection w/pop-up menu. On-screen boxes of the latter type have
“►” at the right side of their boxes, as in the MARK box shown below.

To operate the radar using on-screen boxes, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to place the trackball marker inside the box desired.
Note: The trackball marker changes its configuration according to its location.
It is an arrow when placed outside the effective display and a cursor
(+) when inside the effective display. See the illustration on the next
page for further details.

For example, choose the MARK box, which is at the bottom left corner.
MARK
Mark type last
1
selected, mark -> +
number 162.5°T 11.7 NM
Bearing and range from
own ship to mark

MARK box
When a box is correctly selected, its color changes from green to yellow
(default colors) and the guidance box at the bottom right corner shows
operational guidance. The operational guidance shows the function of the
left and right buttons, with a diagonal line separating the information. For the
MARK box, for example, the operational guidance is “MARK SELECT /
MARK MENU.” In this case you would push the left button to choose a mark
or push the right button to open the MARK menu.

Function of left button

Function of right button

MARK
MARK Box 1
>+
MARK
/
SELECT
MARK
MENU
Guidance box

Arrow
For choosing
on-screen box
Guidance box (Example: guidance for MARK box)

1-7
1. RADAR OPERATION

Trackball marker location and guidance box indication

The trackball marker is either a cursor (+) or an arrow ( ) depending
on whether it is within or outside the display area, respectively.
Further, the indication in the guidance box changes according to
trackball marker location.

Guidance box reads

"JUMP CURSOR / DISP MENU."
Push the left button to choose the on-screen
box closest to the arrow or push the right
button to display the MAIN menu.

To choose boxes successively, push the wheel

when the guidance box reads as above.
Then, the nearest box is selected and marked
Trackball marker is out of with the double-ended arrow ( ) and the
effective display area guidance box reads
(incl. text area) and "JUMP FORWARD / JUMP BACKWARD."
not selecting a box: Hit the left button to go to the box below or
The trackball marker is adjacent to the currently selected box or hit
an arrow the right button to go to the box above or
adjacent to the currently selected box.
Continue pushing a button to choose boxes
successively. This is convenient for operation
under heavy pitching and rolling. To cancel this
feature, push the wheel when the guidance box
reads as above.

Guidance box reads

"TARGET DATA & ACQ / CURSOR MENU."
In this condition you may access cursor-operated
functions, by hitting the left button for direct
+ selection of function or the right button to choose
desired functions from the CURSOR menu. For
further details about the CURSOR menu,
see paragraph 1.6.

Trackball marker is within

effective display area:
The trackball marker is
a cursor

2. Push the left button (or roll the wheel depending on the box) until the desired
option is displayed in the box.
Note: When you chose an on-screen box’s option by rolling the wheel, the
box and its contents turn red. This simply indicates that the chosen
setting is different from the currently active setting. To change the
setting, push the wheel or the left button. If neither the wheel nor the
left button is pushed within about 30 seconds after operating the wheel,
the previous setting is automatically restored.

1-8
 1. RADAR OPERATION

3. The pop-up menu attached to the MARK box is the MARK menu. To open the
menu, push the right button. The menu opens in the text area at the right side
of the screen.

[MARK MENU]

1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA
2 MARK KIND
ORIGIN MARK(No. )/
ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/
MAP MARK/
WP 1~50/
WP 51~ 100/
WP 101~150/
WP 151~ 200/
OWN SHIP SHAPE
8 MARK POSN
CURSOR/OS/L/L
00°000.00 N
000°000.00 E
9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
0 MAP MARK COLOR* * Not available on IMO
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/ or A type
CYA/MAG/WHT

MARK menu
Note: Any menu may be operated from the full keyboard or the trackball, or a
combination of the two in case of Control Unit RCU-014. Note that in
later sections only the procedure for menu operation by the
trackball is given.
4. Roll the wheel to choose item desired and then push the wheel or the left
button. Selected item is initially shown in reverse video and changes to
normal video and circumscribed when the wheel or the left button is pushed.
5. Roll the wheel to choose option desired and then push the wheel or the left
button. Selected option is initially shown in reverse video and changes to
normal video and circumscribed when the wheel or the left button is pushed.
6. Push the right button to close the menu. (On some menus several presses of
the right button are required to close the menu.)

1-9
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.6 Cursor Menu

Functions which require the use of the cursor, such
[CURSOR MENU]
as EBL offset and zoom, may be activated directly
from the guidance box or from the CURSOR menu, 2 ↓
TARGET DATA & ACQ/
either method with the cursor inside the effective TARGET CANCEL/
display area. Below is the procedure for choosing a ARP TGT DATA & ACQ/
cursor-related function from the CURSOR menu. In TARGET TRACK ON*/
TARGET TRACK OFF*/
later sections only the procedure for selection from REF MARK/
the guidance box is given. EBL OFFSET/
OFFCENTER/
ZOOM/
1. Roll the trackball to place the cursor inside the MARK DELETE/
effective display area. OWN TRACK DELETE/
2. Roll the wheel to show “TARGET DATA & ACQ / TGT TRACK DELETE/
CHART ALIGN/
CURSOR MENU” in the guidance box. 8 ↑
3. Push the right button to show the CURSOR
menu. * Not available on IMO type
4. Roll the wheel to choose “2” and then push the
wheel or the left button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose function desired and then push the wheel or the left
button.
Note: For operation from the keyboard, you may press the [2] key to choose a
function in top-to-bottom order or the [8] key to choose in reverse order.

Cursor Menu item Description

TARGET DATA & ACQ ARP: Acquires ARP target; displays data for chosen ARP target.
AIS: Activates sleeping AIS target; display data for chosen AIS
target.
TARGET CANCEL ARP: Cancels tracking on chosen ARP target.
AIS: Sleeps chosen AIS target.
ARP TGT DATA & ACQ Acquires chosen echo as ARP target.
TARGET TRACK ON Turns ARP target track on. (A, B, C and W types)
TARGET TRACK OFF Turns ARP target track off. (A, B, C and W types)
REF MARK Inscribes reference mark, for target-based speed input.
EBL OFFSET Offsets EBL to measure range and bearing between two targets.
OFF CENTER Shifts screen center to chosen location.
ZOOM Zooms chosen location.
MARK DELETE Deletes chosen mark (plotter mark, origin mark or waypoint
mark).
OWN TRACK DELETE Deletes own ship’s tracks.
TGT TRACK DELETE Deletes other ship’s tracks.
CHART ALIGN Aligns chart with radar picture.

1-10
 1. RADAR OPERATION

6. The guidance box shows “XX / EXIT.” (XX = function chosen). Roll the
trackball to place the cursor where desired.
7. Push the left button to execute the function selected at step 5.
8. To quit the function selected, push the right button when the guidance box
shows “XX / EXIT.” (XX = function chosen at step 5)

1.7 Monitor Brilliance

The brilliance of the entire screen should be adjusted according to lighting
conditions. Monitor brilliance should be adjusted before adjusting relative
brilliance levels on the BRILL menu to be explained later.

Note: The brilliance of a commercial monitor cannot be adjusted from the radar.
See the owner’s manual of the commercial monitor for how to adjust its
brilliance.

By keyboard
Operate the [BRILL] control on the control unit to adjust brilliance. Turn it
clockwise to increase brilliance; counterclockwise to decrease brilliance. Watch
the BRILL box (see illustration below) to know current brilliance level.

By trackball
1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the brilliance level indicator in the
brilliance level indication box at the bottom left corner of the screen.
Brilliance bar
Shows brilliance level.
Place arrow inside box
to adjust screen brilliance.

BRILL1 26

Brilliance level

Brillance, color set no.

(For details, see para. 1.50.)
Brilliance level indicator
2. Roll the wheel downward to increase brilliance or roll it upward to decrease
brilliance. The length of the brilliance bar increases or decreases with
operation of the wheel.

Note: If nothing appears on the screen at power-up when using Control Unit
RCU-015 (palm control) or when the radar is in stand-by, press and hold
down any key except the power switch for four seconds to automatically
set up for medium display brilliance.

1-11
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.8 Choosing the Display Mode

This radar has the following display modes:
• IMO, A type: Radar, Radar + Plotter
• B, C, W type: Radar, Radar + Plotter, Plotter

Choose a display mode as below. Note that a display mode cannot be chosen
when the menu is open.

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the DISPLAY MODE box at the top of
the screen.
DISPLAY
XX* * XX = display mode

DISPLAY MODE box

2. Push the left button to choose appropriate mode:
RADAR: Radar picture
+PLOTTER: Radar picture + plotter picture (incl. chart)
PLOTTER: Plotter picture

1-12
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.9 On-Screen Boxes and Markers

Reference Point Box
Trial Maneuver (Elapsed time shown
when trial maneuver is active.)
PICTURE Box, Main Picture Settings SET and DRIFT Boxes
PULSELENGTH Box
ANTENNA Box CURSOR DATA Box
PRESENTATION MODE Box GAIN Setting
RANGE Box A/C SEA Setting Note: Speed, Set and
DISPLAY MODE Box A/C RAIN Setting Drift values not shown.
Heading Marker TUNING Setting
NM DISPLAY GAIN
6 /1 RADAR REF POINT SEA AUTO
25
22 HDG 000.0°T Heading
HEAD UP TB RM 350 000 010
ANT POSN RAIN
TUNE AUTO
19
SPD 0.0kt BT WT
MAN Speed, Source
ANT 1 X-BAND
340 020 SB 0.0kt Log Speed
34°40. 649 N
PULSE S1 330 030 + 135°18. 303 E COG 00.0°T Course over Ground
320 SET 000. 0°T SOG 0.0kt GPS Speed over Ground,
PICTURE4 040 DRIFT 0. 9kt OS POSN 34°40.00N Source
IR OFF Heading TRIAL OFF DGPS 135°24.00E Position
310 Line 050 MENU Box
ES OFF
EAV OFF
MENU
AUTO RAIN
Index
CHART Chart Align ON
OFF 300 060 ALIGN
Line ZOOM or ARP
DATA BOX
290 070 Range (See next page.)
Guard Rings
280 080 ZOOM, ARP,
Zone
Cursor or AIS DATA BOX
270 No. 1 090 (See next page.)
EBL
TARGET LIST
260 OS 100
Box
No. 2 Symbol ARP,
250 EBL 110
AIS DATA BOX
No. 2
No. 1 VRM ARP ACQ
240 VRM MODE Box*
120
IL1 ON Stern North AIS DISP Box
032. 0°T 230 Marker Marker 130 DISP
5. 60NM
MARK
TARGET
LIST
ARPA
MANU
OFF
AIS
OFF AIS Message Arrival
VECTOR TRUE 30M
220 140 GZ1 PAST POSN REL 3M
+ GZ2 CPA LIMIT 0. 5NM 22MIN
210 150 ALARM1
190.0°T, 5.75NM
200 160
ALARM2 ALERT BOX
BRILL1 26 TRUE TRAIL OFF
HL
190 180 170 CU/TM
(See next page.)
OFF EBL1 >280.9°T< VRM1>3.682NM< RESET
TX WATCH Origin Mark ALARM TARGET
STBY EBL2 240. 8°R 11 : 28 VRM2 5.221NM ACK DATA & ACQ
CURSOR
MENU

WATCH Box CU/TM Guidance

EBL2 Box (Alarm watch RESET, Box
EBL1 Box time) ALARM ACK
Box CPA LIMIT Box
TX/STBY Box PAST POSN Box
HL OFF Box ARP VECTOR Box
BRILL Box VRM2 Box *: "ATA" replaces
MARK Box VRM1 Box "ARPA" when
Bearing and range to mark ATA function is
TRAIL MODE Box
used.
IL (Index Line) Box ALARM Box
Index line orientation,
Index line interval Guard Zone (GZ) Box

Display screen

1-13
1. RADAR OPERATION

Heading is TRUE
HDG 242.2°T (variation-corrected gyro or
SPD 9.9kt BT WT
MAN
magnetic heading)
SB 0.1kt Speed data is LOG, MAN, etc.,
COG 30.2°T showing sensor and types.
SOG 10.2.2kt GPS CSE when water tracking mode is
selected.
OS POSN
34°40.00N STW when water tracking
Electronic Position-fixing
DGPS 135°24.00E mode is selected.
System and position*

Depth DEPTH 22.30 m WIND 15.4 m/s Wind Speed and Angle*
45.1°T (True or Relative angle)
20
N
Depth 40
60 Tide relative to North,
Echogram 80 W E full scale 10 kt
(See 1.40.) Wind direction relative to
100
-30 20 10 S
CURRENT 2.3kt 69.9°R own ship heading, full
Zoom display appears
TEMP 16°C TTG 00:00:00 scale 100 kt.
in nav data box when WPT001 6.5NM 35.2°R
nav data is turned off. DATE OCT/25/03 10:00 UTC Current speed and direction*
Water temperature, TTG,
ARP Target WPT no., range and bearing
Data (or to waypoint
Zoom) Date, time

* Referenced to ship's heading

(relative) in head-up,
head up TB and course-up.
Referenced to North (true) in
north-up and true motion.
For presentation mode
ARP Target ARP TARGET
No. 42 description, see paragraph 1.12.
Data
(See Chapter 3.) BRG 25.5°T
RNG 3.4NM
T CSE 264.0°T
* GPS, DGPS, T SPD 12.3KT
PPS, RTK, FRTK, CPA 2.9NM
DR. PPS, RTK TCPA 12.2MIN
and FRTK require BCR 1.7NM
BCT 20MIN
GGA sentence.
ARP, AIS Functions Box

GUARD ALARM, TIMER ALARM, GUARD ZONE, Alert Box

LOST TRGT, CPA/TCPA, TARGET FULL(AUTO), (Warnings and Alert
TARGET FULL(MAN), AZIMUTH, HEAD LINE, Messages)
TRIGGER, VIDEO, GYRO, LOG, EPFS, XTE,
ARRIVAL WPT, DEPTH,RECEIVE, other
Guidance Box

Data fields

1-14
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.10 Tuning the Receiver

1.10.1 Choosing the tuning method
The tuning method can be selected with the TUNE box at the top of the screen.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the TUNE box (TUNE AUTO or TUNE MAN) at
the top of the screen.
Tuning bar

Place arrow inside box

to adjust tuning, when
TUNE MAN is selected.
Tuning method (AUTO or MAN) TUNE AUTO

Tuning level
TUNE box
2. Push the left button or roll the wheel to display TUNE AUTO or TUNE MAN
as appropriate.
3. If you used the wheel to choose tuning method, push the wheel or the left
button to change setting.

1.10.2 Initializing tuning

Automatic tuning is initialized during the installation. However, if you feel that
automatic tuning is not working properly try re-initializing it as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the wheel or the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ECHO and then push the wheel or the left button.
[ECHO]

1 BACK
2 2ND ECHO REJ
OFF/ON
3 TUNE INITIALIZE
4 PM*1
OFF/ON
5 SART
OFF/ON
6 WIPER
OFF/1/2
7 ECHO AREA*2 *1 Not available on FAR-2157/2167DS
CIRCLE/WIDE/ALL *2 Not available on IMO or A type

ECHO menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 3 TUNE INITIALIZE.
4. Push the wheel or the left button to initialize automatic tuning. (For operation
from the keyboard, press the [ENTER MARK] key.) “WORK IN PROGRESS
– TUNE INITIALIZE” appears in the Alert Box during the initialization.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1-15
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.10.3 Automatic tuning

Choose automatic tuning following paragraph 1.10.1. The TUNE box shows
TUNE AUTO.

1.10.4 Manual tuning

1. Roll the trackball to choose the RANGE box at top left corner and then push
the left or right button as appropriate to choose the 48-mile range. Push the
left button to lower the range; the right button to raise the range.
2. Choose manual tuning following the procedure in paragraph 1.10.1.
3. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the tuning bar area in the TUNE box.
4. Roll the wheel to adjust tuning. The best tuning point is where the bar graph
swings maximum. The arrow below the bar graph shows tuning control
position; not the tuning condition.

1.11 Aligning Heading with Gyrocompass

With connection of a gyrocompass, ship's heading is displayed at the right side
of the screen. Upon turning on the radar, align the on-screen GYRO readout with
the gyrocompass reading by following the procedure shown below. Once you
have set the initial heading correctly, resetting is not usually required. However, if
the GYRO readout looks wrong or the gyro alarm sounds, follow the procedure
below. Note that the FURUNO SC-60/120 does not require alignment on the
radar.

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the HDG box at the top right corner of
the screen.
2. Push the right button to open the HDG menu.

[HDG MENU]

1 HDG SOURCE
AD-10/SERIAL
2 GC-10 SETTING
000.0°

HDG menu
3. Roll the wheel downward to choose GC-10 SETTING and then push the
wheel or the left button.
Note: If heading source selected is not suitable change it at 1 HDG
SOURCE to match your heading source.
4. Roll the wheel to set the heading. (For entry through the keyboard use the
numeric keys.)
5. Push the wheel to finish.
6. Push the right button to close the menu.

1-16
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.12 Presentation Modes

This radar has the following presentation modes:

Relative Motion (RM)

Head-up: Unstabilized
Head-up TB: Head-up with compass-stabilized bearing scale (True Bearing)
where the bearing scale rotates with the compass reading.
Course-up: Compass-stabilized relative to ship’s orientation at the time of
selecting course-up.
North-up: Compass-stabilized with reference to north
Stern-up: The radar image is rotated 180°. Graphics and relative and true
bearings are also rotated 180°.

True Motion (TM)

North-up: Ground or sea stabilized with compass and speed inputs.
Stern-up: Same as in relative motion.

1.12.1 Choosing presentation mode

By keyboard
Press the [MODE] key consecutively to choose presentation mode desired. The
PRESENTATION MODE box shows the current presentation mode. (See the
illustration below.)

By trackball
1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the PRESENTATION MODE box at
the top left corner of the screen.
HEAD UP RM*
* = Other modes:
STERN-UP, HEAD UP TB RM, COURSE UP RM,
NORTH UP RM, NORTH UP TM

PRESENTATION MODE box

2. Push the left button to choose mode desired.

Loss of gyrocompass signal

When the compass signal is lost, “HEADING SET” appears in red at the gyro
readout, the presentation mode automatically becomes head-up, all ARP and
AIS targets and map or chart are erased. After restoring the compass signal,
choose the presentation mode with the [MODE] key or the PRESENTATION
MODE box.

1-17
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.12.2 Description of presentation modes

Head-up mode
The head-up mode is a display in which the line connecting own ship and the top
of the display indicates own ship’s heading.

The target pips are painted at their measured distances and in their directions
relative to own ship’s heading.

A short line on the bearing scale is the north marker indicating heading sensor
north. A failure of the heading sensor input will cause the north marker to
disappear and the readout to show ***.*° and the message HDG SIG MISSING
appears in red at the lower-right corner of the screen.
Heading Line
North Marker

Note: When display is off-centered,

the heading mark appears at 000 degrees.

Head-up mode

Course-up mode
The course-up mode is an azimuth stabilized display in which a line connecting
the center with the top of the display indicates own ship’s intended course
(namely, own ship’s previous heading just before this mode has been selected).

Target pips are painted at their measured distances and in their directions
relative to the intended course, which is maintained at the 0-degree position. The
heading line moves in accordance with ship’s yawing and course change. This
mode is useful to avoid smearing of picture during course change.

North Marker Heading Line

Course-up mode

1-18
 1. RADAR OPERATION

Head-up TB (True Bearing) mode

Radar echoes are shown in the same way as in the head-up mode. The
difference from normal head-up presentation lies in the orientation of the bearing
scale. The bearing scale is heading sensor stabilized. That is, it rotates in
accordance with the heading sensor signal, enabling you to know own ship’s
heading at a glance.

This mode is available when the radar is interfaced with a gyro heading sensor.
If the gyro heading sensor fails, the bearing scale returns to the state of head-up
mode.

North-up mode
The north-up mode paints target pips at their measured distances and in their
true (heading sensor) directions from own ship, north bearing maintained at the
top of the screen. The heading line changes its direction according to the ship’s
heading. Requires heading signal.

If the compass fails, the presentation mode changes to head-up and the north
marker disappears. Also, the HDG indication shows ***.*°. And the message
HDG SIG MISSING appears in red at the lower-right corner of the screen.
North Marker Heading Line

North-up mode

Stern-up mode
The stern-up mode rotates the
head-up mode picture, relative and
true bearings and display graphics
180°. This mode is useful on
dual-radar tugboats when backing up;
one radar shows head-up and another
shows stern-up. To enable the
stern-up mode, turn on STERN-UP on
the 7 OPERATION menu. Stern-up is North Marker Heading Line
not available on the IMO or A type.
Stern-up mode

1-19
1. RADAR OPERATION

True motion mode

Own ship and other moving objects move in accordance with their true courses
and speed. In ground stabilized TM, all fixed targets, such as landmasses,
appear as stationary echoes. In the sea stabilized TM without set and drift inputs,
the landmass can move on the screen. Note that true motion is not available on
the 72 nm (non-IMO type only) or 96 nm range scale. If COG and SOG (both
over the ground) are not available on TM mode, enter the set (tide direction) and
drift (tide speed) manually referring to the Tide Table.

When own ship reaches a point corresponding to 50% of the radius of the
display, own ship position is automatically reset to a point of 75% radius opposite
to the extension of the heading line passing through the display center. You may
also reset the own ship symbol manually by pressing the [CU/TM RESET] key,
or roll the trackball to choose the CU/TM RESET box at the bottom right corner
of the display and then push the left button.

If the heading sensor fails, the mode is changed to the head-up and the north
marker disappears. The HDG readout shows ***.*° and the message HDG SIG
MISSING appears in red at the lower-right corner of the screen.
North Marker Heading Line

True motion mode

Automatic resetting of own ship mark in true motion mode

North
Heading 340 350 000 010 020 marker 340 350 000 010 020 340 350 000 010 020
330 030 330 030 330 030
line 320 040 320 040 320 040

310 050 310 050 310 050

300 060 300 060 300 060

290 070 290 070 290 070

280 080 280 080 280 080

270 090 270 090 270 090

260 100 260 100 260 100

250 110 250 110 250 110

240 120 240 120 240 120

230 130 230 130 230 130

220 140 220 140 220 140
210 150 210 150 210 150
200 160 200 160 200 160
190 180 170 190 180 170 190 180 170

(a) True motion (b) Own ship has reached a (c) Own ship is automatically
is selected point 75% of display radius reset to 75% of radius

1-20
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.13 Entering Own Ship's Speed

The ARP and azimuth stabilized presentation modes require own ship speed
input and compass signal. The speed can be entered from a log (STW) or GPS
(SOG) or manually on the menu. Note that FURUNO GPS Navigator GP-90
provides COG and SOG.

1.13.1 Automatic speed input by log or GPS navigator

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the SPD box at the top right corner of
the screen.
2. Push the right button to display the SPEED menu.

[SPEED MENU]

1 SHIP SPEED
LOG(BT)/LOG(WT)/
GPS/MANUAL/REF
2 MANUAL SPEED
0.0kt
3 SET DRIFT
OFF/ON

SPEED menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 1 SHIP SPEED and then push the wheel or the left
button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose the appropriate source for automatic speed input
and then push the wheel or the left button.
LOG (BT): Log, speed over ground (SOG). Note that a log cannot produce
BT (Bottom Tracking) speed in deep waters without set and drift
entry.
LOG (WT): Log, speed thru water (STW)
GPS: Speed input by GPS navigator
5. Push the right button to close the menu.

Notes on speed input

• IMO Resolution A.823(19) for ARPA recommends that a speed log to be

interfaced with an ARPA should be capable of providing through-the-water
speed (forward speed).
• Be sure not to choose a LOG option when a speed log is not connected. If the
log signal is not provided, the ship speed readout at the top of the screen will
be blank. In the event of a log error, enter speed manually.
• Warning label SPD **.* and LOG appear if no log signal is present for 30 s
while the ship’s speed has been more than 5 kt.
• With the serial speed inputs and SOG selection, if the type of data is changed
from SOG to STW the label SOG appears in red (at the upper right corner of
the display).
• When the AIS feature is active, MANUAL and REF are shown in gray to
indicate they are not available for selection.

1-21
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.13.2 Manual speed input

If the speed log is not working, enter speed manually as below. In this case the
speed data type is shown as MANUAL and is speed thru water (STW). Note that,
for the IMO specification radar, manual speed input is not available when the AIS
feature is active.

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the SPD box at the top right corner of
the screen.
2. Push the right button to display the SPEED menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 1 SHIP SPEED and then push the wheel or the left
button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose MANUAL and then push the wheel or the left button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MANUAL SPEED and then push the wheel or the
left button.
6. Roll the wheel to set speed. (For entry through the keyboard, use the
numeric keys.)
7. Push the wheel to finish.
8. Push the right button to close the menu.

1.14 Choosing the Range Scale

The selected range scale, range ring interval and pulselength are shown at the
upper left corner on the screen. When a target of interest comes closer, reduce
the range scale so that it appears in 50-90% of the display radius.

By keyboard
Use the [RANGE] key to choose range desired. Hit the “+” part of the key to
raise the range; the “-“ part to lower the range.

By trackball
1. Roll the trackball to choose the RANGE box at the top left corner of the
screen. The guidance box shows “RANGE DOWN / RANGE UP.”

0.125 NM0.025
RANGE box
2. Push the left button to lower the range; the right button to raise the range.
You may also choose the range by rolling the wheel and then pushing it or
the left button.

1-22
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.15 Choosing the Pulselength

The pulselength in use is displayed at the upper-left position of the screen using
the indications shown in the table below.

Label and pulselength

Indication Pulselength (μs)

S1 (Short pulse 1) 0.07
S2 (Short pulse 2) 0.15
M1 (Medium pulse 1) 0.3
M2 (Medium pulse 2) 0.5
M3 (Medium pulse 3) 0.7
L (Long pulse) 1.2
*: S, M1, M2 and L on FAR-2157(-BB) and S-band radars.

Appropriate pulselengths are preset to individual range scales and function keys.
If you are not satisfied with the current pulselength settings, you may change
them as shown below.

1.15.1 Choosing pulselength

You can choose the pulselength for the 0.5 to 24 nm range scales as below.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen.
Note: The PICTURE box sets up the radar picture according to expected
usage, such as harbor navigation, long range, short range, etc. For
further details see paragraph 1.33.
2. Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu.

[PICTURE MENU]

1 INT REJECT
OFF/1/2/3
2 ECHO STRETCH
OFF/1/2/3
3 ECHO AVERAGE
OFF/1/2/3
4 NOISE REJ
OFF/ON
5 AUTO STC
OFF/ON
6 AUTO RAIN
OFF/1/2/3/4
7 VIDEO CONTRAST
1/2/3/4/
A/B/C
8 [PULSE]
9 [CONDITION]
0 DEFAULT (ENTERX3)

PICTURE menu

1-23
1. RADAR OPERATION

3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [PULSE] and then push the wheel.

[PULSE MENU] [PULSE MENU]

1 BACK 1 BACK
2 0.5NM 2 0.75NM
S1/S2 S/M1
3 0.75NM 3 1.5NM
S1/S2/M1 S/M1
4 1.5NM 4 3NM
S1/S2/M1 M1/M2
5 3NM 5 6NM
S2/M1/M2/M3 M2/L
6 6NM 6 12-24NM
M1/M2/M3/L M2/L
7 12-24NM
M2/M3/L

PULSE menu PULSE menu

(12, 25 kW X-band) (50 kW X-band, all S-band)
4. Roll the wheel to choose a range and then push the wheel or the left button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose pulselength desired and then push the wheel or the
left button.
6. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1.15.2 Changing pulselength

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PULSELENGTH box at the left side of the
screen. The guidance box shows “PULSE SHORTER / PULSE LONGER.”
PULSE XX*
* XX = Pulse width setting

PULSELENGTH box
2. Push the left button to shorten the pulselength or the right button to lengthen
the pulselength. You may also choose the pulselength by rolling the wheel
and pushing it or the left button.

1-24
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.16 Adjusting the Sensitivity

The gain control adjusts the sensitivity of the receiver.

The proper setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen.
If you set up for too little sensitivity, weak echoes may be missed. On the other
hand excessive sensitivity yields too much background noise; strong targets may
be missed because of the poor contrast between desired echoes and the
background noise on the display.

To adjust receiver sensitivity, adjust the gain control so background noise is just
visible on the screen.

By keyboard
While monitoring the gain level indicator at the top of the screen, operate the
[GAIN] control to adjust the sensitivity.

By trackball
1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the gain level indicator at the top of
the screen.
Level bar
Place arrow inside
window to adjust gain.

GAIN 30

GAIN level indicator

2. Roll the wheel downward to increase the gain or upward to decrease it. 100
levels (0-100) are available.

1-25
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.17 Suppressing Sea Clutter

Echoes from waves cover the central part of the display with random signals
known as sea clutter. The higher the waves, and the higher the antenna above
the water, the further the clutter will extend. When sea clutter masks the picture,
suppress it by the A/C SEA control, either manually or automatically.

1.17.1 Choosing method of adjustment

1. Roll the trackball to choose SEA AUTO or SEA MAN (whichever is shown) at
the top of the display.
Level bar
Place arrow inside window
to adjust A/C SEA.

SEA AUTO 30

A/C SEA adjustment

method (SEA AUTO or SEA MAN)

A/C SEA level indicator

2. Push the left button to display SEA AUTO or SEA MAN as appropriate.

1.17.2 Automatic adjustment by the A/C SEA control

Auto A/C SEA allows for fine tuning of the A/C SEA circuit, within ±20 dB.
Accordingly, with the bar reading set to 100, gain is not lowered to minimum as
with manual A/C SEA on close-in ranges. Further, the auto A/C SEA level is low
because the average value of the original input echo is low in areas where there
are no sea surface reflections. For example, when the ship is alongside a quay
and the radar picture shows echoes from both land and sea, you can observe
the size of echoes because the STC curve is different depending size of echoes.

Note: The auto A/C function can erase weak target echoes. Adjust the control
carefully, watching the display.

By keyboard
1. Choose SEA AUTO following the procedure in paragraph 1.17.1.
2. While observing the A/C SEA level indicator, adjust the A/C SEA with the [A/C
SEA] control. 100 levels are available.

1-26
 1. RADAR OPERATION

By trackball
1. Choose SEA AUTO following the procedure in paragraph 1.17.1.
2. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the A/C SEA level indicator at the top
of the display.
3. While observing the A/C SEA level indicator, roll the wheel downward to
increase the A/C SEA or upward to decrease it. 100 levels (0-100) are
available.

1.17.3 Manual adjustment of A/C SEA

The A/C SEA control reduces the amplification of echoes at short ranges (where
clutter is the greatest) and progressively increases amplification as the range
increases, so amplification will be normal at those ranges where there is no sea
clutter.

The proper setting of the A/C SEA should be such that the clutter is broken up
into small dots, and small targets become distinguishable. If the setting is set too
low, targets will be hidden in the clutter, while if the setting is too high, both sea
clutter and targets will disappear from the display. In most cases adjust the
control until clutter has disappeared to leeward, but a little is still visible
windward.

Sea clutter at A/C SEA adjusted;

screen center sea clutter suppressed
By keyboard
1. Choose SEA MAN following the procedure in paragraph 1.17.1.
2. Watching the A/C SEA level indicator at the top of the display, adjust the A/C
SEA with the [A/C SEA] control. 100 levels (0-100) are available.

By trackball
1. Choose SEA MAN following the procedure in paragraph 1.17.1.
2. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the A/C SEA level indicator at the top
of the display.
3. While observing the A/C SEA level indicator, roll the wheel downward to
increase the A/C SEA or upward to decrease it. 100 levels (0-100) are
available.

1-27
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.18 Suppressing Rain Clutter

Use the AUTO RAIN and A/C RAIN to suppress rain clutter. AUTO RAIN
suppresses rain clutter in the picture and A/C RAIN suppresses clutter picked up
by the antenna.

1.18.1 Turning AUTO RAIN on or off

1. Use the trackball to select the AUTO RAIN indication at the left side of the
screen.
2. Push the left button to choose AUTO RAIN setting desired. The higher the
number the greater the degree of rain clutter suppression. OFF turns off the
AUTO RAIN feature.

Note: AUTO RAIN can also be adjusted from the PICTURE box.

1-28
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.18.2 Adjusting A/C RAIN

The vertical beam width of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even
when the ship is rolling. However, by this design the unit will also detect rain
clutter (rain, snow, or hail) in the same manner as normal targets.

The A/C RAIN control adjusts the receiver sensitivity as the A/C SEA control
does but rather in a longer time period (longer range). The higher the setting the
greater the anti-clutter effect. When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets,
adjust the A/C RAIN control to split up these unwanted echoes into a speckled
pattern, making recognition of solid targets easier.

Unwanted echoes are A/C RAIN control adjusted.

displayed.

Appearance of rain clutter

Keyboard
Adjust the A/C RAIN with the [A/C RAIN] control.

Trackball
1. Roll the trackball to place the cursor in the A/C RAIN level indicator at the top
right side of the display.
Level bar
(Shows A/C RAIN level.)
Place arrow inside window
to adjust A/C RAIN.

RAIN 30

A/C RAIN level indicator

2. While observing the A/C RAIN level indicator, roll the wheel downward to
increase the A/C RAIN or upward to decrease it. 100 levels (0-100) are
available.

1-29
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.19 Interference Rejector

Mutual radar interference may occur in the vicinity of another shipborne radar
operating in the same frequency band. It is seen on the screen as a number of
bright spikes either in irregular patterns or in the form of usually curved
spoke-like dotted lines extending from the center to the edge of the picture.
Activating the interference rejector circuit can reduce this type of interference.

The interference rejector is a kind of signal correlation circuit. It compares the

received signals over successive transmissions and suppresses randomly
occurring signals. There are three levels of interference rejection depending on
the number of transmissions that are correlated.

Interference
1. Roll the trackball to choose the IR indication at the left side of the screen.
2. Push the left button successively to choose rejection level desired and then
push the wheel or the left button. “3” provides the highest degree of
suppression.

Note: The interference rejector can also be adjusted from the PICTURE box.

1-30
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.20 Measuring the Range

The range to a target may be measured three ways: with the fixed range rings,
with the cursor, or with the VRM.

Use the fixed range rings to obtain a rough estimate of the range to a target.
They are the concentric solid circles about own ship, or the sweep origin. The
number of rings is automatically determined by the selected range scale and
their interval is displayed at the upper-left position of the screen. Count the
number of rings between the center of the display and the target. Check the
range ring interval and judge the distance of the echo from the inner edge of the
nearest ring.

1.20.1 Turning range rings on/off

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen. The
guidance box at the bottom right corner (see the illustration at the bottom of
the next page for location) now reads “DISP MAIN MENU.”
2. Push the left button to display the MAIN menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 [MARK] and then push the wheel or the left
button.
[MARK]

1 BACK
2 OWN SHIP MARK
OFF/ON
3 STERN MARK
OFF/ON
4 INDEX LINE BEARING*1
REL/TRUE
5 INDEX LINE*2 *1 W-type shows INDEX LINE1. Same choices as INDEX LINE.
1/2/3/6 *2 W-type shows INDEX LINE2. Same choices as INDEX LINE.
6 INDEX LINE MODE*3 *3 Shown when INDEX LINE is set to other than "1" .
VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL Not shown on IMO or A type.
7 [BARGE MARK] *4 IMO and A types show
8 EBL OFFSET BASE 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING (REL/TRUE)
STAB GND/STAB HDG/
STAB NORTH
9 [EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET]*4
0 RING
OFF/ON

MARK menu
4. Roll the wheel to choose 0 RING and then push the wheel or the left button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel
or the left button.
6. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1-31
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.20.2 Measuring range by the variable range marker (VRM)

There are two VRMs, No. 1 and No. 2, which appear as dashed rings so that you
can discriminate them from the fixed range rings. The two VRMs can be
distinguished from each other by different lengths of dashes.
350 000 010
340 020
330 030
No. 1 320 040 Target
VRM 310 050 blip
300 060

290 070

280 080

270 090

260 100

250 110
No. 2
240 120
VRM
230 130
220 140
210 150
200
190 180 170
160
45:02 VRM1 >0.66NM<
99:59 VRM2 1.18NM
TTG to VRM

Measuring range with VRMs

By keyboard
1. Press the [VRM ON] key to display either of the VRMs. Successively
pressing the [VRM ON] key toggles the active VRM between No. 1 and No. 2.
The currently active marker is enclosed with >.....<.
2. Operate the VRM rotary control to align the active variable range marker with
the inner edge of the target of interest and read its distance at the lower-right
corner of the screen. Each VRM remains at the same geographical distance
when you operate the [RANGE] key or the RANGE box. This means that the
apparent radius of the VRM ring changes in proportion to the selected range
scale.
3. Press the [VRM OFF] key to erase each VRM.

By trackball
1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the VRM1 or VRM2 box, whichever
VRM you want to use.
VRM1
VRM2
VRM boxes
2. The guidance box reads “VRM ON/.” Push the left button to turn on the VRM.
The guidance box now reads “VRM SET L = DELETE /.”
3. Push the left button again and the cursor jumps to inside the effective display
area. The guidance box now reads “VRM FIX / EXIT.”
4. Roll the trackball (coarse adjustment) or wheel (fine adjustment) to align the
active variable range marker with the inner edge of the target of interest and
read its distance at the lower-right corner of the screen. Each VRM remains
at the same geographical distance when you operate the [RANGE] key. This
means that the apparent radius of the VRM ring changes in proportion to the
selected range scale.
5. Push the left button to anchor the VRM and fix its readout, or push the right
button to return the VRM to its previous location (range).
6. To erase a VRM, choose the appropriate VRM readout box and then push
the left button until the VRM disappears from the screen.

1-32
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.20.3 Choosing VRM unit of measurement (B and C types)

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen. The
guidance box at the bottom right corner now reads “DISP MAIN MENU.”
2. Push the left button to display the MAIN menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 [MARK] and then push the wheel or the left
button.
4. Choose 9 [EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET] and then push the wheel.
5. Choose VRM1 or VRM2 as appropriate and push the wheel.
6. Choose unit of measurement desired and then push the wheel.
7. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1.20.4 TTG to VRM display

You can show the TTG to VRMs as follows:
1. Left-click the MENU box.
2. Choose 9 CUSTOMIZE·TEST and push the wheel.
3. Choose 7 OPERATION and push the wheel.
4. Choose 0 NEXT and push the wheel.
5. Choose 3 VRM TTG and push the wheel.
6. Choose OFF, 1, 2 or 1+2 as applicable and push the wheel.
OFF: NO VRM TTG display
1: TTG to VRM1
2: TTG to VRM2
1+2: TTG to VRM1 and VRM2
7. Push the right button four times to close the menu.

1.21 Measuring the Bearing

Use the Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs) to take bearings of targets. There are
two EBLs, No. 1 and No. 2. Each EBL is a straight dashed line extending out
from the own ship position up to the circumference of the radar picture. The fine
dashed line is the No. 1 EBL and the coarse dashed one is the No. 2 EBL.

1.21.1 Measuring the bearing

By keyboard
1. Press the [EBL ON] key to display either of the EBLs. Successive presses of
the [EBL ON] key toggle the active EBL between No. 1 and No. 2. The
currently active marker is enclosed with >.....<.
2. Operate the EBL rotary control clockwise or counterclockwise until the active
EBL bisects the target of interest, and read its bearing at the lower-left corner
of the screen.
Note: Each EBL carries a range marker, or a short line crossing the EBL at
right angles and its distance from the EBL origin is indicated at the
VRM readout whether or not the corresponding VRM is displayed. The
range marker changes its position along the EBL with the rotation of
the VRM control.
3. Press the [EBL OFF] key to erase each EBL.

1-33
1. RADAR OPERATION

By trackball
1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the EBL1 or EBL2 box, whichever EBL
you want to use.
EBL1
EBL2
EBL boxes
2. The guidance box reads “EBL ON/.” Push the left button to turn on the EBL.
The guidance box now reads “EBL SET L=DELETE /.”
3. Push the left button again and the cursor jumps to inside the effective display
area. The guidance box now reads “EBL FIX L=DELETE/.”
4. Roll the trackball (coarse adjustment) or wheel (fine adjustment) to bisect the
target with the EBL.
Note: Each EBL carries a range marker, or a short line crossing the EBL at
right angles and its distance from the EBL origin is indicated at the
VRM readout whether or not the corresponding VRM is displayed. The
range marker changes its position along the EBL with the rotation of
the VRM.
5. Push the left button to anchor the EBL and fix its readout, or push the right
button to return the EBL to its previous location (bearing).
6. To erase an EBL, choose the appropriate EBL readout box and then push the
left button until the EBL disappears from the screen.
350 000 010

No. 2 320 330

340 020
030 Target
EBL 310
040
blip
050

300 060

290 070

280 080

270 090

260
Range markers
100
No. 1
250
on EBLs
110
EBL
240 120
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170

EBL1>128.0°T< VRM1>10.2NM<
EBL2 100.8°T VRM2 12.1NM

Measuring bearing with EBLs

1-34
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.21.2 Choosing true or relative bearing

The EBL readout is affixed by “R” (relative) if it is relative to own ship's
heading, ”T.” (true) if it is referenced to the north. In IMO, A, B and C types, you
may choose relative or true in the head-up, stern-up or head-up TB modes; in all
other modes it is always TRUE.

To choose bearing reference in the head-up mode, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button to
open the MAIN menu.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK and then push the wheel or the left button
to open the MARK menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 9 [EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET] (B, C and W types)
or 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING (IMO and A types) and push the wheel or the
left button. For the B, C and W types the menu below appears; go to step 4.
For the IMO and A types go to step 5.

[EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET]

1 BACK
2 EBL1
REL/TRUE
3 EBL2
REL/TRUE
4 VRM1
NM/SM/km/kyd
5 VRM2
NM/SM/km/kyd
6 CURSOR BEARING
REL/TRUE
7 CURSOR RANGE
NM/SM/km/kyd

EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose EBL1 or EBL2 as appropriate and then push the
wheel or the left button.
5. Choose REL or TRUE as appropriate and then push the wheel.
6. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

Note: When the gyrocompass heading changes, the EBL and its indication
change as follows:
Head-up, relative: EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged.
Head-up, true: EBL indication remains the same; EBL moves.
Course-up, true: EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged.
North-up, true: EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged.

1-35
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.22 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL

The origin of the EBL can be placed anywhere with the trackball to enable
measurement of range and bearing between any targets. This function is also
useful for assessment of the potential risk of collision. It is possible to read CPA
(Closest Point of Approach) by using a VRM as shown in (a) in the illustration on
the next page. If the EBL passes through the sweep origin (own ship) as shown
in (b) in the illustration on the next page, the target ship is on a collision course.

1.22.1 How to assess risk of collision by the offset EBL

By keyboard
1. Press the [EBL ON] key to display or activate an EBL (No. 1 or No. 2).
2. Place the cursor (+) on a target appearing as threatening (A in the illustrated
example on the next page) by operating the trackball.
3. Press the [EBL OFFSET] key, and the origin of the active EBL shifts to the
cursor position. Press the [EBL OFFSET key] again to anchor the EBL origin.
4. After waiting for a few minutes (at least 3 minutes), operate the EBL rotary
control until the EBL bisects the target at the new position (A'). The EBL
readout shows the target ship's course, which may be true or relative
depending on the EBL bearing reference setting.
Note: If relative motion is selected, it is also possible to read CPA by using a
VRM as shown in left-hand figure at the top of the next page. If the
EBL passes through the sweep origin (own ship) as illustrated in the
right-hand figure at the top of then next page, the target ship is on a
collision course.
5. To return the EBL origin to the own ship's position, press the [EBL OFFSET]
key twice.

By trackball
1. Display an EBL, following steps 1-3 in “By trackball” in paragraph 1.21.1.
2. With the cursor inside the effective display area, push the left button, roll the
wheel to show “EBL OFFSET / EXIT” in the guidance box and then push the
left button.
3. Roll the trackball to place the offset EBL on a target appearing as threatening
(A in the illustrated example on the next page) and then push the left button
to anchor the EBL origin.
4. After waiting for a few minutes (at least 3 minutes), operate the EBL used in
step 1 until it bisects the target at the new position (A'). The EBL readout
shows the target ship's course, which may be true or relative depending on
the EBL bearing reference setting.

To return the EBL origin to the screen center, show “EBL OFFSET / EXIT” in the
guidance window and then push the left button.

1-36
 1. RADAR OPERATION

350 000 010 350 000 010

340 020 340 020
330 030 330 030
320 040 320 040

310 050 310 050

300 A 060 300 A 060

290 070 290 070

280
A1
080 280 A1 080

270 090 270 090

260 100 260 100

250 250 110

110

240 240 120

120
230 230 130
130
No. 1
No. 1 220 140 220 140
210 150 (a) EBL 210 150
(b)
EBL 200
190 180 170
160 200
190 180 170
160

EBL1 >150.3°T< VRM1 >3.85NM< EBL1 >138.2°T< VRM1 >3.85NM<

Collision assessment by offset EBL

1.22.2 Choosing point of reference for origin point of offset EBL

The origin point of the offset EBL can be ground stabilized (geographically fixed),
north stabilized (true) or referenced to own ship’s heading (relative).

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK and then push the wheel or the left button
to display the MARK menu.
[MARK]

1 BACK
2 OWN SHIP MARK
OFF/ON
3 STERN MARK
OFF/ON
4 INDEX LINE BEARING*1
REL/TRUE
5 INDEX LINE*2 *1 W-type shows INDEX LINE1. Same choices as INDEX LINE.
1/2/3/6 *2 W-type shows INDEX LINE2. Same choices as INDEX LINE.
6 INDEX LINE MODE*3 *3 Shown when INDEX LINE is set to other than "1" .
VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL Not shown on IMO or A type.
7 [BARGE MARK] *4 IMO and A types show
8 EBL OFFSET BASE 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING (REL/TRUE)
STAB GND/STAB HDG/
STAB NORTH
9 [EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET]*4
0 RING
OFF/ON

MARK menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 EBL OFFSET BASE and then push the wheel or
the left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose STAB GND, STAB HDG or STAB NORTH as
appropriate and then push the wheel or the left button.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1-37
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.23 Measuring Range and Bearing Between Two

Targets
By keyboard
1. Press the [EBL OFFSET] key. Operate the trackball to place the origin of the
No. 1 EBL, for example, on a target of interest (target 1 in the illustrated
example).
2. Operate the EBL rotary control until the EBL passes through another target of
interest (target 2).
3. Operate the VRM rotary control until the range marker on the EBL is on the
inside edge of target 2. The active VRM readout at the lower-right corner of
the screen indicates the distance between the two targets.
4. You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets (targets 3 and
4) by using the No. 2 EBL and the No. 2 VRM.

Bearing is shown relative to own ship with suffix “R” or as a true bearing with
suffix “T” depending on EBL relative/true settings of EBL CURSOR BEARING in
the MARK menu. To return the EBL origin to the screen center, press the [EBL
OFFSET] key again.

By trackball
1. Display an EBL, following steps 1-3 in “By trackball” in paragraph 1.21.1.
2. With the cursor inside the effective display area, push the left button, roll the
wheel to show “EBL OFFSET / EXIT” in the guidance box and then push the
left button.
3. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on target 1 and then push the wheel.
4. Operate the No. 1 VRM until the range marker on the EBL aligns with target 2.
The active VRM readout at the lower-right corner of the screen indicates the
distance between the two targets.
5. You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets (targets 3 and
4) by using the No. 2 EBL and the No. 2 VRM.
No. 2
Range 350 000 010
330
340 020
030 EBL
Marker320 040
310 050

300
Target 2
060
Range
No.1 Target 4 Marker
290 070
EBL R2
280 Target 1 080

270 090

EBL Target 3
260 100

250
origin 110

240 120
230 130
220 140

EBL1 >140.0°R< 210

200 160
150
VRM1 >0.50NM<
335.2°R
190 180 170
EBL2 VRM2 0.98NM

Range/bearing Range/bearing
between targets between targets 3 and 4
1 and 2

Measuring range and bearing between two targets

To return the EBL origin to the screen center, show “EBL OFFSET / EXIT” in the
guidance window and then push the left button.

1-38
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.24 Setting a Target Alarm

The target alarm serves to alert the navigator to targets (ships, landmasses, etc.)
entering a set area, with audible and visual alarms.

The guard alarm zone has a fixed CAUTION

width of 0.5 nm in the radial direction • The alarm should not be relied upon as
(depth) and is adjustable from 3.0 to the sole means for detecting possible
6.0 nm (guard zone 1) and any collision situations.
distance (guard zone 2). On the • A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and GAIN controls
Non-IMO radar the boundaries can be should be properly adjusted to be sure
set at any distance. On any radar type the alarm system does not overlook
target echoes.
the sector of the zone can be set from
0 to 360 degrees in any direction.

1.24.1 How to set a target alarm zone

The procedure which follows shows how to set a target alarm zone using the
figure below as an example.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the ALARM1 or ALARM2 box, whichever alarm
you wish to set.
ALARM 1
ALARM 2

ALARM boxes
2. Push the left button. The cursor jumps into the effective display area and
“SET” appears inside the ALARM box chosen.
3. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on point “A” and then push the left
button.
4. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on point “B” and then push the left
button. “WORK” replaces “SET” in the ALARM box. The guard alarm zone’s
lines are dashed and blue.

350 000 010

Guard alarm zone
340 020
330 030
320 040
310 050

300 060

290 A B
070

280 080

270 090

260 100

250 110

240 120
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170

Target alarm zone

1-39
1. RADAR OPERATION

Note 1: If you wish to create a target alarm zone having a 360-degree coverage
around own ship, set point “B” in almost the same direction as point “A.”
Note 2: Two target alarm zones may be set. Note however that the 2nd target
alarm zone is available only when the 1st target alarm zone is active.
Note 3: When the target alarm zone is not within the range in use the indication
UP RNG appears to the right of the ALARM box. In this case choose a
range which will display the target alarm zone.

1.24.2 Acknowledging the target alarm

A target in the target alarm zone produces both visual (flashing) and audible
(beep) alarms. To silence the audible alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the
full keyboard or choose the appropriate ALARM box and then push the left
button. The ALARM box shows “ALARMx ACK.” This will deactivate the audible
alarm but will not stop the flashing of the offending target. To reactivate the
audible alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key again or choose the ALARM box and
then push the left button. (When an external buzzer is connected, the audible
alarm does not stop until the alarm zone itself is deactivated.) The ALARM box
shows “ALARMx WORK.”

1.24.3 Deactivating a target alarm

1. Roll the trackball to choose the ALARM1 or ALARM2 box, whichever alarm
you wish to deactivate.
2. Push the left button until the alarm status in the ALARM box disappears. In
this radar deactivation of the target alarm zone 1 deactivates target alarm
zone 2.

1-40
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.24.4 Target alarm attributes

You may choose the echo strength level which triggers the alarm, the condition
which generates the target alarm and the volume of the audible alarm as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 3 [ALARM] and then push the wheel or the left
button.

[ALARM]

1 BACK
2 TARGET ALARM MODE
IN/OUT
3 TARGET ALARM LEVEL
1/2/3/4
4 WATCH ALARM
OFF/6M/10M/
12M/15M/20M
5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL
LOW/MID/HIGH
6 [ALARM OUT1]
7 [ALARM OUT2]
8 [ALARM OUT3]
9 [ALARM OUT4]
0 AUDIO ALARM
OFF/ON

ALARM menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 TARGET ALARM MODE and then push the wheel
or the left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose IN (guard zone) or OUT (anchor watch) as
appropriate and then push the wheel or the left button.

Inward target alarm Outward target alarm

Alarm types
5. Roll the wheel to choose 3 GUARD ALARM LEVEL and then push the wheel.
6. Roll the wheel to choose echo strength level which will trigger the alarm and
then push the wheel or the left button. “4” is highest strength.
7. Roll the wheel to choose 5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL and then push the wheel.
8. Roll the wheel to choose audible alarm volume, from among LOW, MID and
HIGH, and then push the wheel.
Note: 5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL also sets the level of the audible alarm for the watch
alarm. 9 AUDIO ALARM enables or disables the audio alarm.
9. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1-41
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.25 Off-Centering the Display

Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced to expand the view field
without switching to a larger range scale. The sweep origin can be off-centered
to the cursor position, but not more than 75% of the range in use; if the cursor is
set beyond 75% of the range scale, the sweep origin will be off-centered to the
point of 75% of the limit.

This feature is neither available on the 96 nm, 120 nm (Non-IMO type only)
range scale nor in the true motion mode.

To off-center the radar picture, do the following:

By keyboard
1. Roll the trackball to place the cursor at a position where you wish to move the
sweep origin.
2. Press the [OFF CENTER] key. Then, the sweep origin is off-centered to the
cursor position.
3. To cancel off-centering, press the [OFF CENTER] key again.

By trackball
1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display
“OFF CENTER / EXIT” in the guidance box and then push the wheel or the
left button.
2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor where you want to locate the screen
center.
3. Push the left button to off center the sweep origin.
4. To cancel the off-center function, push the left button when the guidance box
reads “OFF CENTER / EXIT.”

Cursor

Place cursor where desired Off-centered display

and execute appropriate
OFF CENTER procedure

How to off-center the display

1-42
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.26 Echo Stretch

The echo stretch feature enlarges targets in the range and bearing directions to
make them easier to see, and it is available on any range. There are three types
of echo stretch, 1, 2 and 3, and the higher the number the greater the amount of
stretching.

Note: The echo stretch magnifies not only small target pips but also returns
(clutter) from sea surface, rain and radar interference. For this reason,
make sure these types of interference have been sufficiently suppressed
before activating the echo stretch.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the ES indication at the left side of the display.
2. Push the left button successively to choose echo stretch.

Note: Echo stretch can also be adjusted from the PICTURE box.

1-43
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.27 Echo Averaging

The echo averaging feature effectively suppresses sea clutter. Echoes received
from stable targets such as ships appear on the screen at almost the same
position every rotation of the antenna. On the other hand, unstable echoes such
as sea clutter appear at random positions.

To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echoes are averaged over
successive picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable over successive frames,
it is presented in its normal intensity. Sea clutter is averaged over successive
scans and its brilliance reduced, making it easier to discriminate real targets
from sea clutter.

Echo averaging uses scan-to-scan signal correlation technique based on the

true motion over the ground of each target. Thus, small stationary targets such
as buoys will be shown while suppressing random echoes such as sea clutter.
True echo averaging is not however effective for picking up small targets running
at high speeds over the ground.

Note 1: Do not use the echo averaging function under heavy pitching and
rolling; loss of targets can result.
Note 2: Echo averaging can be used without a heading sensor. For further
details, contact your dealer.
Note 3: Echo averaging requires heading, position and speed data.

To properly use the echo averaging function, it is recommended to first suppress

sea clutter with the A/C SEA control. Then, do as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the EAV indication at the left side of the display.
2. Push the left button successively to choose OFF, 1, 2 or 3 as appropriate.
OFF: Echo averaging OFF
1, 2: Detects targets hidden in sea clutter. “2” is more effective than “1” in
detecting targets hidden in strong sea clutter. However, “1” is more
effective than “2” in displaying high speed targets. Choose the
setting best suited to current conditions. For effective monitoring of
high-speed craft, you should use “2” together with Wiper.
3: Stably displays unstable targets; distinguish high-speed craft from
sea clutter.

Note: Echo averaging can also be adjusted from the PICTURE box.

1-44
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.28 Target Trails

The trails of the radar echoes of targets may be displayed in the form of
synthetic afterglow. Target trails are chosen either relative or true and may be
sea or ground stabilized. True motion trails require a compass signal and own
ship speed input.

1.28.1 True or relative trails

You may display echo trails in true or relative motion (only true trail on TM).
Relative trails show relative movements between targets and own ship. True
motion trails require a gyrocompass signal and own ship speed input to cancel
out own ship's movement and present true target movements in accordance with
their over-the-ground speeds and courses.

(a) True target trails (b) Relative target trails

(No smearing of Targets moving relative
stationary targets) to own ship

Target trails
Note: When true trail is selected on the RM mode, the TRAIL MODE box is
shown in red. No true-relative selection on TM; it is only True trails on TM
mode.

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow

on the TRAIL MODE box at the [TRAIL MENU]
bottom right corner of the screen and
then push the right button to open the 1 TRAIL MODE
REL/TRUE
TRAIL menu.
2 TRAIL GRAD
2. Roll the wheel to choose 1 TRAIL SINGLE/MULTI
MODE and then push the wheel. 3 NARROW TRAIL
3. Roll the wheel to choose TRUE or OFF/ON
4 TRAIL LEVEL
REL appropriate and then push the 1/2/3/4
wheel or the left button. 5 TRAIL RESTART
4. Push the right button to close the OFF/ON
6 TRAIL COPY
menu.
OFF/ON
7 OS TRAIL
Note: “TRUE TRAIL” is shown in red OFF/ON
when a relative motion presentation 8 TRAIL LENGTH
NORMAL/12H/24H/48H
mode is used. 9 TRAIL HIDE*
START 00:00
END 00:00

* Shown when 8 TRAIL LENGTH

is selected to other than "NORMAL".

1-45
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.28.2 Trail time

Trail time, the trail plotting interval, may be chosen as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom
right corner of the screen.
* TRAIL **
* = TRUE or REL
** = Trail time setting

TRAIL MODE box

2. Push the left button or roll the wheel to choose the trail time as below.
Control Available setting
Left button OFF, 15 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 15 min, 30 min,
CONT(inuous)
Wheel OFF, 15 sec, 30 sec, 1-30 min (30 sec intervals), CONT(inuous)
3. The maximum time for continuous plotting is 99:59. When the timer counts to
99:59, the timer is reset to zero, all target trails are erased and then trails are
restarted.

1.28.3 Trail gradation

The afterglow can be selected in a single tone or gradual shading.

Monotone Gradual shading

(Single) (Multi)

Trail gradation
1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom
right corner of the screen.
2. Push the right button to display the TRAIL menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 TRAIL GRAD and then push the wheel or the left
button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose SINGLE (single) or MULTI (multiple) as appropriate
and then push the wheel or the left button.
5. Push the right button to close the menu.

1-46
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.28.4 Saving, copying target trails

By turning on the functions TRAIL RESTART and TRAIL COPY, you may
continue painting target trails whenever the range scale is changed. The amount
of range change determines how the radar paints trails. See the table below for
details. Note however that if the previous range is restored within 10 seconds
and the amount of range change is within 1/3, trails continue as before.

If trails become difficult to view trails, you may delete them. For details, see
paragraph 1.28.9.

Amount of range change How trails are processed

Large (ex. 3 nm→12 nm) Trails continue on targets which were within the
previous range scale; trails are not initiated for
targets which were not within the previous range.
Within 1/3 of previous range Trails continue on targets which were in the
(ex. 3 nm→1.5 nm) previous range scale.
Within 1/4 of previous range Trails are restarted.
(ex. 3 nm→0.75 nm)

No trail generated
for target not within
previous range

(a) Previous range (b) New range

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom
right corner of the screen.
2. Push the right button to display the TRAIL menu.
4. Roll the wheel to choose 5 TRAIL RESTART and then push the wheel or the
left button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose ON or OFF as appropriate and then push the wheel
or the left button.
ON: Trails start extending on the newly selected range.
OFF: Trails extend only on the range where they were initiated.
6. Roll the wheel to choose 6 TRAIL COPY and then push the wheel or the left
button.
7. Roll the wheel to choose ON or OFF as appropriate and then push the wheel
or the left button.
8. Push the right button to close the menu.

1-47
1. RADAR OPERATION

The relationship between trail restart and trail copy depends on their status, as
shown in the table below.

Trail restart Trail copy Trail status

ON ON Range changed while trail is ON: Trails continue on
targets within previous range.
ON OFF Range changed while trail is ON: Trails within the
previous range are erased and then trails are restarted.
OFF OFF/ON • Range changed while trail is ON: New trails not
initiated. (Trails from previous range are stored in
memory.)
• Range returned to previous range: Trails
continues on targets stored in memory.
• Trails turned ON: Trails stored in memory are
erased. (See section 1.28.9.)
(Trails stored in the memory are erased and trails are
then initiated on new range.)

1.28.5 Trail level

The level (intensity) of the afterglow which extends from radar targets may be
chosen as below.

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom
right corner of the screen.
2. Push the right button to display the TRAIL menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 TRAIL LEVEL and then push the wheel or the left
button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose level desired and then push the wheel or the left
button. The higher the number the greater the intensity of the afterglow.
5. Push the right button to close the menu.

1.28.6 Narrow trails (B, C and W types)

Target trails may be painted with thinner lines if desired. This can be useful when
there are a lot of targets on the screen.

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom
right corner of the screen.
2. Push the right button to display the TRAIL menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 3 NARROW TRAIL and then push the wheel or the
left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose OFF, 1 or 2 as appropriate and then push the wheel
or the left button. “2” is thinner than “1”.
5. Push the right button to close the menu.

1-48
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.28.7 Longer trails (B and C types)

In addition to the trail times mentioned in paragraph 1.28.2, you may also extend
trails 12 ,24 or 48 hours.

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom
right corner of the screen.
2. Push the right button to display the TRAIL menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 TRAIL LENGTH and then push the wheel or the
left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose NORMAL, 12H, 24H or 48H as appropriate and
then push the wheel or the left button. ]
Note: W type can choose 12H or 24H.
NORMAL: Trails are extended according to the setting made on the TRAIL
MODE box.
12H: Extend trails for 12 hours.
24H: Extend trails for 24 hours.
48H: Extend trails for 48 hours.

5. If you chose 12 hour, 24 hour or 48 hour, 9 TRAIL HIDE appears together

with start and end times. This item allows you to designate a time period in
which no trails will be extended. Enter time frame at START and END.
6. Push the right button to close the menu.

1.28.8 Removing trails from the display temporarily

You may wish to temporarily remove all trails from the display. Trails are
removed but are continued internally.

By keyboard
Press the [CANCEL TRAILS] key to choose OFF

By trackball
1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom
right corner of the screen.
2. Push the left button to display OFF.

1.28.9 Erasing trails

All trails may be erased (including those in the memory) and restarted afresh.

• Keyboard: Press and hold down the [CANCEL TRAILS] key until trails
disappear.
• Trackball: Place the cursor in the trail box and push and hold down the left
button until trails disappear.

1-49
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.29 Parallel Index Lines

Parallel index lines are useful for keeping a constant distance between own ship
and a coastline or a partner ship when navigating. Two index lines are available
and they may be displayed together. The lines of index line No. 2 are dashed to
distinguish them from index line No. 1. You may control the orientation and line
interval from the IL box.

Index
lines

Parallel index lines

1.29.1 Displaying, erasing parallel index lines

By keyboard
1. With the menu closed, press the [INDEX LINE] key. The guidance box shows
“DISP INDEX LINE/.”
2. While watching the IL (Index Line) box at the left side of the screen, press
and hold down the [INDEX LINE] key to activate or deactivate applicable
index line. Press down the key again to display (or erase) the index line
chosen.
Index line number IL 1 ON Status (ON or OFF)

Index line orientation, 032.0°T

Index line interval 5.60NM
(Neither shown when
Index line is OFF.)
IL (Index Line) box

By trackball
1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the IL box at the lower left-hand side of
the screen. (See the illustration above.)
2. Roll the wheel to choose index line number and then push the left button or
the wheel to turn the index line on or off as appropriate.

1-50
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.29.2 Adjusting index line orientation, index line interval

1. Display the index line for which you want to adjust its orientation, referring to
paragraph 1.29.1.
2. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in IL 1 ON
the index line orientation setting Index line orientation 032.0°T
window, directly below the IL box. Index line interval 5.60NM
3. Roll the wheel to adjust the index line
orientation, between 000.0-359.9(°T). Enter a negative value to move the
index line to the opposite side of the index line passing through the own ship
position.
4. Roll the trackball to place the cursor in the index line interval setting window.
5. Roll the wheel to adjust the index line interval.

1.29.3 Index line bearing reference

Index line bearing reference may be relative to own ship’s heading (Relative) or
referenced to North (True) as below.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK and then push the wheel or the left button
to display the MARK menu.
[MARK]

1 BACK
2 OWN SHIP MARK
OFF/ON
3 STERN MARK
OFF/ON
4 INDEX LINE BEARING*1
REL/TRUE
5 INDEX LINE*2 *1 W-type shows INDEX LINE1. Same choices as INDEX LINE.
1/2/3/6 *2 W-type shows INDEX LINE2. Same choices as INDEX LINE.
6 INDEX LINE MODE*3 *3 Shown when INDEX LINE is set to other than "1" .
VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL Not shown on IMO or A type.
7 [BARGE MARK] *4 IMO and A types show
8 EBL OFFSET BASE 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING (REL/TRUE)
STAB GND/STAB HDG/
STAB NORTH
9 [EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET]*4
0 RING
OFF/ON

MARK menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 INDEX LINE BEARING and then push the wheel
or the left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose TRUE or REL as appropriate and then push the
wheel or the left button.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1-51
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.29.4 Choosing maximum number of index lines to display

The maximum number of index lines to display may be chosen from 1, 2, 3 or 6
lines as below. The actual number of lines visible may be less depending on line
interval. For the W specification radar, you may specify the number of lines for
two sets of index lines – the menu displays 4 INDEX LINE1 and 5 INDEX LINE2.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK and then push the wheel or the left button
to display the MARK menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 5 INDEX LINE and then push the wheel or the left
button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose 1, 2, 3 or 6 as appropriate and then push the wheel
or the left button.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1.29.5 Index line mode

Index lines orientation may be chosen from horizontal or vertical. This function is
available when 5 INDEX LINE in the MARK menu is set for other than “1”.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK and then push the wheel or the left button
to display the MARK menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 INDEX LINE MODE and then push the wheel or
the left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose VERTICAL or HORIZONTAL as appropriate and
then push the wheel or the left button.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1-52
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.30 Origin Mark

You can mark any prominent target or a point of particular interest using the
origin mark feature. Twenty origin marks may be entered: 10 standard origin
marks (with number) and one each of the 10 symbol origin marks. The marks
may be geographically fixed (ground stabilized) or sea stabilized. To display the
origin marks, heading signal and own ship position data are required.

1.30.1 Entering origin marks

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MARK box at the left side of the screen. The
guidance box now reads “MARK SELECT / MARK MENU.”
MARK
Mark type last selected, 1
mark number -> +
MARK box
2. Push the right button to open the MARK menu.

[MARK MENU]

1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA
2 MARK KIND
ORIGIN MARK(No. )/
ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/
MAP MARK/
WP 1~50/
WP 51~ 100/
WP 101~150/
WP 151~ 200/
OWN SHIP SHAPE
8 MARK POSN
CURSOR/OS/L/L
00°000.00 N
000°000.00 E
9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
0 MAP MARK COLOR* * Not available on IMO
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/ or A type
CYA/MAG/WHT

MARK menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK KIND and then push the wheel or the left
button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose ORIGIN MARK (No.) or ORIGIN MARK (SYM) as
appropriate and then push the wheel or the left button. Choose ORIGIN
MARK (No.) to inscribe standard origin mark ( ) plus mark number; ORIGIN
MARK (SYM) to inscribe desired origin mark symbol (no number).
5. Push the left button.
6. Push the right button to close the menu. The guidance box now reads
“MARK SELECT / MARK MENU.”

1-53
1. RADAR OPERATION

7. With the cursor choosing the MARK box, roll the wheel to choose mark
number desired (“ORIGIN MARK(No.)” chosen at step 4) or origin mark
symbol (“ORIGIN MARK(SYM)” chosen at step 4) and then push the left
button. The following origin marks are available.

Origin mark (symbols)

8. Push the left button again. The cursor jumps into the effective display area
and the guidance box now reads “MARK / EXIT.”
9. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the location desired.
10. Push the left button to inscribe the origin mark at the cursor location. The
bearing and range from the origin mark to the cursor location are shown just
below the MARK box.
MARK

1
-> +
Bearing and range from 162.5°T 11.7NM
origin mark to cursor

Mark box, showing bearing and range from origin mark

• To inscribe a different standard origin mark number or symbol origin mark,
repeat steps 7-10. (ORIGIN MARK(No.) or (ORIGIN MARK(SYM) should be
preselected as appropriate.)
• To quit entering origin marks, push the right button when the guidance box
reads “MARK / EXIT.”
• Origin mark data reads “- - -.-” when the cursor is placed outside the effective
display area.

1-54
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.30.2 Origin mark stabilization

Origin marks may be geographically fixed (ground stabilized) or moving (sea
stabilized).

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MARK box.

2. Push the right button to open the MARK menu.

[MARK MENU]

1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA
2 MARK KIND
ORIGIN MARK(No. )/
ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/
MAP MARK/
WP 1~50/
WP 51~ 100/
WP 101~150/
WP 151~ 200/
OWN SHIP SHAPE
8 MARK POSN
CURSOR/OS/L/L
00°000.00 N
000°000.00 E
9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
0 MAP MARK COLOR* * Not available on IMO
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/ or A type
CYA/MAG/WHT

MARK menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ORIGIN MARK STAB and then push the wheel.
4. Roll the wheel to choose GND or SEA as appropriate and then push the
wheel or the left button.
5. Push the right button to close the menu.

1.30.3 Deleting individual origin marks

The procedure below shows how to delete individual origin marks. Note that
origin marks cannot be deleted collectively.

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display
“MARK DELETE / EXIT” in the guidance box.
2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the origin mark you wish to erase.
3. Push the left button or the wheel to erase the mark.
4. To erase another mark, repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. To finish, push the right button when the guidance box reads “MARK
DELETE / EXIT.”

1-55
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.31 Zoom
The zoom function enlarges an area of interest as large as twice the normal
viewing size, in the text window. To use the zoom display, it must be turned on in
the DATA BOX menu. For further details, see paragraph 1.41.

Zoom is not available when the ARP target data setting is “LARGE” and the
navigation data is turned on.

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display
“ZOOM / EXIT” in the guidance box.
2. Roll the trackball to choose the location to zoom.
3. Push the left button or the wheel. A circle inscribes the location zoomed and
the zoom display at the right side of the screen shows the zoomed picture.

Zoom
Area Zoom display
(Appears in box above
when nav data is turned
off.)
Zoom area selected
with the cursor

Data Box

Zoom display
To quit the zoom display, push the left button when the guidance box reads
“ZOOM / EXIT.”

1-56
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.32 Markers
1.32.1 Heading marker and heading line
The heading marker and the heading line indicate the ship's heading in all
presentation modes. The heading line is a line from the own ship position to the
outer edge of the radar display area and appears at zero degrees on the bearing
scale in head-up mode; it changes the orientation depending on the ship
orientation in north-up and true motion modes. The heading marker is a small
circle on the bearing scale to indicate the heading when the display is
off-centered or is in north-up or TM mode.

Temporarily erasing the heading line

To temporarily extinguish the heading line to look at targets existing dead ahead
of own ship, press the [HL OFF] key on the keyboard, or roll the trackball to
choose the HL OFF box at the bottom left corner of the display and then push
the left button. In addition to the heading line, the stern marker and all graphics
within the effective display are also erased. To redisplay the heading line, etc.,
release the key or the left button.

1.32.2 Stern marker

The stern marker, which is a dot-and-dash line, appears opposite to the heading
line. To display or erase this marker do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the display and
then push the left button to display the MAIN menu.
2. Roll the wheel to choose MARK and then push the wheel or the left button to
show the MARK menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 3 STERN MARK and then push the wheel or the left
button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel
or the left button.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1.32.3 North marker

The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up mode, the
north marker moves around the bearing scale in accordance with the compass
signal.

1.32.4 Own ship symbol

The own ship symbol ( ) can be displayed or erased on the MARK menu. This
symbol is scaled to indicate the length and beam of the vessel. If the largest
dimension of the symbol gets smaller than 6 mm, the symbol will disappear and
own ship will be represented with a small dot or circle depending on the range in
use. Ship’s dimensions should be entered at installation.

1-57
1. RADAR OPERATION

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the display and
then push the left button to display the MAIN menu.
2. Roll the wheel to choose MARK and then push the wheel or the left button to
show the MARK menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 OWN SHIP MARK and then push the wheel or the
left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel
or the left button.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1.32.5 Barge marker

You may mark the locations of barges on the display. Set up barge information
as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the display and
then push the left button to display the MAIN menu.
2. Roll the wheel to choose MARK and then push the wheel or the left button to
show the MARK menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 7 [BARGE MARK] and then push the wheel or the
left button.

[BARGE INFORMATION]

1 BACK
2 BARGE MARK
OFF/ON
3 BARGE SIZE
LENGTH 0ft
WIDTH 0ft
4 ARRANGEMENT
0
0
0
0
0

BARGE INFORMATION menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 BARGE MARK and
push the wheel. Choose ON and push the wheel.
5. Choose 3 BARGE SIZE and push the wheel. Enter
length (three digits) and width (two digits) of barge.
6. Choose 4 ARRANGEMENT and push the wheel.
This item lets you set a single barge or a barge
chain. Roll the wheel to choose one of the five Barge icon
arrangements and push the wheel. Roll the wheel
to choose number of barges (max. 9) to display.
As you roll the wheel the squares light or Barge icon
extinguish and the number of barges chosen
appears at the right side.
7. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1-58
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.33 Automatic Picture Setup According to

Navigation Purpose
Every time your navigating environment or task changes, you must adjust the
radar, which can be a nuisance in a busy situation. Instead of changing radar
settings case by case, it is possible to assign the function keys to provide
optimum settings for often encountered situations.

The radar's internal computer offers several picture setup options to be assigned
to each function key for your specific navigating requirements. For instance, one
of the functions is assigned the ship detecting function and labeled SHIP on the
on the PICTURE box. By choosing SHIP, the radar will be instantly set for
optimum detection of ships.

Four user-programmable setups are also provided (labeled

PICTURE1-PICTURE4), so that you may have the radar automatically adjusted
to those conditions which are not covered by the provided setup options.

Below are the preset picture setup options provided with this radar.

Picture setup options description

Label Description Label Description

NEAR Optimum setting for short range FAR Optimum setting for long range
detection using a range scale of 3 detection using a range scale of 6
nm or less on calm seas nm or larger
NEAR Optimum setting for detecting FAR Optimum setting for detecting
BUOY navigation buoys, small vessels BUOY navigation buoys, small vessels
and other small surface objects at and other small surface objects at
close range long range
HARBOR*1 Optimum setting for short range COAST*1 For coastal navigation using a
navigation in a harbor area, using range scale of 12 nm or less
a range scale of 1.5 nm or less
ROUGH Optimum setting for rough weather SHIP Optimum setting for detecting
SEA or heavy rain vessels
NEAR Optimum setting for detecting birds FAR Optimum setting for detecting
BIRD*2 at close range BIRD*2 birds at distant range
1
* Models other than FAR-2157, FAR-2167DS
*2 FAR-2157, FAR-2167DS only
Each picture setup option defines a combination of several radar settings for
achieving optimum setup for a particular navigating situation. Those involved are
interference rejector, echo stretch, echo average, noise rejector, automatic
anti-sea and anti-rain clutters, video contrast, pulselength and sea and radar
conditions.

Adjusting these features from the PICTURE menu changes the original function
key settings. To restore the original settings for a particular picture setup option,
it is necessary to choose the default setting. For this reason, we recommended
that you use the user-programmable function sets when frequent adjustment of
the radar picture is necessary.

1-59
1. RADAR OPERATION

Picture setup options and default settings for X-band (12 kW/25 kW) and S-band (30 kW) radars
1 INT 2 ECHO 3 ECHO 4 NOISE 5 AUTO 6 AUTO 7 VIDEO
REJECT STRETCH AVERAGE REJ STC RAIN CONTRAST
PICTURE 1 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1-B
PICTURE 2 2 2 1 OFF OFF OFF 2-B
PICTURE 3 2 OFF 2 OFF OFF OFF 1-B
PICTURE 4 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 2-A
NEAR 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2-B
FAR 2 2 3 ON OFF OFF 3-B
NEAR BUOY 2 1 1 OFF OFF OFF 2-B
FAR BUOY 2 2 3 ON OFF OFF 3-B
ROUGH SEA 2 OFF 2 OFF OFF OFF 2-A
SHIP 2 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF 2-B
HARBOR 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2-B
COAST 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2-B
8 PULSE 9 CONDITION
P/L on P/L on P/L on P/L on 3 P/L on 6 nm P/L on Sea Cond. STC Range
0.5 nm 0.75 nm 1.5 nm nm 12-24 nm
PICTURE 1 S1 S2 S2 M1 M2 L 2 ±0
PICTURE 2 S2 S2 M1 M2 M3 L 2 ±0
PICTURE 3 S1 S2 S2 M1 M2 L 3 ±0
PICTURE 4 S1 S2 S2 M1 M2 L 2 ±0
NEAR S1 S1 S2 M1 M2 L 2 ±0
FAR S2 M1 M1 M3 L L 3 ±0
NEAR BUOY S2 M1 M1 M2 L L 2 ±0
FAR BUOY S2 M1 M1 M3 L L 2 ±0
ROUGH SEA S1 S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 4 ±0
SHIP S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L 2 ±0
HARBOR S1 S1 S2 M1 M3 L 2 ±0
COAST S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L 2 ±0

Picture setup options and default settings for X-band (50 kW) and S-band (60 kW) radars
1 INT 2 ECHO 3 ECHO 4 NOISE 5 AUTO 6 AUTO 7 VIDEO
REJECT STRETCH AVERAGE REJ STC RAIN CONTRAST
PICTURE 1 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1-B
PICTURE 2 2 2 1 OFF OFF OFF 2-B
PICTURE 3 2 OFF 2 OFF ON OFF 1-B
PICTURE 4 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 2-A
NEAR 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2-B
FAR 2 2 3 OFF ON OFF 3-B
NEAR BUOY 2 1 1 OFF OFF OFF 2-B
FAR BUOY 2 2 3 OFF ON OFF 3-B
ROUGH SEA 2 OFF 2 OFF ON OFF 2-A
SHIP 2 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF 3-B
NEAR BIRD 2 OFF 2 OFF OFF OFF 2-A
FAR BIRD 2 2 3 OFF OFF OFF 3-C
8 PULSE 9 CONDITION
P/L on P/L on P/L on P/L on 3 P/L on 6 nm P/L on Sea Cond. STC Range
0.5 nm 0.75 nm 1.5 nm nm 12-24 nm
PICTURE 1 S S S M1 M2 L 2 ±0
PICTURE 2 S S M1 M2 L L 2 ±0
PICTURE 3 S S S M1 M2 L 3 ±0
PICTURE 4 S S S M1 M2 L 2 ±0
NEAR S S S M1 M2 L 2 ±0
FAR S S M1 M2 L L 3 ±0
NEAR BUOY S S M1 M2 M2 L 2 ±0
FAR BUOY S S M1 M2 L L 2 ±0
ROUGH SEA S S S M1 M2 L 4 ±0
SHIP S S M1 M2 L L 2 ±0
NEAR BIRD S S M1 M2 L L 2 ±0
FAR BIRD S S M1 M2 L L 3 ±0

1-60
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.33.1 Choosing a picture setup option

You may choose a picture setup options as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen.
NEAR BUOY*
* Other possible indications:
NEAR, FAR, FAR BUOY,
ROUGH SEA, SHIP,
HARBOR, COAST,
NEAR BIRD, FAR BIRD,
PICTURE 1 - PICTURE 4

2. Push the left button to choose picture setup option desired.

1.33.2 Restoring default picture setup options

Any of the radar functions programmed with the picture setup options may be
adjusted as desired. If you get lost in operation and want to restore the default
settings for a particular picture setup operation, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen.
NEAR BUOY*
* Other possible indications:
NEAR, FAR, FAR BUOY,
ROUGH SEA, SHIP,
HARBOR, COAST,
NEAR BIRD, FAR BIRD,
PICTURE 1 - PICTURE 4

PICTURE box
2. Push the left button to choose the picture setup option for which you want to
restore its default settings.
3. Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu.

[PICTURE MENU]

1 INT REJECT
OFF/1/2/3
2 ECHO STRETCH
OFF/1/2/3
3 ECHO AVERAGE
OFF/1/2/3
4 NOISE REJ
OFF/ON
5 AUTO STC
OFF/ON
6 AUTO RAIN
OFF/1/2/3/4
7 VIDEO CONTRAST
1/2/3/4/
A/B/C
8 [PULSE]
9 [CONDITION]
0 DEFAULT (ENTERX3)

PICTURE menu

1-61
1. RADAR OPERATION

4. Roll the wheel to choose 0 DEFAULT.

5. Push the wheel or the left button three times to restore default settings for the
picture setup selected. (If you are using the keyboard, press the [ENTER
MARK] key three times.)
6. Push the right button to close the menu.

1.33.3 User-programmable picture setups

Four user-programmable picture setups are provided and they are labeled
PICTURE 1 – PICTURE 4 in the PICTURE box. You may program them as
below.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen.
2. Push the left button to choose PICTURE 1, PICTURE 2, PICTURE 3 or
PICTURE 4, whichever you wish to set.
3. Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu.

[PICTURE MENU]

1 INT REJECT
OFF/1/2/3
2 ECHO STRETCH
OFF/1/2/3
3 ECHO AVERAGE
OFF/1/2/3
4 NOISE REJ
OFF/ON
5 AUTO STC
OFF/ON
6 AUTO RAIN
OFF/1/2/3/4
7 VIDEO CONTRAST
1/2/3/4/
A/B/C
8 [PULSE]
9 [CONDITION]
0 DEFAULT(ENTERX3)

PULSE menu
4. Set items 1-6 and 8 referring to the following paragraphs:
1 INT REJECT: 1.19 5 AUTO STC: 1.17
2 ECHO STRETCH: 1.26 6 AUTO RAIN: 1.18
3 ECHO AVERAGE: 1.27 8 PULSE: 1.15
4 NOISE REJ: 1.36
5. Roll the wheel to choose 7 VIDEO CONTRAST and then push the wheel or
the left button.
6. Roll the wheel to choose 1, 2, 3 or 4 (Dynamic Range) or A, B, C (Curve) as
appropriate and then push the wheel or the left button. Refer to the
description below and the illustration on the next page.
1-4: Control dynamic range. 1 provides the widest dynamic range; 4 is the
narrowest dynamic range.
A: Mid-level in the curve is low, so this setting is suitable for suppressing rain
clutter.

1-62
 1. RADAR OPERATION

B: Curve between A and C.

C: Mid-level in the curve is high, so this setting is suitable for detecting
distant targets.
* *
4 3 2 1 C B A

PICTURE level

5 db
7 db * Default
9 db
11 db

VIDEO SIGNAL level

Video contrast settings

7. Roll the wheel to choose 9 [CONDITION] and then push the wheel to show
the CONDITION menu.
[CONDITION MENU]

1 BACK
2 SEA CONDITION
1/2/3/4/5
3 ANT HEIGHT
5/7.5/10/15/20/
25/30/35/40/45/
more50m
4 STC RANGE
+00

CONDITION menu
8. Roll the wheel to choose 2 SEA CONDITION and then push the wheel or the
left button.
9. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate sea condition and then push the wheel
or the left button. The larger the number the rougher the sea state.
10. Roll the wheel to choose 3 ANT HEIGHT and then push the wheel or the left
button.
11. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate radar antenna height (above the
waterline) and then push the wheel or the left button.
12. If necessary, roll the wheel to choose 4 STC RANGE, to adjust effective STC
range, and then push the wheel or the left button. The setting range is –10 to
+10. The larger the number the longer the effective STC range becomes. Roll
the wheel to set and then push the wheel or the left button. (Note that the
keyboard cannot be used to enter the setting.)
13. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1-63
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.34 Programming Function Keys

Less-often used functions are provided in the menu. To avoid opening the
menus to set up the radar for a particular situation, function keys F1-F4 may be
assigned any of the functions shown in the CUSTOMIZE•TEST sub menu.

1.34.1 Activating a function key

To activate the function assigned to a function key, press the key to instantly set
the radar for the preset purpose. Further press the key to choose option.

Function key Default setting

F1 Interference Rejector
F2 Echo Stretch
F3 Auto Rain
F4 Heading Line Off

1.34.2 Programming the functions keys

Do the following to program the function keys.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the display and
then push the left button to display the MAIN menu.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 9 [CUSTOMIZE•TEST] and then push the wheel.

[CUSTOMIZE•TEST]

1 BACK
2 [DATA BOX]
3 [F1]
4 [F2]
5 [F3]
6 [F4]
7 [OPERATION]
8 [TEST]

CUSTOMIZE•TEST menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 3 [F1], 4 [F2], 5 [F3] or 6 [F4], whichever function
key you want to set, and then push the wheel or the left button. For example,
choose 3 [F1] and then push the left button.

[F1]

1 BACK
2 [ECHO]
3 [STD KEY]
4 [ARP•AIS]
5 [OPERATION]
6 [PICTURE]

F1 menu

1-64
 1. RADAR OPERATION

4. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate category, ECHO, STD KEY, ARP•AIS,
OPERATION or PICTURE and then push the wheel or the left button. Refer
to the menus below to choose appropriate category.
[ECHO] [STD KEY]

1 BACK 1 BACK
2 2
PICTURE/ ALARM ACK/
IR STBY TX/
ES/ HL OFF/
EAV/ EBL OFFSET/
NOISE REJ/ MODE/
ANT SELECT/ OFF CENTER/
PULSE LENGTH/ CU TM RESET/
A/C SEA SELECT/ INDEX LINE/
AUTO RAIN SELECT/ VECTOR TIME/
TUNE SELECT/ VECTOR MODE/
ANT HEIGHT/ TARGET LIST/
SEA CONDITION/ TRAIL/
2ND ECHO REJ/ BRILL/
PM*1/ MARK/
SART MENU/
RANGE UP/
[ARP•AIS] RANGE DOWN/
ACQ/
1 BACK TARGET DATA/
2 TARGET CANCEL
DISP ARP/
DISP AIS/ [OPERATION]
TARGET DATA & ACQ/
PAST POSN INTERVAL/ 1 BACK
REF MARK/ 2
CPA LIMIT/ ECHO COLOR/
CPA/ BACK COLOR/
TCPA/ RING/
GZ1/
ALARM1/
GZ2/
TARGET LIST SORT/ ALARM2/
TRIAL MANEUVER/ WATCH ALARM RESET/
ARP•AIS FUSION/ ZOOM/
AIS MESSAGE MARK DELETE/
TRIAL MODE CHANGE OWN TRACK DELETE/
TGT TRACK DELETE/
[PICTURE] CHART ALIGN/
DISPLAY SELECT/
1 BACK MOB/
2 USER DEFAULT
PICTURE1/ OWN TRK ALL ERASE
PICTURE2/ TGT TRK ALL ERASE
PICTURE3/ MARK ALL ERASE
PICTURE4/
NEAR/
FAR/ *1 Models other than
NEAR BUOY/ FAR-2157, FAR-2167DS
FAR BUOY/ 2
ROUGH SEA/ * FAR-2157, FAR-2167DS only
SHIP/
1
HARBOR* /
1
COAST* /
2
NEAR BIRD* /
2
FAR BIRD*

1-65
1. RADAR OPERATION

5. Roll the wheel to choose “2” and then push the wheel or the left button.
6. Roll the wheel to choose function desired and then push the wheel or left
button.
7. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

Description of function key programs

Item Description
[ECHO]
PICTURE Chooses picture setup function.
IR Chooses interference rejection level.
ES Chooses echo stretch function.
EAV Chooses echo averaging function.
NOISE REJ Turns noise rejector on/off.
ANT SELECT Chooses antenna.
PULSE LENGTH Chooses pulselength.
A/C SEA SELECT Chooses A/C SEA adjustment method.
AUTO RAIN SELECT Chooses AUTO RAIN level.
TUNE SELECT Chooses tuning adjustment method.
ANT HEIGHT Sets antenna height.
SEA CONDITION Sets sea condition.
2ND ECHO REJ Turns 2nd trace echo rejector on/off.
PM Turns performance monitor on/off.
SART Turns SART setup conditions on/off.
[STD KEY]
ALARM ACK Acknowledges alarm. (Silences audible alarm.)
STBY TX Toggles between stand-by and transmit.
HL OFF Turns heading line on/off.
EBL OFFSET Offsets EBL.
OFF CENTER Off centers the display.
CU TM RESET Returns own ship mark to point 75% of range in use.
INDEX LINE Turns index line on/off.
VECTOR TIME Sets vector time.
VECTOR MODE Sets vector mode.
TARGET LIST Displays target list.
TRAIL Sets trail parameters.
BRILL Sets brilliance.
MARK Chooses mark to inscribe.
MENU Opens the MAIN menu.
RANGE UP Raises the range scale.
RANGE DOWN Lowers the range scale.
ACQ Acquires ARP target; activate sleeping AIS target.
TARGET DATA Shows target data.
TARGET CANCEL Cancels tracking of ARP target; sleep AIS target.

1-66
 1. RADAR OPERATION

Description of function key programs (con’t from previous page)

Item Description
[ARP•AIS]
DISP ARP Activates/deactivates ARP.
DISP AIS Activates/deactivates AIS.
TARGET DATA & ACQ ARP: Acquires ARP target; shows data for ARP target selected.
AIS: Activates sleeping AIS target; shows data for AIS target
selected.
PAST POSN INTERVAL Chooses past position plotting interval.
REF MARK Inscribes reference mark (for target-based speed).
CPA LIMIT Turns CPA limit on/off.
CPA Enters CPA range.
TCPA Enters TCPA time.
GZ1 Sets Guard Zone 1.
GZ2 Sets Guard Zone 2.
TARGET LIST SORT Sorts target list.
TRIAL MANEUVER Executes trial maneuver.
ARP•AIS FUSION Converts ARP target to AIS target.
AIS MESSAGE Displays AIS message board.
TRIAL MODE CHANGE Switches between dynamic and static modes.
[OPERATION]
ECHO COLOR Chooses echo color.
BACK COLOR Chooses background color.
RING Turns range rings on/off.
ALARM1 Sets no. 1 guard alarm.
ALARM2 Sets no. 2 guard alarm.
WATCH ALARM RESET Resets watch alarm.
ZOOM Enables zoom.
MARK DELETE Deletes mark (origin mark, waypoint mark, plotter mark).
OWN TRACK DELETE Deletes own ship’s tracks according to setting of OWN TRACK
menu (see page 5-15).
TGT TRACK DELETE Deletes other ship’s tracks according to setting of TARGET TRACK
menu (see page 5-15).
CHART ALIGN Aligns chart with radar picture.
DISPLAY SELECT Chooses display mode.
MOB Inscribes MOB mark.
USER DEFAULT Restores user defaults for [F1]-[F3].
(When “F-KEY” is selected at USER DEFAULT in OPERATION
(2/2) menu.)
1. Set equipment as desired.
2. Display F1, F2 or F3 menu as applicable.
3. Choose USER DEFAULTS and long-push (more than one
second) the left button.
4. To recall a setting, select F1, F2 or F3 menu as applicable
and choose USER DEFAULTS.
The radar is then set to stand-by and “USER DEFAULT”
appears at the bottom right corner.
OWN TRK ALL ERASE Erases all own ship’s tracks.
TGT TRK ALL ERASE Erases all other ship’s tracks.
MARK ALL ERASE Erases all marks.

1-67
1. RADAR OPERATION

Description of function key programs (con’t from previous page)

Item Description
[PICTURE]
PICTURE1 – PICTURE4 Actuates settings of user-programmed setup.
NEAR Optimum setting for short range detection using a range scale of 3
nm or less on calm seas
FAR Optimum setting for long range detection using a range scale of 6
nm or larger
NEAR BUOY Optimum setting for detecting navigation buoys, small vessels and
other small surface objects at close range
FAR BUOY Optimum setting for detecting navigation buoys, small vessels and
other small surface objects at long range
ROUGH SEA Optimum setting for rough weather or heavy rain
SHIP Optimum setting for detecting vessels
HARBOR Optimum setting for harbor navigation
COAST Optimum setting for coastal navigation
NEAR BIRD Optimum setting for detecting birds at close range
FAR BIRD Optimum setting for detecting birds at far range

1-68
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.35 Ship’s Position

Choose the source of ship’s position data as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the OS POSN box at the top right corner of the
screen.
OS POSN

OS POSN box
2. Push the right button to show the OS POSN menu.

[OS POSN MENU]

1 NAV AID
GPS1/GPS2/
DEAD RECKONING/
LAN
2 MANUAL L/L
00°00.00 N
000°00.00 W
3 SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT
OFF/ON

OS POSN menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 1 NAV AID and then push the wheel or the left
button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose GPS1, GPS2 or DEAD RECKONING as
appropriate and then push the wheel or the left button.
GPS1: GPS navigator connected to nav port
GPS2: GPS navigator connected to SPEED LOG port or TRACK CONTROL
port.
5. If you have chosen DEAD RECKONING do the following to enter position
manually. For GPS1 or GPS2, go to step 7.
a) Roll the wheel to choose 2 MANUAL L/L and then push the wheel. Enter
latitude and longitude position as follows.
b) Roll the wheel to set appropriate digit in the latitude field and then push the
wheel. (You may push the wheel again to skip a place.) For keyboard
operation, press appropriate numeric keys and then press the [ENTER
MARK] key.
c) Set longitude similar to how you set latitude and then push the wheel. (For
keyboard operation, press the [ENTER MARK] key.)
Note: Co-ordinate polarity may be switched by rolling the wheel, or pressing the
[2] key in case of keyboard operation.
6. To use a navigation device connected to radars via a LAN, set 3 SIO DATA
LAN OUTPUT to ON, and then choose LAN at 1 NAVAID.
7. Push the right button to close the menu.

Note: When the AIS function is active, DEAD RECKONING is shown in gray to
indicate that it is not available for selection.

1-69
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.36 Noise Rejector

White noise may show itself on the screen as random “speckles” spread over the
entire radar image. You can remove this noise as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen.
2. Push the right button to open the PICTURE menu.

[PICTURE MENU]

1 INT REJECT
OFF/1/2/3
2 ECHO STRETCH
OFF/1/2/3
3 ECHO AVERAGE
OFF/1/2/3
4 NOISE REJ
OFF/ON
5 AUTO STC
OFF/ON
6 AUTO RAIN
OFF/1/2/3/4
7 VIDEO CONTRAST
1/2/3/4/
A/B/C
8 [PULSE]
9 [CONDITION]
0 DEFAULT (ENTERX3)

PICTURE menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 NOISE REJ and then push the wheel or the left
button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose ON or OFF as appropriate and then push the wheel
or the left button.
5. Push the right button to close the menu.

1-70
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.37 Suppressing Second-trace Echoes

In certain situations, echoes from very distance targets may appear as false
echoes (second-trace echoes) on the screen. This occurs when the return echo
is received one transmission cycle later, or after a next radar pulse has been
transmitted.
Tx repetition
Second-trace
echo

False echo
range

Actual range

Second-trace echoes
To reject second-trace echoes:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ECHO and then push the wheel or the left button
to open the ECHO menu.
[ECHO]

1 BACK
2 2ND ECHO REJ
OFF/ON
3 TUNE INITIALIZE
4 PM*1
OFF/ON
5 SART
OFF/ON
6 WIPER
OFF/1/2
7 ECHO AREA*2 *1 Not available on FAR-2157/2167DS
CIRCLE/WIDE/ALL *2 Not available on IMO or A type

ECHO menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 2ND ECHO REJ and then push the wheel or the
left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel
or the left button.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1-71
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.38 Adjusting Brilliance of Screen Data

You can adjust relative brilliance levels of various markers and alphanumeric
readouts displayed on the screen.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the BRILL box at the bottom left corner of the
screen and then push the right button to show the BRILL menu.
[BRILL1 MENU (1/2)] * Not available [BRILL1 MENU (2/2)]
on IMO or A type
1 ECHO COLOR 1 BACK
YEL/GRN/ Choose 0 NEXT 2 BRG CURSOR
WHT/COLOR* to show page 2 3 EBL
2 BKGD COLOR of the BRILL menu. 4 VRM
BLK-GRN/ 5 INDEX LINE
BLK-RED/ 6 ARP SYMBOL
BLU-CIR/ 7 AIS SYMBOL
BLU/BRT-BLU 8 L/L GRID
3 PANEL DIMMER 9 MARK
4 CHARACTER 0 CHART*
5 CURSOR
6 ECHO
7 TRAIL Note: Four brilliance and color sets are
8 HL provided. For further details see
9 RING paragraph 1.49.
0 NEXT

BRILL menu
2. Roll the wheel to choose item you wish to adjust and then push the wheel or
the left button. (To go to the second page of the BRILL menu choose 0 NEXT
and push the wheel.)
Page 1 Page 2
Item Adjusts Item Adjusts
brilliance of; brilliance of;
1 ECHO COLOR See para. 1.49. 2 BRG CURSOR Bearing cursor
2 BKGD COLOR See para. 1.49. 3 EBL EBLs
3 PANEL Backlighting of 4 VRM VRMs
DIMMER control unit
4 CHARACTER All alphanumeric 5 INDEX LINE Index lines
characters
5 CURSOR Cursor (+) and 6 ARP ARP symbols
arrow SYMBOL
6 ECHO Radar echoes 7 AIS SYMBOL AIS symbols
7 TRAIL Target trails 8 L/L Chart grid
8 HL Heading line 9 MARK All marks
9 RING Range rings 0 CHART Chart
3. Roll the wheel to set brilliance level. The range of adjustment for items
except “HL” and “CURSOR” is 0-100%. The range of adjustment for HL and
CURSOR is 50-100%.
4. Push the right button once or twice to close the menu.

1-72
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.39 Watch Alarm

The watch alarm sounds the audible alarm at the chosen time interval to help
you keep regular watch of the radar picture for safety or other purposes.

The WATCH box appears at the lower-left corner of the screen with a watch
alarm timer counts down from value set (for example, “12:00”).

WATCH
12:00

WATCH box
When a preset time interval has elapsed, the audible watch alarm is released,
the screen label WATCH turns red and the watch alarm timer freezes at “0:00.”
To silence the alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the full keyboard or roll the
trackball to choose the ALARM ACK box and then push the left button. The label
WATCH turns to normal color and the watch alarm timer is reset to the initial
value and starts the count-down sequence again.

If you press the [ALARM ACK] key or click the box with the left button before the
selected time interval is reached, the watch alarm timer is reset to the initial
value and starts the count-down sequence again.

To set watch time interval:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 3 ALARM then push the wheel or the left button.

[ALARM]

1 BACK
2 TARGET ALARM MODE
IN/OUT
3 TARGET ALARM MODE
1/2/3/4
4 WATCH ALARM
OFF/6M/10M/
12M/15M/20M
5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL
LOW/MID/HIGH
6 [ALARM OUT1]
7 [ALARM OUT2]
8 [ALARM OUT3]
9 [ALARM OUT4]
0 AUDIO ALARM
OFF/ON
ALARM menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 WATCH ALARM and then push the wheel.
4. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate time interval and then push the wheel or
the left button and then push the right button twice to close the menu.

1-73
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.40 Setting Up Nav Data

Wind, depth, ocean current, water temperature, date and time and waypoint data
may be set up as follows:

1. Left-click the MENU box to open the menu.

2. Select 7 [NAV DATA].

[NAV DATA]

1 BACK
2 DEPTH
OFF/m/ft
3 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE
10/20/50/
100/200/500
4 DEPTH MARK
000
5 CURRENT
OFF/ON
6 WIND
OFF/m/s/kn
RELATIVE/
TRUE THEORETICAL/
TRUE NORTH
7 TEMP
OFF/ON
8 DATE-TIME
OFF/UTC/LOCAL
9 LOCAL TIME ADJ
+00:00
0 WPT DATA
OFF/REL/TRUE

NAV DATA menu

3. Select appropriate options referring to the table on the next page for details.

1-74
 1. RADAR OPERATION

Nav data menu description

Item Description
2 DEPTH Selects unit of depth measurement, or turn depth indication off.
3 DEPTH Selects depth scale range. The echogram shows the last 30 minutes of
GRAPH SCALE sounding along the ship’s track.
4 DEPTH MARK Selects the depth at which to show the depth mark.
5 CURRENT Turns ocean current display on (ocean current relative to North) or off.
6 WIND Selects unit of wind speed measurement/wind speed format. Wind vector
format can be selected from three choices:
RELATIVE: Apparent wind measured by wind meter, with ship's bow as
reference.
TRUE THEORETICAL: Apparent wind minus ship's movement, with ship's
bow as reference.
TRUE NORTH: Apparent wind minus ship's movement, with North as
reference.
7 TEMP Turns water temperature indication on/off.
8 DATE-TIME Selects how to display date and time: OFF, UTC or LOCAL.
9 LOCAL TIME If LOCAL is selected at 8 DATE-TIME, roll the scrollwheel to set the time
ADJ difference between local time and UTC time. A negative value may be
selected by spinning the scrollwheel past zero.
0 WPT DATA Turn waypoint data off or select waypoint data reference, true or relative.

4. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

Note: Wind and current data require appropriate sensors. Depth data requires
appropriate echo-sounding equipment. Wind vector shows a direction from
which the wind blows in, relative to own ship heading, and labeled "T *." Wind
velocity is a true wind speed as a result of compensating for own ship’s speed
and orientation. Ocean current (tide) is shown relative to bow in head-up, cursor
gyro and course-up, and reference to North in north-up and true motion.

N OS heading

0 Current relative to north,

Present depth
full scale 10 kn.
20
40 W E

60
Last 30 minutes Wind direction indication
of depth 80 method depends on the
100 m MENU Selection of Wind
30 20 10 min Vector.
S
Echogram Wind, current graph

Examples of depth echogram and wind, tide graph

1-75
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.41 Text Window Setup

The text window, displayed at the right 1/4 of the screen, mainly shows nav data,
zoomed target, and ARP target data. You can set up this window as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 9 [CUSTOMIZE•TEST] and then push the wheel or
the left button.

[CUSTOMIZE•TEST]

1 BACK
2 [DATA BOX]
3 [F1]
4 [F2]
5 [F3]
6 [F4]
7 [OPERATION]
8 [TEST]

CUSTOMIZE•TEST menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 [DATA BOX] and then push the wheel or the left
button.

[DATA BOX]

1 BACK

3 NAV DATA
OFF/ON
4 ZOOM
OFF/2TIMES/3TIMES
5 ZOOM DISPLAY
STAB GND/STAB HGD/
STAB NORTH/
ARP TRACK
6 TARGET DATA
1BOX/2BOX/3BOX/
LARGE

DATA BOX menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 3 NAV DATA and then push the wheel or the left
button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel
or the left button.
6. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ZOOM and then push the wheel or the left button.
7. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or zoom magnification factor (2TIMES or 3
TIMES) and then push the wheel or the left button.
8. If you chose a zoom factor at step 7, go to step 9. Otherwise, go to step 11.
9. Roll the wheel to choose 5 ZOOM DISPLAY and then push the wheel or the
left button.

1-76
 1. RADAR OPERATION

10. Roll the wheel to choose zoom display format and then push the wheel or the
left button.
STAB GND: Ground stabilized (geographically Fixed)
STAB HDG: Heading stabilized (relative)
STAB NORTH: North stabilized (true)
ARP TRACK: Zoom ARP targets.
11. Roll the wheel to choose 6 TARGET DATA and then push the wheel or the
left button.
12. Roll the wheel to choose quantity of ARP target data to show among 1BOX,
2BOX, 3BOX and LARGE and then push the wheel or the left button.

Nav Data or Zoom Nav Data or Zoom

Zoom 2 BOX

1 BOX 1 BOX

ARP, AIS Functions ARP, AIS Functions

Box Box
Warnings, Alerts Warnings, Alerts

Guidance Box Guidance Box

1 BOX 2 BOX

Note: Nav data or zoom is

3 BOX Nav Data or Zoom
automatically removed
when "3BOX" is selected.
2 BOX
LARGE
1 BOX

ARP, AIS Functions ARP, AIS Functions

Box Box
Warnings, Alerts Warnings, Alerts

Guidance Box Guidance Box

3 BOX LARGE
ARP target data setting and data box arrangement
13. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

1-77
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.42 Customizing Operation

Several operation items may be customized to suit your needs.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 9 [CUSTOMIZE•TEST] and then push the wheel or
the left button to open the CUSTOMIZE•TEST menu.

[CUSTOMIZE•TEST]

1 BACK
2 [DATA BOX]
3 [F1]
4 [F2]
5 [F3]
6 [F4]
7 [OPERATION]
8 [TEST]

CUSTOMIZE•TEST menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 7 [OPERATION] and then push the wheel or the left
button.
[OPERATION]

1 BACK
2 WHEEL DRIVE
NORMAL/REVERSE
3 KEY BEEP
OFF/LO/MID/HI
4 REMOTE KEY
F#-/DISPLAY SELECT
5 POP UP GUIDANCE*
OFF/ON
6 OWN SHIP VECTOR
OFF/HDG/COURSE
7 STERN-UP*
OFF/ON
8 SHUTTLE FERRY
OFF/MODE1/MODE2
* Not available on IMO or A type
0 NEXT

OPERATION menu
4. Set each item as appropriate, referring to the table on the next page for
details.
5. Push the right button to close the menu.

1-78
 1. RADAR OPERATION

Operation menu items

Item No. Description Options

2 WHEEL DRIVE Choose how to cycle data when NORMAL: Cycles numeral
using the wheel. data in numeric order and
indication data in clockwise
order.
REVERSE: Reverse of
NORMAL.
3 KEY BEEP Key beeps when key sequence OFF: No key beep
has been correctly executed. LO, MID, HI: Loudness of
key beep
4 REMOTE KEY Choose function of keys F1-F4 F*: Operates as function
on control unit. key.
DISPLAY: Control unit
operates radar it is
connected to.
5 POP UP Pop up guidance You may turn the guidance
GUIDANCE off or on.
(Available on B, C
and W types)
6 OWN SHIP Choose what the own ship OFF: No own ship vector
VECTOR vector displays. HDG: Vector shows heading
direction.
COURSE: Vector shows
course.
7 STERN-UP Enables/disables the stern-up ON: Enables stern-up mode.
presentation mode. OFF: Disables stern-up
mode.
8 SHUTTLE Turns shuttle ferry mode on or OFF: Disables shuttle ferry
FERRY off. mode.
MODE1: Head-up picture is
rotated 180°.
MODE2: Head-up picture is
rotated 180° and the gyro
reading has 180° added to it
or subtracted from it.

1-79
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.43 Alarms
When error is detected, the appropriate alarm indication appears (in red) and the
audible alarm sounds. Silence the audible alarm with the [ALARM ACK] key or
choose the ALARM ACK box and then push the left button. The error indication
remains on the display until the reason for the alarm is removed.

1.43.1 Alarm description

Alarm description

Warning Audible Visual alarm To quit alarm status

alarm
GYRO 2 beeps HDG indication reads “***.*” and Press the [MODE] key top
failure the message HEADING SET erase the message. Match
appears at the lower-left corner of the on-screen HDG readout
the screen. GYRO in red. with the actual compass
reading, if necessary.
Display is automatically switched to
head-up mode within 1 min.
Guard Beeps Target flashes. Press the [ALARM ACK] key
alarm or click the ALARM ACK box
with the left button.
WATCH Beeps WATCH 0:00 Press the [ALARM ACK] key
alarm or click the WATCH box with
(WATCH appears and time count
the left button. The WATCH
freezes at 0:00).
box is displayed in normal
video and the timer is reset.
Own ship None “***.*” In own ship position field Make sure that own ship
lat/lon “***.*” In cursor position field position data is fed from
external radionav equipment.
Cursor
lat/lon
System None Message GYRO appears at screen Make sure the antenna is
failure bottom. No radar echoes. SYSTEM turned on.
FAIL in red at the lower left of the
display during test.
Incorrect Double None Correct keystroke is
keystroke beep tone responded by a single beep
(Non-IMO provided that KEY BEEP ON
type) is selected in the
OPERATION menu.
Log failure 2 beeps LOG **.* and LOG appear in red, if If the SDME has failed, use
no log signal is input for 30 s while the Manual Speed mode or
the ship speed has been more than other appropriate sensor.
5.0 kt.

1-80
 1. RADAR OPERATION

Alarm description (con’t from previous page)

Warning Audible Visual alarm To quit alarm status

alarm
EPFS Continuous EPFS in red (EPFS: electronic To silence the beep and
failure beep position-fixing system) in the erase the message, press
warning and indication cell. the [ALARM ACK] key or
The indication also appears when click the ALARM ACK box
the GPS mode is switched with the left button.
between GPS and DGPS. Message cannot be
erased if position signal is
missing; it is automatically
erased when signal is
restored.
SOG none The SOG (Speed Made Good)
indication indication turns red at the top data
cell when SOG option is selected
on the menu and the associated
SDME (Speed and Distance
Measuring Equipment = Speed log)
fails to detect a bottom tracking
speed, resulting in the “Speed
through the water” (STW) mode
automatically.
COLLISION Continuous COLLISION comes on when Take evasive action or
beep ARP-tracked target is on collision terminate tracking of
course. target.
Then, the visual indication
goes off.
TRUE None The TRUE VECTOR indication
VECTOR turns red when the TRUE Vector is
indication selected in the RM mode, and
returns to the normal text color in
the North-up TM mode.
Guard Zone Continuous The label GZ appears in red if a Press the [ALARM ACK]
alarm beep target enters to the target alarm key or click the ALARM
zone. Target is masked by a ACK box with the left
flashing inverted triangle. button to acknowledge it.
GZ OUT None If the range scale has been Change the range scale of
alarm reduced to make one of GZs GZ.
positions more than 1.5 times of
the range scale, the label GZ OUT
appears in red.

1-81
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.43.2 Outputting alarm signal

Four ports are provided from which to output alarm signals to external equipment.
Choose the port and alarm signals to output as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 3 ALARM and then push the wheel or the left
button.
[ALARM]

1 BACK
2 GUARD ALARM MODE
IN/OUT
3 GUARD ALARM LEVEL
1/2/3/4
4 WATCH ALARM
OFF/6M/10M/
12M/15/20M
5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL
LOW/MID/HIGH
6 [ALARM OUT1]
7 [ALARM OUT2]
8 [ALARM OUT3]
9 [ALARM OUT4]
0 AUDIO ALARM
OFF/ON

ALARM menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate “ALARM OUT” item (6-9), and then
push the wheel or the left button.

[ALARM OUT1]

1 BACK
2
TARGET ALARM
WATCH ALARM
GUARD ZONE
LOST TARGET
CPA LIMIT
AUTO ACQ TGT FULL
MAN ACQ TGT FULL
ARP SYSTEM ERROR
AZIMUTH
HEAD LINE
TRIGGER
VIDEO
GYRO
LOG
EPFS
XTE
ARRIVAL WPT
DEPTH
ALARM ACK OUT
OPERATOR FITNESS
9 ALARM OUT POLARITY
NORMAL/INVERT ALARM OUT1 menu

1-82
 1. RADAR OPERATION

4. Roll the wheel to choose an alarm to output and then push the wheel or the
left button. The alarm chosen is underlined.
5. Repeat step 5 to choose other alarms to output.
6. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

1.44 Choosing the Antenna, Displaying Antenna

Information
This radar’s interswitch uses an Ethernet to exchange video and control signals
and actual interswitching is done with a digitized signal. Max. 4 antennas may be
selected from the menu.

1.44.1 Choosing the antenna

For the ship which carries multiple antennas you may choose the antenna to use
as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the ANTENNA box at the left side of
the screen.
ANT1 X-BAND

ANTENNA box
2. Push the left button to choose the antenna to use.

Note: When the interswitch functions, all processor units viewing the image from
the same antenna show the same radar picture, due to the nature of the
LAN. Functions other than those listed below are controlled mutually.

Independently controlled functions in interswitching

Echo stretch
Echo averaging
Echo trails
Zoom
Wiper
Vector mode, vector time
ARP, AIS track interval
Target alarm
Speed data
L/L data

1-83
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.44.2 Displaying antenna information

The antenna information display shows data (radar band, model and position) on
the radar antennas currently powered. If an antenna is not powered, its data
area is blank.

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the ANTENNA box at the left side of
the screen.
2. Push the left button to choose the antenna for which you want to find
information. (You cannot choose an antenna which does not exist or one
which is not powered.)
3. Push the right button to show the antenna information display.

[ANT INFORMATION] Using the information shown on the antenna

information display at left, the antenna system
ANT NO 1
BAND : X-BAND configuration looks as below.
MODEL : 12 UP ANT1 ANT2 ANT3
POS : FORE
ANT NO 2
BAND : X-BAND
MODEL : 25 UP
POS : MAIN TOP DISP-A DISP-B DISP-C
ANT NO 3
BAND : S-BAND
MODEL : 30 UP
POS : MAIN 2ND Ethernet
HUB
ANT NO 4
BAND :
MODEL :
POS :

OWN RADAR NO.

8 SUB MONITOR*
OFF/ON * Not available on IMO or A type
9 INTER SW PRIORITY
OFF/ON

ANTENNA INFORMATION display

4. Push the right button to close the antenna information display.

The interswitch function permits control of all antennas from any display, using
an Ethernet. In the antenna system configuration shown above, for example,
ANT1 can be controlled directly from DISPLAY-A, and also can be controlled
from other displays, via the Ethernet. Further, if ANT1 is out of order or its power
has been turned off, any display can switch to ANT2 or ANT3. The ANT
INFORMATION display shows which antennas can be used. Refer to it to know
antenna status.

1-84
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.45 Cursor Data

Cursor data can be shown in range and bearing from own ship, latitude and
longitude position or cursor’s X-Y coordinates.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the CURSOR DATA box at the right side of the
display.
34°40.849 N
+ 135°18.303 E

CURSOR DATA box (L/L position)

2. Push the left button to choose the cursor data to show. The cursor data
changes in the sequence shown below.

1351.2°T Range and bearing from

+ 13.67NM own ship to cursor position

34°30.323 N Latitude and longitude

+ 135°08.263 E position of cursor

9.649NM
+ 9.683NM
Cursor X-Y position

Cursor data options

Note 1: For the X-Y coordinates display, the Y-axis is the heading line, right/top
is “plus” and left/lower is “minus.”
Note 2: When displaying latitude and longitude position and the cursor has been
aligned (on the PLOTTER menu), the indication “CHART ALIGN”
appears at the right side of the screen (in red).
Note 3: Cursor data reads “- - -.-” when the cursor is placed outside the effective
display area.
Note 4: For the IMO- and A-type radars, uou may choose cursor bearing format
(true or relative) and cursor range unit (nm, sm, km or kyd) as follows:
MENU → 2 MARK → 9 [EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET] → (CURSOR
BEARING, CURSOR RANGE)

1-85
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.46 Performance Monitor

A performance monitor is required for a radar installed on vessels of 300 GT and
upward engaged in international voyages. Two units are available:
X-band radar: PM-31 (9410 ± 45 MHz)
S-band radar: PM-51 (3050 ± 30 MHz).
The performance monitor is incorporated in the antenna unit. Note that neither
FAR-2157 nor FAR-2167DS carry a performance monitor.

1.46.1 Activating, deactivating the performance monitor

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ECHO and then push the wheel or the left button.
[ECHO]

1 BACK
2 2ND ECHO REJ
OFF/ON
3 TUNE INITIALIZE
4 PM*1
OFF/ON
5 SART
OFF/ON
6 WIPER
OFF/1/2
7 ECHO AREA*2 *1 Not available on FAR-2157/2167DS
CIRCLE/WIDE/ALL *2 Not available on IMO or A type

ECHO menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 PM and then push the wheel or the left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel
or the left button.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

“PM” appears on the display when the performance monitor is active.

1.46.2 Checking radar performance

1. The radar is automatically set up as follows:
Range: 24 nm
Pulselength: Long
Shadow Sector: Off
STC: Off
RAIN: Off
Echo Stretch: Off
Echo Average: Off
Video Contrast: 2-B
Tune: Auto
Gain: Initial setting (as set with PM GAIN ADJ at installation)
2. Turn on the performance monitor referring to paragraph 1.46.1.
3. After observing the results turn off the performance monitor.

1-86
 1. RADAR OPERATION

The range scale is automatically set to 24 nm. The radar screen will show one or
two arcs. If the radar transmitter and receiver are in good working conditions in
as much as the original state when the monitor was turned up, the innermost
arcs should appear between 13.5 to 18.5 nm. The performance monitor can
observe a total of 10 dB loss in transmitter and receiver.

Display Radar State

Transmitter: normal
Receiver: normal
13.5 nm

Transmitter and receiver:

10 db loss
18.5 nm Echo is not visible

Note: The lengths of the arcs may vary according to installation environment.
Judge the strength of the echo which appears within 90° behind own ship
to confirm if the radar is working properly or not.

1-87
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.47 Wiper
The wiper feature automatically suppresses the brilliance of weak signals (noise,
sea clutter, rain clutter, etc.) and unwanted signals such as radar interference to
clear the picture of unwanted echoes. Its effect depends on the wiper setting
used and whether each averaging is turned on or off, as described below.
Echo averaging and wiper states and wiper affect

Wiper setting 1 Wiper setting 2

Echo averaging OFF Condition A Condition A
Echo averaging ON (1/2/3) Condition A Condition B

Condition A: The brilliance of unwanted weak echoes, such as noise, sea

clutter and rain clutter, is reduced to clear up the picture. The difference between
wiper setting “1” and “2” is that brilliance is lowered more slowly in “2”.

Condition B: Echo averaging is automatically activated when the wiper feature

is turned on, allowing you to instantly see how the picture is affected with echo
averaging turned off and turned on.

To activate the wiper feature, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ECHO and then push the wheel or the left button.
[ECHO]

1 BACK
2 2ND ECHO REJ
OFF/ON
3 TUNE INITIALIZE
4 PM*1
OFF/ON
5 SART
OFF/ON
6 WIPER
OFF/1/2
7 ECHO AREA*2 *1 Not available on FAR-2157/2167DS
CIRCLE/WIDE/ALL *2 Not available on IMO or A type

ECHO menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 WIPER and then push the wheel or the left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose OFF, 1 or 2 as appropriate and then push the wheel
or the left button.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1-88
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.48 Own Ship Symbol

Own ship symbol ( ) may be inscribed on the screen as below. You may enter
ten such symbols. Each own ship symbols is shown with a number.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MARK box at the left side of the screen. The
guidance box now reads “MARK SELECT / MARK MENU.”
MARK
Mark type last 1
selected, mark -> +
number - - -m, - - -m

Dimensions of
own ship

Mark box
2. Push the right button to open the MARK menu.
[MARK MENU]

1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA
2 MARK KIND
ORIGIN MARK(No. )/
ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/
MAP MARK/
WP 1~50/
WP 51~ 100/
WP 101~150/
WP 151~ 200/
OWN SHIP SHAPE
8 MARK POSN
CURSOR/OS/L/L
00°000.00 N
000°000.00 E
9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
0 MAP MARK COLOR* * Not available on IMO
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/ or A type
CYA/MAG/WHT

MARK menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose “2” and then push the wheel or the left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose OWN SHIP SHAPE and then push the wheel or the
left button.
5. Push the right button to close the menu.
6. Use the trackball to choose the own ship symbol at the 01
bottom left corner.
10 02
7. Roll the wheel to choose the point number for which you
want to change its position. See figure at right. 09 03
8. Push the left button. The cursor positions at the point number 08 04
chosen.
07 05
9. Use the trackball to drag the point to location desired. 06

10. Push the left button to confirm chosen location.

11. Repeat steps 6-10 continue changing symbol shape.

1-89
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.49 Color and Brilliance Sets

This radar provides four sets of color and brilliance sets to match any ambient
lighting condition. The default colors are as shown in the table below. The default
brilliance setting for any item is “50%”.

BRILL1 BRILL2 BRILL3 BRILL4

Echo Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow
Inside Display, Black, Black Black, Black Blue, Black Blue, Blue
Outside Display
Menu Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow
Characters Green Red Green White
Bearing Scale Blue Red White Green

1.49.1 Choosing color and brilliance set

1. Roll the trackball to choose the BRILL box at the left side of the screen.
2. Roll the wheel to choose color and brilliance set from among BRILL1 –
BRILL4.
3. Push the wheel to finish.

1.49.2 Presetting color and brilliance set

1. Roll the trackball to choose the BRILL box at the left side of the screen.
2. Push the right button to open the BRILL menu.
[BRILL1 MENU (1/2)]

1 ECHO COLOR
YEL/GRN/
WHT/COLOR*
2 BKGD COLOR
BLK-GRN/
BLK-RED/
BLU-CIR/
BLU/BRT-BLU
3 PANEL DIMMER
4 CHARACTER
5 CURSOR
6 ECHO
7 TRAIL
8 HL
9 RING
0 NEXT * Not available on IMO or A type

BRILL menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ECHO COLOR and then push the wheel or the
left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose echo color desired and then push the wheel or the
left button. “COLOR,” available on the B, C and W types, displays echoes in
colors of red, yellow and green, corresponding to signal levels of strong,
medium and weak.

1-90
 1. RADAR OPERATION

5. Roll the wheel to choose 2 BKGD COLOR and then push the wheel or the
left button.
6. Roll the wheel to choose background color and surrounding color
combination desired and then push the wheel or the left button.
7. Set brilliance-related items referring to paragraph 1.38.
8. Push the right button to close the BRILL menu.

1.50 Reference Point for CPA/TCPA

The common reference point for CPA/TCPA can be chosen from antenna
position or conning position as shown below. Echo sweep center and sector
blanking symbol are always referenced to antenna position regardless of
reference point chosen. For conning position, which is entered at installation,
EBL and VRM are referenced to conning position.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the Reference Point Box at the top of the screen.
REF POINT
ANT POSN

Reference point box

2. Push the right button to choose ANT POSN or CONN POSN as appropriate.

1-91
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.51 Switching Hub HUB-100 (option)

The HUB-100 provides switching for a card interface unit and multiple processor
units (max. 7), using an Ethernet interface (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T). LEDs
display link/activity, mode (full-duplex or half-duplex) and collision statuses.

No operation is required of the user. Simply turn on the HUB-100’s AC power

source to power it.

LED display
The LEDs on the top of the unit light, flash or go off according to equipment
status. When the equipment is powered all LEDs light and then go off.

LEDs

Switching Hub HUB-100

LED status and meaning

LED Status Meaning

Power Lit Equipment powered
Off Equipment off
Link/Act Lit Connection with terminal normal
Off Connection with terminal disconnected
Flashing Data TX or RX
FDx/Col Lit Full-duplex
Off Half-duplex
Flashing Collision
100M Lit 100Mbps connection
Off 10Mbps connection

1-92
 1. RADAR OPERATION

1.52 Dual Radar Display

The image from both X-band and S-band radars may be shown together on one
radar display. This allows you to take advantage of the best characteristics each
type of radar has to offer. Two display formats are available, mixed and combine,
and you may select desired format from the menu.
Image from main radar

Image from
external radar

External image overlaid on Separate internal and external

internal image ("MIX" setting) images ("COMBINE" setting)

The following should be done in order to enable the dual radar display:
• Set antenna position correctly on both the main radar and the external radar.
• Select external radar to use, from the DUAL RADAR menu.

1.52.1 Enabling/Disabling the Dual Radar Display

Enable or disable the dual radar display as shown in this section.
Note 1: The Tx blanking sector boundary lines are not shown when the dual
radar display is active. Further, neither the internal or external image is
shown in the Tx blanking sector.
Tx blanking sector not shown.
Tx blanking sector No image in Tx blanking sector.

Display area

Tx blanking sector Dual radar display with

Tx blanking sector

1-93
1. RADAR OPERATION

Note 2: In the dual radar display, a guard zone set on the main radar is also
accommodated on the external radar. When the position of the antennas
for the main and external radars is different and the No. 2 guard zone is set
on a close-in range, the on-screen guard zone may be shifted slightly from
both the main radar antenna reference and external radar antenna
reference. Accordingly, on the dual radar display, the actual guard zone
area may be shifted slightly. For example, the guard alarm sounds against
a target which has almost entered the guard zone. The further the range
the smaller the shift; however, there is little shift with the No.1 guard zone
(3-6 mile range, fixed). Further, do not set a guard zone such that it
straddles a boundary line of the dual radar sector.
A guard zone cannot be set while the dual radar display is active. Set a zone
before activating the dual radar display.
1. Right-click the MENU box.
MENU

2. Select 9 [CUSTOMIZE, TEST] and push the left button.

3. Select 7 [OPERATION] and push the left button.
4. Select 9 [DUAL RADAR] and push the left button.
5. Select 2 DUAL RADAR and push the left button.
[DUAL RADAR]
1 BACK
2 DUAL RADAR
OFF/MIX/COMBINE
3 COMBINE MODE*
OWN/EXT
4 COMBINE SECTOR*
START 000°
ANGLE 000°
5 COMBINE RANGE*
START 00.00NM
LENGTH 00.00NM
6 EXT RADAR
1/2/3/4

* Shown when 2 DUAL RADAR

is set for other than "MIX".
6. Select OFF, MIX or COMBINE as appropriate and push the left button.
OFF: Turn off the dual radar display.
MIX: Overlay whole external radar image on main radar image.
COMBINE: Display a part of the external radar image in the window on the
main radar.
Note: For the MIX display, the echo colors are as follows, regardless of
echo color settings:
Orange: An echo existing on both the main radar and the
external radar.
Yellow: An echo only appearing on the main radar.
Yellow/Green: An echo only appearing on the external radar.

1-94
 1. RADAR OPERATION

7. Push the right button four times to close the menu.

Note 1: The dual radar function becomes inoperative when the external radar
is turned off, set to stand-by, or set as sub display. When this
happens, the buzzer sounds and the message "EXT-STBY" (power
off, stand-by only) appears.
Note 2: The dual radar display is inoperative on the stern-up and shuttle ferry
modes.
Note 3: Some functions of the external radar image, listed below, may be
adjusted from the main radar.
1) Left-click the radar selection indication "CTRL OWN" at the top-left side
of the screen to switch control to the external radar. The indication then
shows "CTRL EXT". Each click of the indication switches control
between the main and external radar alternately.
2) The external image may be adjusted from the main radar. The following
functions may be adjusted:
• Transmit/stand-by switching
• PICTURE box setting
• GAIN
• A/C SEA
• A/C RAIN
• Tuning
• ECHO menu setting (2nd trace echo rejector, performance monitor)
• Range scale
• ARPA functions. A target acquired from an external radar has an "E"
before its target number. See the figure below.
Indicates target acquired from external radar

ARP TARGET
No. E 01
BRG 101.2°R
RNG 2.807NM
T CSE 090.5°T
T STW 9.9kt

• CPA/TCPA box settings

Note 4: In the MIX mode, only the targets acquired from an external radar are
tracked and displayed.

1-95
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.52.2 Specifying Sector Width and Length

When 2 DUAL RADAR in the DUAL RADAR menu is set for "COMBINE", specify
the width and length of the sector from the external radar to display on own radar.

1. Right-click the MENU box.

2. Select 9 [CUSTOMIZE, TEST] and push the left button.
3. Select 7 [OPERATION] and push the left button.
4. Select 9 [DUAL RADAR] and push the left button.
5. Select 3 COMBINE MODE and push the left button.
6. Select OWN or EXT and push the left button.
OWN: Set own radar’s antenna as reference point and set display area of own
radar. The area outside that set here is where the image from the
external radar will be displayed.
EXT: Set external radar’s antenna as reference point and set display area of
external radar. The area outside that set here is where the image from
own radar will be displayed.

Radar selected for COMBINE: External Radar selected for COMBINE: Own
START: 315 degrees START: 45 degrees
ANGLE: 90 degrees ANGLE: 270 degrees
START: 00.00 nm START: 00.00 nm
LENGTH: 99.99 nm LENGTH: 99.99 nm

Picture from
external radar

Position of antenna
for external radar

Position of antenna
for own radar

Picture from
own radar

7. Select 4 COMBINE SECTOR and push the left button.

8. Use the scrollwheel to set START and ANGLE, referring to the description and
example below. Spin the scrollwheel to set and push it to confirm.
A solid green line marks the dual radar display area.
• START: Start point of the sector (in degrees, 000-359)
• ANGLE: Width of the sector (in degrees, 000-359)

1-96
 1. RADAR OPERATION

In the example below, START is 130° and ANGLE is 100°.

Width of sector
START
ANGLE (Example: 130°)
(Example: 100°)

9. Select 5 COMBINE RANGE and push the left button.

10. Use the scrollwheel to set START and LENGTH, referring to the example below.
Spin the scrollwheel to set and push it to confirm.
• START: Set range start point.
• LENGTH: Set length of sector.

START

LENGTH

Example:
START: 01.00 nm
LENGTH: 02.00 nm

Push the right button four times to close the menu.

1-97
1. RADAR OPERATION

1.52.3 Choosing External Radar (image source)

Select the external radar to use in the dual radar display.
1. Right-click the MENU box.
2. Select 9 [CUSTOMIZE, TEST] and push the left button.
3. Select 7 [OPERATION] and push the left button.
4. Select 9 [DUAL RADAR] and push the left button.
[DUAL RADAR]
1 BACK
2 DUAL RADAR
OFF/MIX/COMBINE
3 COMBINE MODE*
OWN/EXT
4 COMBINE SECTOR*
START 000°
ANGLE 000°
5 COMBINE RANGE*
START 00.00NM
LENGTH 00.00NM
6 EXT RADAR
1/2/3/4

* Shown when 2 DUAL RADAR

is set for other than "MIX".
5. Select 6 EXT RADAR and push the left button.
6. Select desired radar no. and push the left button.
Only the numbers of connected radars are valid. Radar no. is set on the
Installation Setting menu.
7. Push the right button four times to close the menu.

1-98
2. RADAR OBSERVATION
2.1 General
2.1.1 Minimum and maximum ranges
Minimum range
The minimum range is defined by the shortest distance at which, using a scale of
1.5 or 0.75 nm, a target having an echoing area of 10 m2 is still shown separate
from the point representing the antenna position.

It is mainly dependent on the pulselength, antenna height, and signal processing

such as main bang suppression and digital quantization. It is a good practice to
use a shorter range scale as far as it gives favorable definition or clarity of
picture. The IMO Resolution MSC.64(67) Annex 4 (Shipborne radar) and A.820:
1995 (High Speed Craft Radar) require the minimum range to be less than 50 m
and 35 m, respectively. This series of radars satisfy this requirement.

Maximum range
The maximum detecting range of the radar, Rmax, varies considerably
depending on several factors such as the height of the antenna above the
waterline, the height of the target above the sea, the size, shape and material of
the target, and the atmospheric conditions.

Under normal atmospheric conditions, the maximum range is equal to the radar
horizon or a little shorter. The radar horizon is longer than the optical one by
about 6% because of the diffraction property of the radar signal. The Rmax is
given in the following equation.
R max = 2.2 x ( h1 + h2 )

where Rmax: radar horizon (nautical miles)

h1: antenna height (m)
h2 : target height (m)

Radar horizon
Optical horizon

For example, if the height of the antenna above the waterline is 9 meters and the
height of the target is 16 meters, the maximum radar range is;
R max= 2.2 x ( 9 + 16 ) = 2.2 x (3 + 4) = 15.4 nm

It should be noted that the detection range is reduced by precipitation (which

absorbs the radar signal).

2-1
2. RADAR OBSERVATION

X-band and S-band

In fair weather, the equation on the previous page does not give a significant
difference between X- and S-band radars. However, in heavy precipitation
condition, an S-band radar would have better detection than an X-band radar.

Radar resolution
There are two important factors in radar resolution (discrimination): bearing
resolution and range resolution.

Bearing resolution
Bearing resolution is the ability of the radar to display as separate pips the
echoes received from two targets which are at the same range and close
together. It is proportional to the antenna length and reciprocally proportional to
the wavelength. The length of the antenna radiator should be chosen for a
bearing resolution better than 2.5° (IMO Resolution). This condition is normally
satisfied with a radiator of 1.2 m (4 ft) or longer in the X-band. The S-band radar
requires a radiator of about 12 feet (3.6 m) or longer.

Range resolution
Range resolution is the ability to display as separate pips the echoes received
from two targets which are on the same bearing and close to each other. This is
determined by pulselength only. Practically, a 0.08 microsecond pulse offers the
discrimination better than 35 m as do so with all FURUNO radars.

Test targets for determining the range and bearing resolution are radar reflectors
having an echoing area of 10 m2.

Bearing accuracy
One of the most important features of the radar is how accurately the bearing of
a target can be measured. The accuracy of bearing measurement basically
depends on the narrowness of the radar beam. However, the bearing is usually
taken relative to the ship’s heading, and thus, proper adjustment of the heading
line at installation is an important factor in ensuring bearing accuracy. To
minimize error when measuring the bearing of a target, put the target echo at the
extreme position on the screen by selecting a suitable range.

Range measurement
Measurement of the range to a target is also a very important function of the
radar. Generally, there are two means of measuring range: the fixed range rings
and the variable range marker (VRM). The fixed range rings appear on the
screen with a predetermined interval and provide a rough estimate of the range
to a target. The variable range marker’s diameter is increased or decreased so
that the marker touches the inner edge of the target, allowing the operator to
obtain more accurate range measurements.

2-2
 2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2.2 False Echoes

Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no
target or disappear even if there are targets. They are, however, recognized if
you understand the reason why they are displayed. Typical false echoes are
shown below.

Multiple echoes
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a
large ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes may be
observed on the display at double, triple or other multiples of the actual range of
the target as shown below. Multiple reflection echoes can be reduced and often
removed by decreasing the gain (sensitivity) or properly adjusting the A/C SEA
control.
True
echo

Target
Own ship
Multiple
echo

Multiple echoes
Sidelobe echoes
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted, some radiation escapes on each side
of the beam, called “sidelobes.” If a target exists where it can be detected by the
side lobes as well as the main lobe, the side echoes may be represented on
both sides of the true echo at the same range. Side lobes show usually only on
short ranges and from strong targets. They can be reduced through careful
reduction of the gain or proper adjustment of the A/C SEA control.

Target A
Target B
(Spurious) Target B
(True)

Sidelobe echoes

2-3
2. RADAR OBSERVATION

Virtual image
A relatively large target close to your ship may be represented at two positions
on the screen. One of them is the true echo directly reflected by the target and
the other is a false echo which is caused by the mirror effect of a large object on
or close to your ship as shown in the figure below. If your ship comes close to a
large metal bridge, for example, such a false echo may temporarily be seen on
the screen.
Target ship

Own ship

True
echo

False
Mirror image echo
of target ship

Virtual image

Shadow sectors
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna block the radar
beam. If the angle subtended at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a
non-detecting sector may be produced. Within this sector targets can not be
detected.

Radar
antenna

Radar
mast

Shadow sector

Shadow sectors

2-4
 2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)

2.3.1 SART description
A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3
cm) radar within a range of approximately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received
causes it to transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete
radar frequency band. When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 µs) through
the band before beginning a relatively slow sweep (7.5 µs) through the band
back to the starting frequency. This process is repeated for a total of twelve
complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART frequency will match
that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar receiver.
If the SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12 slow
sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots
equally spaced by about 0.64 nautical miles will be shown.

When the radar to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm, the radar display my
show also the 12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional
dot responses, which also are equally spaced by 0.64 nautical miles, will be
interspersed with the original line of 12 dots. They will appear slightly weaker
and smaller than the original dots.
Screen A: When SART Screen B: When SART
is distant is close
Lines of 12 dots
are displayed in
concentric arcs.
Echo from SART Radar antenna
beamwidth
Echo from
24 NM 1.5 NM SART

Position of
SART

Own ship
position Own ship
position Position of
SART mark SART
length
9500 MHz Radar receiver
9200 MHz Sweep time bandwidth
7.5 μs
95 μs

Low speed sweep signal

Sweep start
High speed sweep signal

SART

2-5
2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2.3.2 Showing SART marks on the radar display

This radar is equipped with a feature which optimally sets up the radar for SART
detection. This feature automatically detunes the radar receiver out of its best
tuning condition. This erases or weakens all normal radar echoes, but the SART
marks are not erased because the SART response signal scans over all
frequencies in the 9 GHz band. When the radar approaches the SART in
operation, the SART marks will enlarge to large arcs, blurring a large part of the
screen.

To set up for SART detection do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the wheel or the
left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ECHO and then push the wheel or the left button.
[ECHO]

1 BACK
2 2ND ECHO REJ
OFF/ON
3 TUNE INITIALIZE
4 PM*1
OFF/ON
5 SART
OFF/ON
6 WIPER
OFF/1/2
7 ECHO AREA*2 *1 Not available on FAR-2157/2167DS
CIRCLE/WIDE/ALL *2 Not available on IMO or A type

ECHO menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 5 SART and then push the wheel or the left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose ON and then push the wheel or the left button.
With SART turned on radar functions are set as follows:

Range: 12 nm
Pulselength: Long
Echo Stretch: Off
Noise Rejector: Off
Echo Averaging: Off
Interference Rejector: Off
Performance Monitor: Off
A/C RAIN: Off
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

“SART” appears at the bottom of the display when this feature is active. Be sure
to turn off the SART feature when SART detection is no longer your objective.

2-6
 2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2.3.3 General remarks on receiving SART

SART range errors
When responses from only the 12 low frequency sweeps are visible (when the
SART is at a range greater than about 1 nm), the position at which the first dot is
displayed may be as much as 0.64 nm beyond the true position of the SART.
When the range closes so that the fast sweep responses are seen also, the first
of these will be no more than 150 meters beyond the true position.

Radar bandwidth
This is normally matched to the radar pulselength and is usually switched with
the range scale and the associated pulselength. Narrow bandwidths of 3-5 MHz
are used with long pulses on long range scales and wide bandwidths of 10-25
MHz with short pulses on short ranges.

A radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly, so
it is preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of the
SART.

Radar side lobes

As the SART is approached, side lobes from the radar antenna may show the
SART responses as a series of arcs or concentric rings. These can be removed
by the use of the anti-clutter sea control although it may be operationally useful
to observe the side lobes as they may be easier to detect in clutter conditions
and also they will confirm that the SART is near to own ship.

Note: SART information excerpted from IMO SN/Circ 197 OPERATION OF

MARINE RADAR FOR SART DETECTION.

2-7
2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2.4 RACON
A RACON is a radar beacon which emits radar receivable signals in the radar
frequency spectrum (X- or S-band). There are several signal formats; in general,
the RACON signal appears on the radar screen as a rectangular echo
originating at a point just beyond the position of the radar beacon. It has a Morse
coded pattern. Note that the position on the radar display is not accurate.

RACON

RACON

2-8
3. ARP OPERATION
3.1 Usage Precautions
• This function is designed to meet the IMO requirements of both ARPA and
ATA, and the desired function is selected during the installation of the
equipment. For sake of brevity, this manual uses “ARP” when referring to
ARPA or ATA.
• The plotting accuracy and response of this ARP meets IMO standards.
Tracking accuracy is affected by the following:
• Tracking accuracy is affected by course change. One to two minutes is
needed to restore vectors to full accuracy after an abrupt course change.
(The actual amount depends on gyrocompass specifications.)
• The amount of tracking delay is inversely proportional to the relative speed
of the target. Delay is on the order of 15-30 seconds for high relative
speed; 30-60 seconds for low relative speed.
• The data generated by this ARP are intended for reference only. Refer to
official nautical charts for detailed and up-to-date information.
• A target measuring 800 m or more in the radial or circumferential direction is
regarded as a landmass and not acquired or tracked. Echoes smaller than
800 m are regarded as targets to be tracked.

3-1
3. ARP OPERATION

3.2 Controls for ARP

Keyboard
The ARP uses the keys shown below.

BRILL A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN

OFF ON OFF ON

1 2 3
EBL HL EBL VRM
OFF OFFSET MODE

4 5 6
F1 F2 OFF CU/TM INDEX MENU ACQ
CENTER RESET LINE

F3 F4
7
VECTOR
8
VECTOR
9
TARGET
+ TARGET
DATA
TIME MODE LIST
RANGE
ALARM STBY 0 ENTER TARGET
CANCEL
ACK TX TRAILS BRILL MARK
- CANCEL

ACQ: Manually acquires a target.

TARGET DATA: Displays data on ARP target
chosen with the trackball.
TARGET CANCEL: Terminates tracking of ARP
target chosen with the trackball.

Control unit RCU-014

Trackball
With the cursor inside the effective display area, you can access ARP functions
by rolling the wheel or choosing appropriate ARP function from the CURSOR
menu.

Roll the wheel to show the following indications in the guidance box to access
respective ARP function:

ARP TARGET DATA & ACQ: Manually acquires a target, or displays data of the
cursor-selected ARP target.
TARGET CANCEL: Cancels tracking on cursor-selected ARP target.

3-2
 3. ARP OPERATION

3.3 Activating, Deactivating ARP

To activate or deactivate the ARP:

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the ARP ACQ MODE box at the right
side of the display. (Note that “ATA” replaces “ARPA” when the ATA feature is
used.)

ARPA AUTO
MAN

ARPA ACQ MODE box

2. Push the left button to show OFF, MAN, AUTO or AUTO MAN as appropriate.

3.4 Entering Own Ship's Speed

The ARP requires own ship's speed and heading data. The speed can be STW,
BT, SOG or echo-referenced speed (based on 3 max. stationary objects).
Manual input is also possible.

For automatic or manual input, see paragraph 1.13. For echo-referenced speed
input follow the procedure below.

3.4.1 Echo-referenced speed input

The use of echo-referenced speed is recommended when:
• The speed log is not operating properly or not connected to the radar.
• The vessel has no device which can measure ship's leeward movement
(Doppler sonar, speed log, etc.) when leeward movement can not be
disregarded.
If you select echo-referenced speed, the ARP calculates own ship's speed
relative to a fixed reference target. The number of targets may be 1, 2 or 3. They
appear as tracked targets, each shown in a small circle. When a plural of objects
are selected, the mean value is used for stabilization and speed.

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display
“REF MARK / EXIT” in the guidance box.
2. Select a small fixed island or any radar prominent point located at 0.2 to 24
nm from own ship.

3-3
3. ARP OPERATION

3. Push the left button to enter the reference mark. (The mark may also be
entered by pressing the [ACQ] key on the full keyboard.)
The reference target mark (see below) appears at the cursor position and
the own ship position data label changes from “LOG,” “NAV” or “MANUAL” to
“REF.” Note that it takes 60 scans or approximately 1 min before a new
speed is displayed. If tracking has failed for a reference target, the target is
marked with a lost target mark (symbol formed with two triangles).

changes to in 60 seconds.
R1 R1

Reference target
4. Repeat steps 2-3 to continue entering reference marks. Three may be
entered.

Notes on speed input by reference target

• When the reference target is lost or goes out of the acquisition range, the
reference target mark blinks and the speed reads “*.*” Select a different
reference target in this case.
• When all targets are deleted, the reference target mark is also deleted and the
target-based speed becomes invalid. The speed is indicated as KTBT where
BT means Bottom Track (speed over ground).
• Reference targets may be marked with a vector. This can be done with 3 REF
TARGET VECTOR on the ARP TARGET menu.

Canceling echo-referenced speed input

Open the SPD menu, referring to paragraph 1.13, and set 1 SHIP SPEED to
LOG, NAV or MANUAL as appropriate.

3-4
 3. ARP OPERATION

3.5 Automatic Acquisition

The FAR-2xx7 radars can acquire a maximum of 100 targets, the number of
automatically and manually acquired targets determined by the ARP TGT menu
setting.

ARP TGT menu setting and target acquisition condition

Menu Setting Acquisition condition

MANUAL100 100 targets manually
AUTO25 25 targets automatically, 75 targets manually
AUTO50 50 targets automatically, 50 targets manually
AUTO75 75 targets automatically, 25 targets manually
AUTO100 100 targets automatically

A target just acquired automatically is marked with a broken square and a vector
appears within 20 scans (3 s for HSC) of the antenna to indicate the target's
motion trend. Within 60 scans (20 scans for HSC), the initial tracking stage is
finished and the target becomes ready for stable tracking. At this point, the
broken square mark changes to a solid circle. (Targets automatically acquired
are distinguished from those acquired manually. The targets which are acquired
manually are displayed by bold symbol.)

3.5.1 Enabling auto acquisition

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the ARP ACQ MODE box at the right
side of the screen and then push the right button to show the ARP TARGET
menu.

[ARP TARGET MENU]

1 ARP SELECT
MANUAL100/
AUTO 25/
AUTO 50/
AUTO 75/
AUTO 100
2 ALL CANCEL
3 REF TARGET VECTOR
OFF/ON

ARP TARGET menu

2. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ARP SELECT and then push the wheel or the left
button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose automatic acquisition condition desired, referring to
the table above for details, and then push the wheel or the left button.
4. Push the right button to close the menu.
Note 1: The ARP ACQ MODE box shows AUTO when the automatic acquisition
condition is selected.
Note 2: When the menu-set number of automatically acquired targets is
reached, the message “TARGET-FULL (AUTO)” is displayed at the
right-hand side of screen.

3-5
3. ARP OPERATION

3.5.2 Terminating tracking of targets (including reference targets)

When the ARP has acquired the menu-set number of targets automatically, the
message “TARGET-FULL(AUTO)” appears at the right side of the screen and no
more auto acquisition occurs unless targets are lost. Should this happen, cancel
tracking of less important targets or perform manual acquisition.

Canceling individual targets

By keyboard:
1. Roll the trackball to place the cursor (+) on the ARP target, reference target
or lost target you wish to cancel tracking.
2. Press the [TARGET CANCEL] key.

By trackball:
1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to show
TARGET CANCEL / EXIT in the guidance box.
2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor (+) on the ARP target, reference target
or lost target you wish to cancel tracking.
3. Push the left button or the wheel to cancel tracking on the target selected.
4. To finish, push the right button.

Canceling tracking on all targets

1. Roll the trackball to choose the ARP ACQ MODE box at the right side of the
screen and then push the right button.

[ARP TARGET MENU]

1 ARP SELECT
MANUAL100/
AUTO 25/
AUTO 50/
AUTO 75/
AUTO 100
2 ALL CANCEL
3 REF TARGET VECTOR
OFF/ON

ARP TARGET menu

2. Use the wheel to choose 2 ALL CANCEL.
3. Push the wheel or the left button to cancel tracking on all ARP targets.

3-6
 3. ARP OPERATION

3.6 Manual Acquisition

Maximum 100 targets may be acquired manually depending on the acquisition
condition set on the ARP TGT menu.

3.6.1 Setting manual acquisition conditions

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the ARP ACQ MODE box at the right
side of the screen and then push the right button to show the ARP TARGET
menu.
[ARP TARGET MENU]

1 ARP SELECT
MANUAL100/
AUTO 25/
AUTO 50/
AUTO 75/
AUTO 100
2 ALL CANCEL
3 REF TARGET VECTOR

ARP TARGET menu

2. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ARP SELECT and then push the wheel.
3. Roll the wheel to choose MANUAL 100, AUTO 25, AUTO 50 or AUTO 75 as
appropriate and then push the wheel or the left button. For details see the
table on page 3-5.
4. Push the right button to close the menu.

3.6.2 Manually acquiring a target

By keyboard
1. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the target you want to acquire.
2. Press the [ACQ] key.

By trackball
1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to show “ARP
TARGET DATA & ACQ” in the guidance box.
2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the target you want to acquire.
3. Push the left button to acquire the target.

3-7
3. ARP OPERATION

The plotting symbol is drawn by broken lines during the initial acquisition stage.
A vector appears in about one minute after acquisition indicating the target's
motion trend. If the target is consistently detected for three minutes, the plotting
symbol changes to a solid circle. If acquisition fails, the target plotting symbol
blinks and disappears shortly.

ARP
Meaning
Symbol
Immediately after acquisition, this plotting symbol is shown in
broken lines.
Within 20 scans (3 s for HSC with antenna running at 42 rpm)) of
the antenna after acquisition, a vector appears to show a trend of
movement.
Within 60 scans (20 scans for HSC with antenna speed of 42 rpm)
of the antenna after acquisition, the plotting symbol changes to a
small circle, indicating steady-state tracking condition.

Note 1: For successful acquisition, the target to be acquired should be within 0.2
to 32 nm from own ship and not obscured by sea or rain clutter.
Note 2: When the capacity for manual acquisition is reached, the message
“TARGET-FULL(MAN)” is displayed at the screen bottom. Cancel
tracking of non-threatening targets if you wish to acquire additional
targets manually.
Note 3: Target number is normally not shown. On the A, B, C and W type radars
it appears when the cursor is placed on an ARP symbol.

CAUTION
Target Swap

When a target being tracked nears another

target being tracked, the targets may be
"swapped". When two targets acquired
either automatically or manually come close
to each other, one of the two may become
a Lost Target. Should this happen, manual
re-acquisition of the Lost Target may be
required after the two have separated.

3-8
 3. ARP OPERATION

3.7 ARP Symbols and ARP Symbol Attributes

3.7.1 ARP symbols
The symbols used in this equipment comply with IEC 60872-1.
Item Symbol Status Remarks
Automatically Initial stage Broken square around an echo to indicate
acquired targets the target under acquisition and initial
stage of tracking, before steady-state
tracking.
Between 20 and 60 scans of the antenna
after acquisition (vector still unreliable)
Steady tracking Solid circle with vector indicating steady
state tracking (60 scans after acquisition)
CPA alarm Plotting symbol changes to an equilateral
(flashing) triangle, flashing to indicate the target is
predicted to come into CPA or TCPA.
CPA alarm Flashing stops after CPA/TCPA alarm is
acknowledge acknowledged.
Lost target Lost target is indicated by flashing
(flashing) diamond symbol. The diamond is formed
from two equal triangles. Flashing stops
after lost target alarm is acknowledged.
Manually Initial stage Plotting symbol selected for a target
acquired targets acquired manually is shown in bold broken
lines.
Bold broken square for 20 - 60 scans (3
scans for HSC) of the antenna after
acquisition
Steady tracking Manual plotting symbol in a bold solid
circle (60 scans after acquisition)
CPA alarm Plotting symbol changes to an equilateral
(flashing) (collision course) triangle flashing if a target is predicted to
come into the preset CPA or TCPA.
Flashing stops after CPA/TCPA alarm is
acknowledged.
Lost target Lost target is indicated by flashing
(flashing) diamond symbol. The diamond is formed
from two equal triangles. Flashing stops
after lost target alarm is acknowledged.
Guard zone On target passing Plotting symbol changes to an equilateral
through operator-set triangle, apex down, flashing together with
(flashing) guard zone vector if target enters guard zone.
Target selected On selected target Target data (range, bearing, course,
for data readout 01 speed, CPA and TCPA)
Reference target R On reference target Used to calculate own ship’s
In 60 scans, over-the-ground speed (echo-referenced
changes to speed) for ground stabilization.
○R

3-9
3. ARP OPERATION

Other ARP symbols

Item Symbol Status Remarks
Trial maneuver T Bottom center Appears during execution of a trial
maneuver.
(flashing)

Performance XX Bottom center Appears during performance test.

test (flashing)

3.7.2 Choosing ARP symbol (B, C and W types)

In addition to the “standard” circle ARP symbol you may choose from the
symbols shown below.

1. Place the cursor on the ARP symbol you want to change.

2. Press the [TARGET DATA] key on the keyboard or display TARGET DATA &
ACQ in the guidance box and push the wheel.
3. Press the [TARGET DATA] key on the keyboard or the wheel consecutively
until desired symbol is displayed.
Note: Symbol cannot be chosen on W-type by using the trackball.

3.7.3 ARP symbol brilliance

1. Roll the trackball to choose the BRILL box at the left side of the screen and
then push the right button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left button.
[BRILL1 MENU (2/2)]

1 BACK
2 BRG CURSOR
3 EBL
4 VRM
5 INDEX LINE
6 ARP SYMBOL
7 AIS SYMBOL
8 L/L GRID
9 MARK
0 CHART

BRILL menu, page 2

3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 ARP SYMBOL and then push the wheel or the left
button.
4. Roll the wheel to adjust brilliance.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

3-10
 3. ARP OPERATION

3.7.4 ARP symbol color and size

You may choose the color and size of the ARP symbol as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARP•AIS and then push the wheel or the left
button.

[ARP•AIS]

1 BACK
2 GUARD ZONE STAB
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
3 GUARD POLYGON
OFF/STAB GND/
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]
5 [ARP SYMBOL]
6 [AIS SYMBOL]
7 [FUSION]
8 AIS FUNCTION
OFF/ON
9 AIS LOST ALARM
ACTIVATED TARGET/
ALL TARGET/
RANGE
0nm

ARP•AIS menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 5 [ARP SYMBOL] and then push the wheel or the
left button.
[ARP SYMBOL]

1 BACK
2 ARP SYMBOL COLOR
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
3 ARP SYMBOL SIZE
SMALL/STD/LARGE
4 PAST POSN COLOR
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
5 PAST POSN POINTS
5/10

ARP SYMBOL menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 ARP SYMBOL COLOR and then push the wheel.
5. Roll the wheel to choose color desired and then push the wheel.
6. Roll the wheel to choose 3 ARP SYMBOL SIZE and then push the wheel.
7. Roll the wheel to choose SMALL, STD(Standard) or LARGE as appropriate
and then push the wheel .
8. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

3-11
3. ARP OPERATION

3.7.5 Auto target track (A, B, C and W types)

You may “reuse” ARP target numbers 1-15 when an ARP target having one of
those target numbers becomes a lost target.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left
button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 0 AUTO TARGET TRACK and the push the wheel
or left button.
4. Choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel.
5. Push the right button several times to close the menu.

3-12
 3. ARP OPERATION

3.8 Displaying Target Data

The ARP mode provides the full functionality of ARP as required by the IMO
Resolution A.823(19) and IEC 60972-1, including display of range, bearing,
course, speed, CPA and TCPA of all plotted targets.

In head-up and head-up true bearing modes, target bearing, course and speed
shown in the upper-right target data field become true (suffix “T”) or relative
(suffix “R”) to own ship in accordance with the true/relative vector setting. In
north-up, course-up and true motion modes, the target data field always displays
true bearing, true course and speed over the ground.

3.8.1 Displaying individual target data

By keyboard
Roll the trackball to place the cursor on a desired ARP target and press the
[TARGET DATA] key. The target’s shape changes to a square. To erase a
target’s data from the data box, press the key again.

By trackball
1. With cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to show “TARGET
DATA & ACQ / CURSOR MENU” in the guidance box.
2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on a desired ARP target and then push
the left button.
3. To erase a target’s data from the data box, choose the target on the radar
display and then push the left button.

Target data display is as below.

RNG/BRG: Range and bearing from own ship to the selected target with suffix
“T” (True) or “R” (Relative).

COG/SOG (in case of GPS): Course and speed are displayed for the selected
target with suffix “T” (True) or “R” (relative). For manual speed input, CSE/STW
are shown.

CPA/TCPA: CPA (Closest Point of Approach) is the closest range a target will
approach to own ship. TCPA is the time to CPA. Both CPA and TCPA are
automatically calculated. When the CPA has passed clear of own ship, it is
indicated by a TCPA with a negative (-) sign. TCPA is counted to 99.9 min and
beyond this, it is indicate as TCPA> -99.9MIN.

BCR/BCT: BCR is the closest range at which the chosen target is predicted to
cross your ship’s bow. BCT is the time at which the chosen target is predicted to
cross your ship’s bow.

3-13
3. ARP OPERATION

Target in guard zone

Target selected for data readout
Target on collision course

350 000 010

340 020
330 030
320 040
310 050
01
300 060

290 070
ARP TARGET
280 080 No. 01
BRG 25.5°T
270 090 RNG 3.4NM
T COG 205.1°T*
260 100 T SOG 12.3KT*
CPA 2.9NM
250 110 TCPA 12.2MIN
BCR 1.7NM
240 120 BCT 20MIN
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170

* CSE and STW are shown BRG: Bearing from own ship to target
in case of manual input. in R (Relative) or T (True)
RNG: Range from own ship to target
COG: Course of target over ground, True or Relative*
SOG: Speed of target over ground*
CPA: Closest Point of Approach of target to own ship
TCPA: Time to CPA
BCR: Bow crossing range of target
BCT: Bow crossing time of target

ARP target display

You may display the target data for two targets per data box and the data for as
many as six targets may be displayed. For further details, see paragraph 1.41.

3-14
 3. ARP OPERATION

3.8.2 Target list

The target list provides a comprehensive data display of all ARP (and AIS)
targets being tracked.

Displaying the target list

To display the target list, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the TARGET LIST box at the right side of the
screen.
TARGET
LIST

TARGET LIST box

2. Push the left button to display the TARGET LIST. “>” in the TCPA means that
the time is greater than 99:59.

[TARGET LIST (1/1)]

SORT BY CPA

1 BACK
2 ARP TARGET
No: 01
BRG 16.5°T RNG 2.05 NM
CPA 0.17NM TCPA>99.59M
3 ARP TARGET
No: 02
BRG 19.0°T RNG 2.49 NM
CPA 0.29NM TCPA>99.59M

9 REFRESH DATA

Target list
3. To scroll the list when there are more than three targets, select 0 NEXT and
then push the wheel or the left button.
Note: To refresh data, choose 9 REFRESH DATA and then push the wheel.
This is not necessary when the sorting method is changed (see next
page); data is automatically updated whenever the sorting method is
changed.
4. Push the right button to close the list.

3-15
3. ARP OPERATION

Sorting the target list

You may sort the target list by CPA, TCPA, BCR, BCT, RANGE or SPEED as
follows: 72 nm or 96 nm range scale

1. Roll the trackball to choose the TARGET LIST box at the right side of the
screen.
2. Push the right button to open the TARGET LIST menu.

[TARGET LIST MENU]

1 SORT BY
CPA/TCPA/BCR/BCT/
RANGE/SPEED

TARGET LIST menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 1 SORT BY and then push the wheel or the left
button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose sorting method desired and then push the wheel or
the left button.
5. Push the right button to close the menu.

3-16
 3. ARP OPERATION

3.9 Vector Modes

Target vectors can be displayed relative to own ship's heading (Relative) or north
(True).

3.9.1 Description of vectors

Ground stabilization and sea stabilization
Target vectors can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized. Sea stabilization is a
mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the sea using a compass
heading and single axis log water speed inputs in the True Motion mode. Ground
stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the
ground using the ground track or set and drift inputs. If the accuracy seems
unsatisfactory, enter the set and drift correction. Note that set and drift should
not be used when the radar is displaying AIS targets.

True vector
In the true motion mode, all fixed targets such as land, navigational marks and
ships at anchor remain stationary on the radar screen with vector length zero.
But in the presence of wind and/or current, vectors appear on fixed targets
representing the reciprocal of set and drift affecting own ship unless set and drift
values are properly entered.

Buoy Buoy
Target on Target on
collision collision Own ship
course Own ship course

True vectors in Relative vectors in

head-up mode head-up mode

True and relative vectors

Relative vector
Relative vectors on targets which are not moving over the ground such as land,
navigational marks and ships at anchor will represent the reciprocal of own
ship’s ground track. A target of which vector extension passes through own ship
is on the collision course. (Dotted lines in the figure are for explanation only.)

3-17
3. ARP OPERATION

3.9.2 Vector motion and length

Vectors may be displayed in true or relative motion. Vector time (or the length of
vectors) can be set to 30 seconds, 1-15 minutes (in one-minute interval) and
20-60 minutes (in 10-minutes interval).

By keyboard
1. Press the [VECTOR MODE] key consecutively to choose relative or true
vector mode. Your selection is shown on the vector motion box. (Note that
this also selects the vector mode for the past position display.)
2. Press the [VECTOR TIME] key consecutively to choose vector time. Your
selection appears in the vector time box (see illustration below).

By trackball
1. Roll the trackball to choose VECTOR TRUE or VECTOR REL (whichever is
displayed) at the right side of the screen.

Vector motion

VECTOR TRUE 15MIN

Vector
time

ARP VECTOR boxes

2. Push the left button to display VECTOR TRUE or VECTOR REL as
appropriate. (Note that this also selects the vector mode for the past position
display.)
3. Do one of the following to select a vector time.
Control Available setting
Left button 30 sec, 1-15 min (1 min interval), 20 min, 30 min, 40 min,
50 min, 60 min
Wheel 30 sec, 1-60 min (1 min interval)
4. Push the left button to display time desired.

The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected vector
time elapses. It can be valuable to extend the vector length to evaluate the risk
of collision with any target.

3-18
 3. ARP OPERATION

3.10 Past Position Display

The ARP displays equally time-spaced dots marking the past positions of any
targets being tracked.

A new dot is added every minute (or at other preset time intervals) until the
preset number is reached. If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be
uneven. If it changes the course, its plotted course will not be a straight line.

(a) Ship turning (b) Ship running (c) Ship reduced (d) Ship increased
straight speed speed

Past position display

3.10.1 Displaying and erasing past position points, choosing past

position plot interval
1. Roll the trackball to choose the PAST POSN box at the right side of the
screen.
PAST POSN REL 2MIN

PAST POSN box

2. Push the left button to choose plot interval desired: OFF, 30 seconds, 1, 2, 3
or 6 minutes. Choose OFF to erase all past position points and deactivate
the past position display.

3-19
3. ARP OPERATION

3.10.2 Past position display attributes

You may choose the number of past point points to display per plotting interval
and the color of past position points.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARP•AIS and then push the wheel or the left
button.
[ARP•AIS]

1 BACK
2 GUARD ZONE STAB
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
3 GUARD POLYGON
OFF/STAB GND/
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]
5 [ARP SYMBOL]
6 [AIS SYMBOL]
7 [FUSION]
8 AIS FUNCTION
OFF/ON
9 AIS LOST ALARM
ACTIVATED TARGET/
ALLTARGET/
RANGE
0nm

ARP•AIS menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 5 [ARP SYMBOL] and then push the wheel or the
left button.
[ARP SYMBOL]

1 BACK
2 ARP SYMBOL COLOR
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
3 ARP SYMBOL SIZE
SMALL/STD/LARGE
4 PAST POSN COLOR
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
5 PAST POSN POINTS
5/10

ARP SYMBOL menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 4 PAST POSN COLOR and then push the wheel.
5. Roll the wheel to choose color desired and then push the wheel.
6. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PAST POSN POINTS and then push the wheel.
7. Roll the wheel to choose 5 or 10 as appropriate and then push the wheel.
8. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

3-20
 3. ARP OPERATION

3.11 Set and Drift

Set, the direction in which a water current flows, can be manually entered in
0.1-degree steps. Drift, in another word Rate, the speed of tide, can also be
entered manually in 0.1 knot steps.

Set and drift corrections are beneficial for increasing the accuracy of vectors and
target data. Refer to the tide table on board the ship for setting information.
These values are applied to all targets. If stationary targets have vectors, set and
drift values should be adjusted until they lose vectors.

To enter set and drift do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the SPD box and then push the right button.
[SPEED MENU]

1 SHIP SPEED
LOG(BT)/LOG(WT)/
GPS/MANUAL/REF
2 MANUAL SPEED
0.0kt
3 SET DRIFT
OFF/ON

SPEED menu
2. Roll the wheel to choose 3 SET DRIFT and then push the wheel or the left
button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose ON and then push the wheel or the left button.
4. Push the right button to close the menu. Then, the SET and DRIFT boxes
appear at upper right-hand side of the display.
5. Roll the trackball to choose the SET box at the right side of the screen.
SET 66.8°T
SET box
6. Use the wheel to set value, rolling it to choose numeral and pushing it to set.
(Setting range: 000.0 – 359.9 (°T))
7. Roll the trackball to choose the DRIFT box at the right side of the screen.
DRIFT 7.2kt

DRIFT box
8. Use the wheel to set value, rolling it to choose numeral and pushing it to set.
(Setting range: 00.0 – 19.9(kt))

Note 1: Set and drift are available when using water tracking log. The speed
source is shown as WTC in this case.
Note 2: Set and drift should be checked periodically for correctness.

3-21
3. ARP OPERATION

3.12 Setting CPA/TCPA Alarm Ranges

The ARP continuously monitors the
predicted range at the Closest Point of
CAUTION
Approach (CPA) and predicted time to CPA CPA/TCPA Alarm
(TCPA) of each tracked target to own ship. The CPA and TCPA alarm feature should
never be relied upon as the sole means for
When the predicted CPA of any target detecting the risk of collision.The navigator
becomes smaller than a preset CPA alarm is not relieved of the responsibility to keep
range and its predicted TCPA less than a visual lookout for avoiding collisions,
whether or not the radar or other plotting
preset TCPA alarm limit, the ARP releases aid is in use.
an audible alarm and displays the warning
label COLLISION on the screen. In addition, the ARP symbol changes to a
triangle and flashes together with its vector.

Provided that this feature is used correctly, it will help prevent the risk of collision
by alerting you to threatening targets. It is important that GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C
RAIN and other radar controls are properly adjusted.

CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the
size, tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.

Note: The reference point for CPA/TCPA calculation may be chosen from
antenna position or conning position. For further details, see paragraph
1.50.

3.12.1 Setting CPA/TCPA alarm ranges

To set the CPA/TCPA alarm ranges, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the CPA LIMIT box. If only “CPA LIMIT OFF”
appears press the left button to show the CPA and TCPA boxes.
CPA LIMIT Box CPA Box

CPA LIMIT 0.5NM 10MIN TCPA Box

CPA LIMIT, CPA and TCPA boxes
2. Push the left button or roll the wheel to choose the CPA box and then push
the wheel.
Left button: 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6(nm)
Wheel: 0.5 - 20(nm), 0-10 nm in 0.1 nm increments, 1.0 nm increments
thereafter
3. Roll the trackball to choose the TCPA box.
4. Push the left button or roll the wheel to choose TCPA value desired and then
push the wheel.
Left button: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12, 15(minutes)
Wheel: 1-60 minutes, 1 minutes increments

3-22
 3. ARP OPERATION

3.12.2 Acknowledging CPA/TCPA alarm

To acknowledge and silence the CPA/TCPA alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key
on the keyboard, or choose the ALARM ACK box with the trackball and then
push the left button.

The warning label COLLISION and the flashing of the triangle plotting symbol
and vector remain on the screen until the dangerous situation is gone or you
intentionally terminate tracking of the target.

Note that when the COLLISION alarm is generated the AIS display is
automatically turned on.

3-23
3. ARP OPERATION

3.13 Setting a Guard Zone

When a target transits the operator-set guard zone, the buzzer sounds and the
indication GUARD appears (in red) at the screen bottom. The target causing the
warning is clearly indicated with an inverted flashing triangle. The guard zone
also functions as an automatic acquisition area when automatic acquisition is
active. Any targets entering the zone will be automatically acquired.

3.13.1 Activating the guard zone

One or two guard zones may be selected. The No. 1 guard zone is available
between 3 and 6 nm and No. 2 guard zone can be set anywhere when the No. 1
zone is already in use. The ARP/AIS guard zone’s lines are white and dashed so
as to distinguish them from the radar guard alarm.

The procedure below shows how to set a guard zone, using the example at the
bottom of the page.

1. Roll the trackball to choose one of the GZ (GUARD ZONE) boxes at the right
side of the screen.
GZ 1
Guard zone status
GZ 2 Blank: GZ off
SET: Set guard zone
WORK: Guard zone active
SLEEP: Guard zone "asleep"

GZ boxes
2. Push the left button. The GZ box now reads “GZx SET.”
3. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on point A and then push the left button.
4. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on point B and then push the left button.
The GZ box now reads “GZx WORK.”

A
0.5-1 nm
B

Target in guard zone is

marked by inverted
flashing triangle.

Guard zone
If you are setting a polygon guard zone with GZ2, set at least three points. Press
the right button to finish. Note that the status indication should be WORK or
SLEEP to set GZ2.

3-24
 3. ARP OPERATION

When an ARP or AIS target violates the guard zone, the message “GUARD”
appears (in red) at the right side of the display and the offending target is
marked with an inverted triangle. Further, the AIS display is automatically turned
on.

Note 1: If you wish to create a guard zone having a 360-degree coverage

around own ship, set point B in almost the same direction (approx. ±3°)
as point A and then push the left button.
Note 2: If the range scale is changed to less than half of the guard zone, the GZ
box reads “GZx OUT.” If the left button is pushed in this state, the guard
alarm zone goes into “sleep” state and the guidance box reads “GZ
WORK L = DELETE.”
Note 3: The default guard zone is fan shaped. It may also be a polygon having
3-10 points. For details, see paragraph 3.13.5.
Note 4: Two more alarm zones (No. 1 and No. 2 Guard Alarm Zones) may be
added in addition. This means a maximum 4 alarm zones are available
at a time. ARP symbols are not changed to inverted triangles in the
guard alarm zone, only those in guard zone do so.

3.13.2 Sleeping, deactivating a guard zone

1. Roll the trackball to choose the appropriate GZ box.
2. Sleep or deactivate the guard zone as appropriate:
Sleep guard zone: Push the left button momentarily to remove the guard
zone from the screen. The indication in the GZ box changes from “GZx
WORK” to “GZx SLEEP.” To reactivate and display the guard zone, repeat
this procedure to display “GZx WORK.”
Deactivate guard zone: Push and hold down the left button until the GZ box
goes blank.

3.13.3 Acknowledging the guard zone alarm

To acknowledge and silence the guard zone audible alarm, press the [ALARM
ACK] key, or choose the ALARM ACK box and then push the left button.

3-25
3. ARP OPERATION

3.13.4 Guard zone reference

The guard zone may be referenced to ground, heading or North as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARP•AIS and then push the wheel or the left
button.
[ARP•AIS]

1 BACK
2 GUARD ZONE STAB
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
3 GUARD POLYGON
OFF/STAB GND/
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]
5 [ARP SYMBOL]
6 [AIS SYMBOL]
7 [FUSION]
8 AIS FUNCTION
OFF/ON
9 AIS LOST ALARM
ACTIVATED TARGET/
ALLTARGET/
RANGE
0nm

ARP•AIS menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 GUARD ZONE STAB and then push the wheel or
the left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose STAB HDG or STAB NORTH as appropriate and
then the push the wheel or the left button.
5. Push the right button twice to close menu.

3.13.5 Guard zone shape and stabilization

The shape of the No. 2 guard zone may be a sector or a polygon having up to
10 points. (The shape of the No.1 guard zone is always a sector.)

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARP•AIS and then push the wheel or the left
button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 3 GUARD POLYGON and then push the wheel or
the left button.

3-26
 3. ARP OPERATION

4. Roll the wheel to choose OFF, STAB GND, STAB HDG or STAB NORTH as
appropriate and then the push the wheel or the left button.
OFF: Guard zone is a sector; number of points limited to four.
STAB GND: Guard zone stabilized against ground; guard zone may be a
polygon having 3-10 points.
STAB HDG: Guard zone stabilized against heading; guard zone may be
a polygon having 3-10 points.
STAB NORTH: Guard zone stabilized against north; guard zone may be a
polygon having 3-10 points.
5. Push the right button twice to close menu.

3.14 Operational Warnings

There are six main situations which cause the ARP to trigger visual and audible
alarms:

• Collision alarm
• Guard zone alarm
• Lost target alarm
• Target full alarm for manual acquisition
• Target full alarm for automatic acquisition
• System failure

Collision (CPA/TCPA) alarm

Visual (COLLISION) and audible alarms are generated a target falls with a
preset limits. To acknowledge the audible alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key, or
choose the ALARM ACK box and then push the left button.

Guard zone alarm

Visual (“GUARD”) and audible alarms are generated when a target transits the
operator-set guard zone. To acknowledge and silence the guard alarm, press the
[ALARM ACK] key, or choose the ALARM ACK box and then push the left button.

Lost target alarm

When the system detects a loss of a tracked target, the target symbol becomes
a flashing diamond ( ) and the label “LOST” appears at the screen bottom. At
the same time, an audible alarm is produced for one second.

To acknowledge and silence the lost target audible alarm, press the [ALARM
ACK] key, or choose the ALARM ACK box and then push the left button. Then,
the lost target mark disappears.

3-27
3. ARP OPERATION

Target full alarm

When the memory becomes full, the memory full status is indicated by
“TARGET-FULL(AUTO+MAN)” and the relevant indication appears on the
screen and a short beep sounds.

Manually acquired targets

The indication “TARGET-FULL(MAN)” appears at the screen bottom and a short
beep tone sounds when the capacity for manually acquired targets, as set on the
menu, is reached.

Automatically acquired targets

The indication “TARGET-FULL(AUTO)” appears at the screen bottom and a
short beep sounds when the capacity for automatically acquired targets, as set
on the menu, is reached.

System failure alarm

When the SPU Board receives no signal input from the radar or external
equipment, the screen shows both “ARP SYSTEM ERROR” associated with an
indication denoting offending equipment, also releasing an audible alarm. The
missing signals are denoted as shown below.

Missing Signal Indication

* Speed log signal LOG
* Heading signal, Gyrocompass GYRO
Trigger signal from radar TRIGGER
Video from radar VIDEO
* Bearing signal from radar antenna AZIMUTH
* Heading pulses from radar antenna HEADLINE

* The alarm is available with or without ARP.

3-28
 3. ARP OPERATION

3.15 Trial Maneuver

The trial maneuver feature simulates the effect on all tracked targets against
own ship's maneuver without interrupting the updating of target information. It is
available for use with the ARPA function; it is inoperative on the ATA.

3.15.1 Types of trial maneuvers

There are two types of trial maneuvers: static and dynamic.

Dynamic trial maneuver

A dynamic trial maneuver displays predicted positions of the tracked targets and
own ship. You enter own ship's intended speed and course with a certain “delay
time.” Assuming that all tracked targets maintain their present speeds and
courses, the targets' and own ship's future movements are simulated in
one-second increments indicating their predicted positions in one-minute
intervals as illustrated below.

The delay time represents the time lag from the present time to the time when
own ship will actually start to change her speed and/or course. You should
therefore take into consideration own ship's maneuvering characteristics such as
rudder delay, turning delay and acceleration delay. This is particularly important
on large vessels. How much the delay is set the situation starts immediately and
ends in a minute.

In the example shown below, own ship will advance straight ahead (even after a
maneuver) for a delay time of 5 minutes and then alters speed and course until
operator-specified intended speed and course are achieved (position OS7 in this
example).

Delay time = 5 min.

Present own
ship position

Dynamic trial maneuver

Note that once a dynamic trial maneuver is initiated, you cannot alter own ship's
trial speed, course or delay time until the trial maneuver is terminated.

3-29
3. ARP OPERATION

Static trial maneuver

A static trial maneuver displays only the final situation of the simulation. If you
enter the same trial speed, course and delay time under the same situation as in
the aforementioned example of dynamic trial maneuver, the screen will instantly
show position OS7 for own ship, position A7 for target A and position B7 for
target B, omitting the intermediate positions. Thus, the static trial maneuver will
be convenient when you wish to know the maneuver result immediately.

Note: For accurate simulation of ship movements in a trial maneuver, own ship's
characteristics such as acceleration and turning performance should be
properly set in initial settings during the installation.

3.15.2 Performing a trial maneuver

To perform a trial maneuver, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARP•AIS and then push the wheel or the left
button.

[ARP•AIS]

1 BACK
2 GUARD ZONE STAB
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
4 GUARD POLYGON
OFF/STAB GND/
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]
5 [ARP SYMBOL]
6 [AIS SYMBOL]
7 [FUSION]
8 AIS FUNCTION
OFF/ON
9 AIS LOST ALARM
ACTIVATED TARGET/
ALL TARGET/
RANGE
0nm

ARP•AIS menu

3-30
 3. ARP OPERATION

3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 TRIAL MANEUVER and then push the wheel or
the left button.

[TRIAL MANEUVER]

1 BACK
2 TRIAL
OFF/STATIC/DYNAMIC
3 TRIAL SPEED RATE
0kt 0.00kt/s
0kt 0.00kt/s
4 TRIAL TURN RATE
0kt 0.0°/s
0kt 0.0°/s

TRIAL MANEUVER menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 TRIAL and then push the left button or the wheel.
5. Roll the wheel to choose STATIC or DYNAMIC as appropriate and then push
the wheel or the left button.
6. Roll the wheel to choose 3 TRIAL SPEED RATE. Set trial speed rate with the
wheel: Roll the wheel to choose numeral; push the wheel to set.
7. Roll the wheel to choose 4 TRIAL TURN RATE. Set trial turn rate with the
wheel: Roll the wheel to choose numeral; push the wheel to set.
Note: Two sets of trial speed and trial turn rate combinations are provided.
Enter the data by sets as shown in the figure below. This is done to
provide accurate trial maneuver results for various ship’s speed.

3 TRIAL SPEED RATE

Set 1 0kt 0.00kt/s
Set 2 0kt 0.00kt/s
4 TRIAL TURN RATE
Set 1 0kt 0.0°/s
Set 2 0kt 0.0°/s

8. Push the right button three times to close the menu. Then, the TRIAL box
appears at the right side of the display.
TRIAL OFF

TRIAL box
9. Roll the trackball to choose the TRIAL box and then push the wheel or the
left button to display TRIAL SET. Then, the TRIAL box reads TRIAL SET and
boxes appear above the TRIAL box as below.
Speed for trial maneuver 06.5kt 86.8°T Course for trial maneuver
Delay time for trial maneuver DELAY 00:30
Trial maneuver status TRIAL SET

Boxes for setting trial maneuver parameters

10. Use the wheel to set delay time at DELAY. This is the time after which own
ship takes a new situation, not the time the simulation begins. Change the
delay time according to own ship loading condition, etc. Roll the wheel to
choose location; push the wheel to set.

3-31
3. ARP OPERATION

11. Roll the wheel to choose the course setting box. Use the wheel to set the
course: Roll the wheel to choose location; push the wheel to set.
12. Roll the wheel to choose the speed setting box. Use the wheel to set the
speed: Roll the wheel to choose location; push the wheel to set.
13. Roll the wheel to choose TRIAL SET. Push the left button or the wheel to
show TRIAL WORK.
The trial maneuver takes place for three minutes with the letter “T” displayed
at the bottom of the screen. If any tracked target is predicted to be on a
collision course with own ship (that is, the target ship comes within preset
CPA/TCPA limits), the target plotting symbol changes to a triangle and
flashes. If this happens, change own ship's trial speed, course or delay time
to obtain a safe maneuver. The trial maneuver is automatically terminated
and the normal radar picture is restored three minutes later.

3.15.3 Terminating a trial maneuver

A trial maneuver is automatically terminated three minutes after start. To
terminate it manually, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the TRIAL box at the right side of the screen.
2. Push and hold down the left button to show TRIAL OFF.

Note: To disable the trial maneuver function, choose OFF at step 5 in the
procedure in paragraph 3.15.2 and then push the wheel or the left button.

3-32
 3. ARP OPERATION

3.16 ARP Performance Test

A test program is provided for assessing overall performance of the ARP. Normal
operation is suspended and the indication “XX” appears at the bottom of the
effective display area during the test. The test may be terminated at any time.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 9 [CUSTOMIZE•TEST] and then push the wheel or
the left button.

[CUSTOMIZE•TEST]

1 BACK
2 [DATA BOX]
3 [F1]
4 [F2]
5 [F3]
6 [F4]
7 [OPERATION]
8 [TEST]

CUSTOMIZE•TEST menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [TEST] and then push the wheel or the left button.

[TEST]

1 BACK
2 [SELF TEST]
3 [ARP TEST]

TEST menu
4. Roll the wheel to choose 3 [ARP TEST].
[ARP TEST]

1 BACK
2 ARP TEST START

NOTE:
THE DISPLAY IS
CLEARER WHEN
RUNNING ARP TEST.

RUN ARP TEST?

YES: SELECT 2 START
NO: SELECT 1 BACK

ARP TEST menu

3-33
3. ARP OPERATION

5. Roll the wheel to choose 2 ARP TEST START and then push the wheel or
the left button to start the test.
An alert “XX” flickers during the test. It takes approximately three minutes for
all vectors to be displayed. The test does not need echo signals, gyro nor
speed log input. The operator shall set speed for 0 kt and course for 0°T.
6. Three targets having different speeds and courses, as shown in the table
below, are simulated automatically, together with current targets.
7. The test continues for five minutes and repeats.

To terminate the test, press the [STBY TX] key or choose the TX STBY box at
the bottom left corner and then push the left button.

Select any target with the cursor and check that the selected target shows the
course and speed as in the table. CPA and TCPA shown in the table are with
ship’s speed of 0 kt. Range, CPA and TCPA change with time; bearing and
speed are fixed.

Range Bearing Speed Course CPA TCPA

(nm) (°) (kt) (°) (nm) (min)
Target A 3.0 45.0 20.0 0 2.1 -6.4
Target B 2.0 120.0 5.0 120.0 0.0 -24.0
Target C 7.0 270.0 10.0 90.0 0.0 42.0

A
C
B

XX

3-34
 3. ARP OPERATION

3.17 Criteria for Selecting Targets for Tracking

The FURUNO ARP video processor detects targets in midst of noise and
discriminates radar echoes on the basis of their size. Target whose echo
measurements are greater than those of the largest ship in range or tangential
extent are usually land and are displayed only as normal radar video. All smaller
ship-sized echoes which are less than this dimension are further analyzed and
regarded as ships and displayed as small circles superimposed over the video
echo.

When a target is first displayed, it is shown as having zero true speed but
develops a course vector as more information is collected. In accordance with
the International Marine Organization Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (IMO ARP)
requirements, an indication of the motion trend should be available within 20
scans of antenna and full vector accuracy within 60 scans. The FURUNO ARPs
comply with these requirements.

Acquisition and tracking

A target which is hit by five consecutive radar pulses is detected as a radar echo.
Manual acquisition is done by designating a detected echo with the trackball.
Automatic acquisition is done in the acquisition areas when a target is detected
5-7 times continuously depending upon the congestion. Tracking is achieved
when the target is clearly distinguishable on the display for 5 out of 10
consecutive scans whether acquired automatically or manually. Required
tracking facilities are available within 0.1-32 nm on range scales including 3, 6,
12 nm, full plotting information is available within one scan when the range scale
has been changed.

Targets not detected in five consecutive scans become “lost targets.”

Quantization
The entire picture is converted to a digital from called “Quantized Video.” A
sweep range is divided into small segments and each range element is “1” if
there is radar echo return above a threshold level, or “0” if there is no return.

The digital radar signal is then analyzed by a ship-sized echo discriminator. As

the antenna scans, if there are five consecutive radar pulses with 1’s indicating
an echo presence at the exact same range, a target “start” is initiated. Since
receiver noise is random, it is not three-bang correlated, and it is filtered out and
not classified as an echo.

The same is true of radar interference. Electronic circuits track both the closet
and most distant edges of the echo. At the end of the scanning of the echo, the
discriminator indicates the measured maximum range extent and total angular
extent subtended by the echo. If the echo is larger than a ship-sized echo in
range extent and/or angular width, adjusted as a function of range, it is declared
to be a coastline and the closet edge is put into memory as a map of the area.

3-35
3. ARP OPERATION

This land outline is used to inhibit further acquisition and tracking of ship-sized
echoes beyond the closest coast outline. Five consecutive scans of coastal
outline are retained in memory to allow for signal variation. All smaller echoes
are declared to be ship sized and the middle of the leading edge is used to
provide precise range and bearing coordinates of each echo on every scan. This
range/bearing data is matched to previous data and analyzed from scan-to-scan
for consistency. When it is determined to be as consistent as a real target,
automatic acquisition occurs and tracking is initiated. Continued tracking and
subsequent calculation develop the relative course and speed of the target.

The true course and speed of own ship are computed from own ship's gyro and
speed inputs, and the resulting course and speed of each tracked target is easily
computed by vector summing of the relative motion with own ship’s course and
speed. The resulting true or relative vector is displayed for each of the tracked
targets. This process is updated continually for each target on every scan of the
radar.

Qualitative description of tracking error

The FURUNO ARP accuracy complies with or exceed IMO standards.

Own ship maneuvers

For slow turns there is no effect. For very high turning rates (greater than
150°/minute, depending on gyro), there is some influence on all tracked targets
which last for a minute or two and then all tracked targets revert to full accuracy.

Other ship maneuvers

Target ship courses, lag 15 to 30 seconds at high relative speed, or 3 to 6
seconds at low (near 0) relative speed. It is less accurate during a turn due to lag,
but accuracy recovers quickly.

3-36
 3. ARP OPERATION

3.18 Factors Affecting ARP Functions

Sea returns
If the radar anti-clutter control is adjusted properly, there is no serious effect
because distant wave clutter, not eliminated by this control, is filtered out by
more than one bang correlation and scan-to-scan matching of data.

Rain and snow

Clutter can be acquired and tracked as targets. Adjust the A/C RAIN control. If it
is heavy rain, switch to S-band if provided, or switch on the interference rejector
on the radar. If heavy clutter still exists, switch to manual acquisition. Accuracy
can be affected.

Low clouds
Usually no effect. If necessary, adjust the A/C RAIN control.

Non-synchronous emissions
No effect.

Low gain
Insufficient or low radar receiver gain will result in some targets not being
acquired at long distance. ARP display will be missing on one or more targets
that could only be visible if the radar sensitivity control (GAIN control) were
increased.

The setting of the correct radar receiver gain is not critical but the target should
be on the radar PPI and be clearly visible and well defined.

Manual acquisition is done if a target is positively displayed more than once.

Automatic acquisition is done when the target is detected 5-7 times continuously.
Tracking is achieved when the target is detected five times (not necessarily
continuously) out of 10 scans. If not detected six times out of 10 scans, the
target will become a “lost target.” The ARP will acquire a radar echo that is
present once in every six antenna scans and continue tracking if 1 in 10.

Second trace echoes

When the radar beam is super refracted, strong echoes may be received at such
long ranges that they appear on a different timebase sweep than the transmitted
pulse. This gives an incorrect range indication. Second and third trace echoes
can be tracked if they are consistent enough to meet acquisition and tracking
criteria but target course and speed data will be in error.

3-37
3. ARP OPERATION

Blind and shadow sectors

Radar shadow or blind areas caused by obstructions aboard ship, for example,
funnels and masts, in the path of the radar beam can result in reduction of radar
beam intensity in that particular direction. This may eliminate the detection of
some targets. The ARP system will lose track of targets shortly after they are lost
on the radar picture and if they remain in a blind zone. These targets will
however be acquired and tracked when they pass out of the blind zone and
again present normal radar echo. The angular width and bearing of any shadow
sector should be determined for their influence on the radar. In certain cases
false echoes in the shadow sector cause the ARP system to acquire, track, and
vector them. Shadow sectors should be avoided.

Indirect echoes
A target at close range is usually picked up directly, but it can also be received
as reflection from a large, flat surface. This will result in the radar presenting two
or more echoes on the display, each at a different range. The ARP can acquire
and track the false echo if it is detected by five consecutive scans. Reduction in
radar gain can eliminate the multiple echoing but care should be taken as range
detection also will be reduced.

Radar interference
If interference is extreme due to another radar operating at close range, spiral
“dotting” and/or false targets may appear momentarily. The interference rejector
can clear the display.

To receive radar beacon or SART signals, turn on “SART” in the ECHO menu.

3-38
4. AIS OPERATION
The FURUNO AIS (Automatic Identification System) model FA-100 or FA-150
exchanges with other AIS-fitted ships all data and information required by the
SOLAS 1994 as amended. However, they are displayed in text form. By
interfacing the FA-100 or FA-150 with this radar, the AIS information is
graphically indicated together with the radar and ARP information.

This radar accepts position data fixed by WGS-84 geodetic datum. Set the
datum to WGS-84 on the EPFS (GPS, etc.) connected to this radar. If other type
of datum is input, the error message "DATUM" appears and the AIS feature is
inoperative.

4.1 Controls for AIS

Keyboard
The AIS uses the keys shown below.

POWER

BRILL A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN

OFF ON OFF ON

1 2 3
EBL HL EBL VRM
OFF OFFSET MODE

4 5 6
F1 F2 OFF CU/TM INDEX MENU ACQ
CENTER RESET LINE

F3 F4
7
VECTOR
8
VECTOR
9
TARGET
+ TARGET
DATA
TIME MODE LIST
RANGE
ALARM STBY 0 ENTER TARGET
CANCEL
ACK TX TRAILS BRILL MARK
- CANCEL

ACQ: Activates chosen AIS target.

TARGET DATA: Displays data on AIS target
selected by the trackball.
TARGET CANCEL: Sleeps chosen AIS target.

Control unit RCU-014

Trackball
With the cursor inside the effective display area, you can access AIS functions
by rolling the wheel or choosing appropriate AIS function from the CURSOR
menu.

Roll the wheel to show the following indications in the guidance box to access
respective AIS function:

TARGET DATA & ACQ: Activates chosen AIS target; displays target data for
AIS target chosen with the trackball.
TARGET CANCEL: Sleeps chosen AIS target.

4-1
4. AIS OPERATION

4.2 Enabling/Disabling the AIS

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARP•AIS and then push the wheel or the left
button.
[ARP•AIS]

1 BACK
2 GUARD ZONE STAB
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
5 GUARD POLYGON
OFF/STAB GND/
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]
5 [ARP SYMBOL]
6 [AIS SYMBOL]
7 [FUSION]
8 AIS FUNCTION
OFF/ON
9 AIS LOST ALARM
ACTIVATED TARGET/
ALL TARGET/
RANGE
0nm

ARP•AIS menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 AIS FUNCTION and then push the wheel or the
left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel
or the left button.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

“AIS” appears at the lower right hand corner of the screen when the AIS function
is active.

4-2
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.3 Turning AIS Display On/Off

1. Roll the trackball to choose the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen.

AIS DISP
OFF

AIS DISP box

2. Push the left button to display AIS ON or AIS OFF as appropriate.
ON: All targets received from the AIS transponder are displayed with
symbols.
OFF: All AIS symbols disappear.
When the AIS is turned on, AIS targets are marked with appropriate AIS symbol
as below.

Activated target ROT higher Dangerous target Lost target Target selected
than preset ROT for data display

AIS symbols
Note 1: The equipment continues to process AIS targets when the AIS feature is
switched off. When the AIS is again turned on, symbols are immediately
displayed.
Note 2: AIS symbols are momentarily erased after the screen is redrawn when
the heading is changed in the Head-up mode.
Note 3: When no AIS data is received, the message “RECEIVE” appears in the
text window. Check the AIS transponder.

4-3
4. AIS OPERATION

4.4 Setting Up for a Voyage

There are five items on the VOYAGE DATA menu you will need to enter at the
start of a voyage: navigational status, ETA, destination, draught and crew.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen.
2. Push the right button to open the AIS TARGET menu.

[AIS TARGET MENU]

1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS

NO/YES
2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS
NO/YES
3 AUTO DISP MESSAGES
OFF/ON
4 [RECEIVED MESSAGES]
5 [TRANSMIT MESSAGE]
6 [VOYAGE DATA]
7 [STATIC DATA]
8 [AIS ALM MESSAGES]

AIS TARGET menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 VOYAGE DATA and then push the wheel or the
left button.

[VOYAGE DATA]

1 BACK
2 NAVIGATION STATUS
00
3 ETA
00/000/0000 00:00
4 DESTINATION

5 DRAUGHT
00m
6 CREW
0000

VOYAGE DATA menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAVIGATION STATUS and then push the left
button.

4-4
 4. AIS OPERATION

5. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate navigation status number referring to

the information below. Push the wheel.
00: Underway using engine (default)
01: At anchor
02: Not under command
03: Restricted maneuverability
04: Constrained by her draught
05: Moored
06: Aground
07: Engaged in fishing
08: Under way sailing
09: Reserved for high speed craft (HSC)
10: Reserved for wing in ground (WIG, for example, hydrofoil)
11-15: Reserved for future use
6. Roll the wheel to choose 3 ETA and then push the wheel or left button.
7. Use the wheel to enter estimated date and time of arrival, in order of day
(two digits), month, year (four digits) and time. Push the wheel after entering
the data.
8. Roll the wheel to choose 4 DESTINATION and then push the wheel or left
button.
9. Enter destination: Roll the wheel to choose alphanumeric character, push the
wheel to enter.
10. Roll the wheel to choose 5 DRAUGHT and then push the wheel or left
button.
11. Roll the wheel to set ship’s draught (setting range: 0.1-25 m) and then push
the wheel.
12. Roll the wheel to choose 6 CREW and then push the wheel or left button.
13. Roll the wheel to set number of crew (0–8191) and then push the wheel.
14. Push the right button to close the menu.

4-5
4. AIS OPERATION

4.5 Activating Targets

When you convert a sleeping target to an activated target, that target’s course
and speed are shown with a vector. You can easily judge target movement by
monitoring the vector.

4.5.1 Activating specific target

By keyboard
1. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the AIS target you wish activate.
2. Press the [ACQ] key to activate the target.

By trackball
1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display
“TARGET DATA & ACQ / CURSOR MENU” in the guidance box.
2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the sleeping AIS target you wish to
activate; that is, know more about a vessel’s motion.
3. Push the left button to activate the target.

SOG (Speed over Ground)

and COG (Course over Ground) vector
*1
Turning direction
*1 = Vector shows STW (speed
(ROT)
thru water) and CSE
(course) when water Heading line#
tracking mode is # = If there is no heading data,
selected at the radar. the line points in direction of COG.

Activated target

4.5.2 Activating all targets

1. Roll the trackball to choose the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen.
2. Push the right button to open the AIS TARGET menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS and then push the wheel
or the left button.
4. Push the right button to close the menu.

Dangerous target

When an activated target violates the CPA/TCPA

alarm setting its symbol changes to the dangerous
target symbol (red and flashing) and the indication
COLLISON appears. Press the [ALARM ACK] key
(or click the ALARM ACK box with the left button)
to acknowledge the CPA/TCPA alarm. The audible
alarm is silenced and the symbol stops flashing. Thicker than
Take appropriate action to avoid collision. activated target

4-6
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.6 Sleeping Targets

4.6.1 Sleeping an AIS target
You may “sleep” an AIS target as below when the screen becomes filled with
targets which might prevent important radar and AIS displays from being
identified. Note that targets that have been activated automatically cannot be
“slept.”

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display
“TARGET CANCEL / EXIT” in the guidance box.
2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on an activated AIS target symbol.
3. Push the left button. The activated target symbol should be replaced with the
sleeping target symbol.

Sleeping target

4.6.2 Sleeping all AIS targets

1. Roll the trackball to choose the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen.
2. Push the right button to open the AIS TARGET menu.

[AIS TARGET MENU]

1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS

NO/YES
2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS
NO/YES
3 AUTO DISP MESSAGES
OFF/ON
4 [RECEIVED MESSAGES]
5 [TRANSMIT MESSAGE]
6 [VOYAGE DATA]
7 [STATIC DATA]
8 [AIS ALM MESSAGES]

AIS TARGET menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS.
4. Push the left button or the wheel to sleep all targets.
5. Push the right button to close the menu.

4-7
4. AIS OPERATION

4.7 Displaying Target Data

You may display an AIS target’s data by selecting it on the display.

4.7.1 Basic data

By keyboard
1. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the AIS target symbol you want to
know its data.
2. Press the [TARGET DATA] key.

By trackball
1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display
“TARGET DATA & ACQ / CURSOR MENU”.
2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on an AIS target symbol and then push
the wheel or the left button. The selected target is marked with a broken
square and AIS data is shown in the AIS data box when the target is correctly
selected. Ship name is shown near the target. If this data is not available,
MMSI no. appears.

Activated target selected for data display

AIS TARGET NAME

FURUNO
Bearing to target BRG 208.6°T HDG
Range to target RNG 12.3NM 12.0°T Heading
Target's course COG 9.0°T* ROT°/MIN
Target's speed SOG 8.2kt# 1.1R Rate of turn
Target's CPA CPA 5.32NM CALL
Target's TCPA TCPA 33:31 143678 Call sign
Target's bow cross range BCR 5.65NM MMSI
Target's bow cross time BCT 25:30 043109977 MMSI No.

* = CSE (course) when water tracking mode is selected at radar.

# = STW (speed thru water) when water tracking mode is selected at radar.

AIS data display

4-8
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.7.2 Detailed target data

1. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the desired AIS target in the data box
at the right side of the screen.
2. Push the left button to show detailed data.

[EXPANDED DATA]

NAME:
Ship's name VOYAGER
Call sign CALL: 143678
Latitude LAT: 34°44.2345'N
Longitude LON: 135°32.1890'E
Position fixing device POS. SNS:
GPS
Position accuracy (HIGH, LOW) POS. ACC.: HIGH
Navigation status NAV. STATE: ANCHOR
MMSI No. MMSI No.: 107374182
IMO No. IMO No.: 12354876
Length SHIP LENGTH: 187m
Width SHIP WIDTH: 28m
Draft SHIP DRAFT: 12.2m
DESTINATION
Destination Osaka
Estimated Time of Arrival ETA: 01/FEB 12:59
AIS program no. AIS VERSION: 0
Fusion ON/OFF FUSION: OFF
Type of ship and cargo TYPE OF SHIP
& CARGO TYPE:
DREDGING OR UNDER
WATER OPERATION

Expanded data

4-9
4. AIS OPERATION

4.8 AIS Symbol Attributes

You may adjust the brilliance and choose the size and color of the AIS symbol.

4.8.1 AIS symbol brilliance

1. Roll the trackball to choose the BRILL box at the left side of the screen and
then push the right button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left button.
[BRILL1 MENU (2/2)]

1 BACK
2 BRG CURSOR
3 EBL
4 VRM
5 INDEX LINE
6 ARPA SYMBOL
7 AIS SYMBOL
8 L/L GRID
9 MARK
0 CHART*
* Not available on IMO type

BRILL menu, page 2

3. Roll the wheel to choose 7 AIS SYMBOL and then push the wheel or the left
button.
4. Roll the wheel to adjust brilliance.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

4-10
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.8.2 AIS symbol size and color

You may choose the size and color of the AIS symbol as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 [ARP•AIS] and then push the wheel or the left
button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 [AIS SYMBOL] and then push the wheel or the
left button.
[AIS SYMBOL]

1 BACK
2 AIS SYMBOL COLOR
RED*/GRN/BLU/YEL/ * RED is not available
CYA/MAG/WHT on IMO type.
3 AIS SYMBOL SIZE
SMALL/STD/LARGE
4 ROT TAG LIMIT
000.1˚/MIN
5 PAST POSN COLOR
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
6 PAST POSN POINTS
5/10

AIS SYMBOL menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 AIS SYMBOL COLOR and then push the wheel or
the left button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose color desired and then push the wheel or the left
button.
6. Roll the wheel to choose 3 AIS SYMBOL SIZE and then push the wheel or
the left button.
7. Roll the wheel to choose SMALL, STD(Standard) or LARGE as appropriate
and then push the wheel or the left button.
8. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

4-11
4. AIS OPERATION

4.9 Past Position Display

The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking past positions
of activated AIS targets. A new dot is added at preset time intervals until the
preset number is reached. If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be
uneven. If it changes course, its plotted course will not be a straight line.

Note that AIS past positions will be shown if TARGET TRACK on the DISPLAY
sub menu of the PLOTTER menu is ON, regardless of whether AUTO TARGET
TRACK on the PLOTTER menu is turned ON or OFF.

Below are sample past position displays.

(a) Ship turning (b) Ship running (c) Ship reduced (d) Ship increased
straight speed speed

Sample past position displays

4.9.1 Displaying and erasing past position points, choosing past

position plot interval
1. Roll the trackball to choose the PAST POSN box at the right side of the
screen.
PAST POSN REL 2MIN

PAST POSN box

2. Push the left button to choose plot interval desired: OFF, 30 s, 1, 2, 3 or 6
min. Choose OFF to erase all past position points and turn off the past
position display.

4-12
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.9.2 Past position display attributes

You may choose the number of past position points to show per plot interval and
the color of past position points.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARP•AIS and then push the wheel or the left
button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 7 [AIS SYMBOL] and then push the wheel or the
left button.
[AIS SYMBOL]

1 BACK
2 AIS SYMBOL COLOR
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
3 AIS SYMBOL SIZE
SMALL/STD/LARGE
4 ROT TAG LIMIT
000.1˚/MIN
5 PAST POSN COLOR
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
6 PAST POSN POINTS
5/10

AIS SYMBOL menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PAST POSN COLOR and then push the wheel or
the left button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose color desired and then push the wheel or the left
button.
6. Roll the wheel to choose 6 PAST POSN POINTS and then push the wheel or
the left button.
7. Roll the wheel to choose 5 or 10 as appropriate and then push the wheel or
the left button.
8. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

4-13
4. AIS OPERATION

4.10 Lost Target

A target is declared a lost target when it fails to produce data for six minutes or
five reporting intervals, whichever is the shorter. When this occurs, the target is
marked with the (flashing) lost target symbol and the indication “LOST” appears.
To acknowledge a lost target, press the [ALARM ACK] key or roll the trackball to
choose the ALARM ACK box and then push the left button.

Lost target
Note 1: If an ARP lost target mark is displayed when the [ALARM ACK] key is
pressed (or the ALARM ACK box is clicked) to acknowledge an AIS lost
target, the ARP lost target will also be erased.
Note 2: The AIS data transmission interval depends on target’s speed. For
example, the data is transmitted every 10 seconds on ship speed of 0 to
14 kt and every two seconds on the ship speed of more than 23 knots.
For details see the owner’s manual of the AIS.

You may choose what lost targets to sound the lost target alarm against as
follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARP•AIS and then push the wheel or the left
button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 9 AIS LOST ALARM and then push the wheel or left
button.
4. Choose ACTIVATED TARGET, ALL TARGET or RANGE as appropriate and
then push the wheel. For range, choose the range within which to sound the
lost target alarm. For example, setting “5 nm” will sound the alarm against
any lost target within 5 nm of own ship.
5. Push the right button several times to close the menu.

4-14
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.11 ROT Setting

You may set the lower limit of the ROT (Rate Of Turn) at which the heading line
on target symbols will point in direction of turning of the vessel.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARP•AIS and then push the wheel or the left
button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 [AIS SYMBOL] and then push the wheel or the left
button.
[AIS SYMBOL]

1 BACK
2 AIS SYMBOL COLOR
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
3 AIS SYMBOL SIZE
SMALL/STD/LARGE
4 ROT TAG LIMIT
000.1˚/MIN
5 PAST POSN COLOR
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
6 PAST POSN POINTS
5/10

AIS SYMBOL menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ROT TAG LIMIT and then push the wheel or the
left button.
5. Use the numeral keys or the wheel to enter ROT (setting range: 0.1 to
720.0°/min).
6. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

Ship turning
to port

ROT display

4-15
4. AIS OPERATION

4.12 Fusion of ARP and AIS Targets

An AIS-equipped ship is usually displayed by two symbols on the radar display.
This is because the AIS ship position is measured by a GPS navigator (L/L) on
that ship whereas the radar detects the same ship by PPI principle (range and
bearing relative to own ship radar antenna).

To avoid the presentation of two target symbols for the same physical target, the
“fusion” function is incorporated. If target data from AIS and from radar plotting
functions are available and if the fusion criteria is fulfilled, only the activated AIS
target symbol is presented.

1. Confirm that the ARP ACQ MODE box shows AUTO or AUTO MAN.
2. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARP•AIS and then push the left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose 7 [FUSION] and then push the left button.
[FUSION]

1 BACK
2 FUSION TARGET
OFF/ON
3 GAP
0.000NM
4 RANGE
0.000NM
5 BEARING
00.0°
6 SPEED
0.0KT
7 COURSE
0.0°

FUSION menu
5. Roll the wheel to choose FUSION TARGET and then push the wheel.
6. Roll the wheel to choose ON and then push the wheel.
7. Enter the information below, pushing the wheel (or the [MARK ENTER] key)
after entering each data. This information will be used to determine which
ARP targets to convert.
GAP: Range between AIS target and ARP target.
(setting range: 0.000-0.999(nm))
RANGE: Enter the range difference from own ship to AIS target and ARP
target. (setting range: 0.000-0.999(nm))
BEARING: Enter the bearing difference from own ship to AIS target and ARP
target. (setting range: 0.0-9.9(°))
SPEED: Enter the speed difference between AIS target and ARP target.
(setting range: 0.0-9.9(kt))
COURSE: Enter the course difference between AIS target and ARP target.
(setting range: 0.0-9.9(°))
8. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

4-16
 4. AIS OPERATION

When the fusion criteria is met, the ARP symbol is erased and only the AIS
symbol is displayed. Further, “ARPA FUSION” appears at the bottom right corner
of the display at the time of conversion and the ARP target no. appears next to
the AIS symbol. An ARP target whose speed is less than 1 kt is converted to an
AIS target if it meets all criteria other than course.

4-17
4. AIS OPERATION

4.13 Own Ship’s Data

Own ship’s static data (type of ship, call sign, name and position of internal and
external GPS antennas) can be viewed as follows

1. Roll the trackball to choose the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen.
2. Push the right button to open the AIS TARGET menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 7 STATIC DATA and then push the wheel or the left
button.

[STATIC DATA]

1 BACK
TYPE OF SHIP
000
ALL SHIPS OF
THIS TYPE
CALL SIGN
ZQ1234501 A
NAME
FURUNOVOYAGER
EXT GPS ANT POSN B
A: 000m B: 000m
C: 00m D: 00m
C D

STATIC DATA menu

4. Push the right button to close the menu.

4-18
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.14 Messages
You may transmit and receive messages via the VHF link, to a specified
destination (MMSI) or all ships in the area. Messages can be sent to warn of
safety of navigation, for example, an iceberg sighted. Routine messages are
also permitted.

Short safety related messages are only an additional means to broadcast safety
information. They do not remove the requirements of the GMDSS.

4.14.1 Creating, saving a message

This section shows you how to create and save a message. Nine messages may
be saved.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen.
2. Push the right button to open the AIS TARGET menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 5 TRANSMIT MESSAGE and then push the wheel.
[TRANSMIT MESSAGE]

1 BACK
2 ADDRESS TYPE
ADDRESSED/BROADCAST
3 MESSAGE TYPE
SAFETY/BINARY
4 MMSI NO. 000000000
5 CHANNEL
A/B/A or B/A and B
6 OPEN FILE 1
7 SAVE FILE 1
8 EDIT
9 TRANSMIT MESSAGE

TRANSMIT MESSAGE menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 ADDRESS TYPE and then push the wheel or the
left button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose ADDRESSED (message for specific MMSI) or
BROADCAST (message to all AIS-equipped vessels in area) and then push
the wheel or the left button.
6. Roll the wheel to choose 3 MESSAGE type and then push the wheel or the
left button.
7. Roll the wheel to choose SAFETY for safety message or BINARY for routine
message.
8. For ADDRESSED message, do this step. For BROADCAST message, go to
step 9.
1) Roll the wheel to choose 4 MMSI NO. and then push the wheel or the left
button.
2) Use the wheel to enter ship’s MMSI no.: Roll the wheel to choose
alphanumeric character and then push the wheel.
9. Roll the wheel to choose 5 CHANNEL and then push the wheel or the left
button.

4-19
4. AIS OPERATION

10. Roll the wheel to choose the channel to transmit your message over: A, B, A
or B, or A and B. Push the wheel after making your selection.
11. Roll the wheel to choose 8 EDIT and push the wheel or left button. A mini
keyboard at the bottom of the menu to enter your message.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 BS
Q W E R T Y U I O P -
> A S D F G H J K L +
= Z X C V B N M , . ?
” # / END
Space

Mini keyboard
12. Roll the trackball to choose character desired and then push the wheel.
Repeat to enter message. The maximum number of characters allowable is
as follows:
ADDRESSED BINARY: 151
ADDRESSED SAFETY: 156
BROADCAST BINARY: 156
BROADCAST SAFETY: 161
13. Roll the trackball to choose END and then push the wheel.
14. Roll the trackball to choose 7 SAVE FILE and then push the wheel or the left
button.
15. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate number and then push the wheel or the
left button.
16. Push the right button to close the menu.

4.14.2 Transmitting messages

There are two ways to transmit a message: create a message on the spot and
transmit it or choose and transmit a message saved in the memory.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen.
2. Push the right button to open the AIS TARGET menu.
3. Do one of the following:
a) Create a message as described in section 4.14.1.
b) Load a file saved in the memory by choosing 6 OPEN FILE, pushing the left
button and then rolling the wheel to choose file number.
4. To transmit the message, choose 9 TRANSMIT MESSAGE and then push
the wheel or the left button.
5. Press the right button to close the menu.

4-20
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.14.3 Viewing AIS messages

When an AIS message is received, the display shows an appropriate icon to
alert you. If you are set up to automatically display AIS messages they are
automatically displayed upon receipt. The system stores up to 20 AIS messages.
When the storage capacity is reached the oldest AIS message is automatically
erased to make room for the latest. Note that received messages and alarm
messages are not backed up when the power is turned off.

Manually viewing received AIS messages

To view received AIS messages do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the AIS DISP box at the right side of the display.
2. Push the right button to open the AIS TARGET menu.

[AIS TARGET MENU]

1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS

NO/YES
2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS
NO/YES
3 AUTO DISP MESSAGES
OFF/ON
4 [RECEIVED MESSAGES]
5 [TRANSMIT MESSAGE]
6 [VOYAGE DATA]
7 [STATIC DATA]
8 [AIS ALM MESSAGES]

AIS TARGET menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 RECEIVED MESSAGES and then push the
wheel or the left button. (Up to five received messages are displayed.)

[RECEIVED MESSAGES]
(1/1)
1 BACK [L = TOP]
2 09DEC2003 12:34
ADDRESSED SAFETY
MMSI: 107374182
3

0 NEXT [L = LAST]

RECEIVED MESSAGES menu

4-21
4. AIS OPERATION

4. Roll the wheel to choose the message which you want to see and then push
the wheel or the left button.
NAME: FURUNO
CALL: 112233
STORM WARNING VICINITY
OF 35°N 135°W

Example of received AIS message (max. 180 characters)

5. Press the right button several times to close the message and the menu.

Automatically displaying AIS messages

You can display AIS messages upon receipt as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the AIS DISP box at the right side of the display.
2. Push the right button to open the AIS TARGET menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 3 AUTO DISP MESSAGES and then push the
wheel or the left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose ON and then push the wheel or the left button.
5. Push the right button to close the menu.

When a message arrives the message arrival icon ( ) appears at the right-hand
side of the display. Click the icon with the left button to show the message.

Manually viewing AIS alarm messages

The transponder outputs various alarm messages. You can view them as
follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the AIS DISP box at the right side of the display.
2. Push the right button to open the AIS TARGET menu.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 AIS ALM MESSAGES and then push the wheel or
the left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose the date display of alarm you want to view.
5. Push the right button to close the menu.

4-22
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.15 AIS System Messages

AIS system messages are displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen.
The table below shows the AIS system messages and their meanings.

AIS system messages

Message Meaning
ARPA FUSION ARPA target merged with AIS target. The indication
disappears when the target no longer meets the criteria
set in paragraph 4.12. When the message “RECEIVE”
is displayed, ARPA FUSION is not displayed.
COLLISION CPA and TCPA of an activated AIS target are below
value set on the menu.
TARGET-FULL Displayed when 1000 AIS targets have been received.
(The radar can only display 1000 AIS targets closest in
range to own ship.)
LOST Lost target. A target is declared a lost target when a
dangerous target fails to produce data for six minutes or
five reporting intervals, whichever is the shorter.
RECEIVE Not receiving AIS data from own AIS (VDO message).
GUARD Displayed when an AIS target enters the guard zone.
CPA/TCPA CPA/TCPA cannot be calculated. Further the CPA/TCPA
value in the basic data display is marked with an
asterisk to indicate that it is not reliable.
AIS ALARM Alarm received from AIS transponder.

AIS CPA alarm

The CPA alarm (see page 3-22) is also released against stationary AIS targets.
An AIS target is judged to be a stationary target if its speed is lower than a
certain speed. For AIS targets you can elect to get only the visual alarm, as
follows:
1. Left-click the MENU box.
2. Choose 4 [ARP·AIS] and push the wheel.
3. Choose 0 AIS CPA ALM and push the wheel.
4. Choose IGNORE TARGET and push the wheel.
5. Set speed to ignore AIS targets below this threshold.
6. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

4-23
4. AIS OPERATION

(This page intentionally left blank.)

4-24
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION
5.1 General
The video plotter
• Plots own and other ships’ tracks. (Plotting of other ships’ tracks not available
on IMO type.)
• Enters waypoints nav lines and marks
• Records data onto memory cards (optional card interface required).
• It uses two types of memory cards, a memory card (RAM card) for storing own
ship and other ship’s tracks and marks, and a digital chart card (ROM card).
• 30 nav lines may be stored and each line may contain up to 30 waypoints.
Five nav lines may be simultaneously shown on the display. 200 waypoints are
available. Own ship and other ship tracks may be stored at a selected interval.
• Charts (A, B, C and W types) are superimposed on the radar picture without
disturbing the radar observation. The chart area is dependent on the radar
range in use.

5.2 Display Modes

This radar has display modes as follows.
• IMO, A type: Radar, Radar + Plotter
• B, C, W type: Radar, Radar + Plotter, Plotter

Use the DISPLAY MODE box to choose a mode. (When the video plotter mode
is displayed more than five seconds, the radar automatically goes into standby.)

Note 1: Display mode cannot be chosen when the menu is open. Close the
menu to choose a display mode.
Note 2: IMO type radar can display own ship’s track and L/L grid on the
+PLOTTER display.

5-1
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

Sample video plotter display

North marker
350 000 010
Separation zone 340 020 Heading marker
330 030
320 040
Waypoint
310 050
Target being tracked Navline
W012
300 060
Own ship safe contour
290 070
Heading line
280 080

AIS activated target 090

Planned route
270

260 100
Own ship vector
250 110

240 120 Approximate coastline

W011
230 130

Dangerous side of own 220 140 Waypoint

ship safe contour may be 210 150
marked like this (hatched 200 160
190 180 170
line). Past position
ARP/AIS: Equally time-spaced positions of any targets being tracked.

Video plotter display

5.3 Presentation Modes

Five presentation modes are available: North-up, Course-up, Head-up, Head-up
TB (True Bearing) and North-up TM (True Motion). To choose a mode, use the
[MODE] key or choose the PRESENTATION MODE box and then push the left
button. For a description of the presentation modes, see paragraph 1.12.

Note 1: Chart data is not displayed on the HEAD UP and HEAD UP TB modes.
Note 2: The screen may flash when the heading is changed more than one
degree in the HEAD UP or HEAD UP TB mode.

Automatic resetting of own ship mark in true motion mode

In the true motion mode, the own ship mark is automatically returned sternward
75% from the screen center when it reaches a location 50% of the display
radius.

5-2
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.4 Radar Map

A radar map is a combination of map lines and symbols whereby the user can
define and input the navigation data, route planning and monitoring data.
The radar map may contain 20,000 points of data. The map data can be
memorized to facilitate repeated use on a routine navigation area.
The user can create a radar map on-real time while using the radar for
navigation or at leisure time at anchor or while the radar is not being used. Place
of a map can be made for any waterways apart from the actual own ship
location.

All radar map functions are accessed from the radar display. To choose the radar
display, use the trackball to choose the DISPLAY MODE box and push the left
button to display “RADAR” or “+PLOTTER”. Then, follow the procedures in this
section to create a radar map.

5.4.1 Turning on the radar map display

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MARK box.
2. Push the right button to open the MARK menu.

[MARK MENU]

1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA
2 MARK KIND
ORIGIN MARK(No. )/
ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/
MAP MARK/
WP 1~50/
WP 51~ 100/
WP 101~150/
WP 151~ 200/
OWN SHIP SHAPE
8 MARK POSN
CURSOR/OS/L/L
00°000.00 N
000°000.00 E
9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
0 MAP MARK COLOR* * Not available on IMO
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/ or A type
CYA/MAG/WHT

MARK menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 9 MAP DISPLAY and then push the wheel.
4. Roll the wheel to choose ON and then push the wheel or the left button.
5. Push the right button to close the menu.

5-3
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.4.2 Inscribing radar map marks and lines

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MARK box at the left side of the display.
MARK >
Mark type
-> +
MARK box
2. Push the right button to open the MARK menu.

[MARK MENU]

1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA
2 MARK KIND
ORIGIN MARK(No. )/
ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/
MAP MARK/
WP 1~50/
WP 51~ 100/
WP 101~150/
WP 151~ 200/
OWN SHIP SHAPE
8 MARK POSN
CURSOR/OS/L/L
00°000.00 N
000°000.00 E
9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
0 MAP MARK COLOR* * Not available on IMO
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/ or A type
CYA/MAG/WHT

MARK menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK KIND and then push the wheel or the left
button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose MAP MARK and then push the wheel or the left
button.
Note: For other than IMO- and A-type radars you may specify mark color by
choosing 0 MAP MARK COLOR, pushing the wheel and the choosing
color desired.
5. Push the right button to close the menu. The guidance box now reads
“MARK SELECT / MARK MENU.”
6. With the cursor choosing the MARK box, roll the wheel to choose the mark or
line type you wish to inscribe and then push the left button. See the next
page for available marks. The cursor jumps into the effective display area
and the guidance box now reads “MARK / EXIT.”
7. Roll the wheel to choose 8 MARK POSN and then push the left button.
8. Choose mark entry method, CURSOR, OS or L/L and then push the wheel.
For L/L enter position.
9. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the location desired. (You can see
the range and bearing from own ship to the cursor location by monitoring the
bearing and range indication just below the MARK box.) Push the left button
to inscribe the mark or line point.

5-4
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

• To continue entering the same mark or line (with the guidance box showing
“MARK / EXIT”), roll the trackball to choose location and then push the left
button.
• To quit entering marks or lines, push the right button when the guidance box
reads “MARK / EXIT.”

B, C and W types
IMO and A types
(symbols available in 7 colors)

Orange MARK Orange MARK

Orange MARK Orange MARK

Orange MARK Orange MARK

Orange MARK Orange MARK

Orange MARK Orange MARK

Orange MARK Orange MARK

Orange MARK Green BUOY

Orange MARK Red BUOY

Orange MARK Green BUOY

Orange MARK Red BUOY

<> Orange MARK Green BUOY

Orange MARK Red BUOY

Red BUOY Green BUOY

Red BUOY Red BUOY

Red BUOY Purple DANGER

Red BUOY Purple DANGER

Red BUOY Purple DANGER (cable)

Purple DANGER White COAST LINE

Purple DANGER (cable) Gray CONTOUR LINE

Purple DANGER Purple NAV LINE

White COAST LINE Purple PROHIBITED AREAS

Gray CONTOUR LINE

Purple NAV LINE

Purple PROHIBITED AREAS

5-5
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.5 Erasing Radar Map Marks and Lines

A total of 20,000 points is allotted for radar map marks and lines. When this
amount is exceeded, no more map marks or lines may be entered unless you
erase unnecessary marks or lines.

5.5.1 Erasing individual radar map marks and lines

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to show
“MARK DELETE / EXIT” in the guidance box.
2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the radar map mark or line you wish
to erase.
3. Push the left button to erase selected mark or line.
Note: When erasing a line, the cursor location determines how the line will
be erased. To erase a single line segment, place the cursor on the
starting point of the line. When the junction point between two line
segments is erased, the line is redrawn connecting the line segments
which were before and after the erased junction. See the figure below
for an example.
Erasing a line segment

After erasing

Erasing two lines

After erasing

Cursor location and line processing

5-6
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.5.2 Erasing all radar map marks and lines

You can erase all radar map marks and lines from the screen as below. Be
absolutely sure you want to erase all map marks and lines – erased marks and
lines cannot be restored.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left
button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [DATA ERASE] and then push the wheel or the
left button.

[DATA ERASE]

1 BACK
2 OWN TRACK
RED/GRN//BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT/
30%/50%/80%/ALL
3 TARGET TRACK*
RED/GRN//BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT/
30%/50%/80%/ALL
4 MARK ALL ERASE
NO/YES
5 WPT ALL ERASE
NO/YES
6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE
* Not available on IMO type

DATA ERASE menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 4 MARK ALL ERASE.
5. Roll the wheel to choose YES and then push the wheel or the left button to
erase all marks.
6. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5-7
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.6 Radar Map Corrections

5.6.1 Radar map correction
When there is positional error between the radar screen and radar map marks
and lines, do the following to correct it.

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display
“CHART ALIGN L=OFF / EXIT” in the guidance box.
2. Operate the trackball to align the radar map with the radar screen.
3. Push the left button to set. “MAN ALIGNED” appears at the right side of the
screen.

To release the radar map correction, display “CHART ALIGN L=OFF / EXIT” in
the guidance box and then push the left button until “MAN ALIGNED” disappears
from the screen.

5.6.2 Cursor data correction

You can correct cursor data as below.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left
button.

[PLOTTER]

1 BACK
2 CHART COLOR*
GRN/YEL/CYA
ORANGE/GRAY
3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL
OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/
1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
4 OWN TRACK COLOR
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
5 TGT TRACK INTERVAL*
OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/
1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
6 TGT TRACK COLOR*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN
OFF/ON
8 [DATA ERASE]
9 [DISPLAY]
0 AUTO TARGET TRACK*
OFF/ON * Not available on IMO type

PLOTTER menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN and then push the wheel or
the left button.

5-8
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

4. Roll the wheel to choose ON and then push the wheel or the left button.
“ALIGN” appears (in red) next to cursor position in the text area. (To remove
the correction, choose OFF. If you are using the AIS function, choose ON.)
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

5.7 Chart Cards (A, B, C and W types)

FURUNO or NAVIONICS charts may be overlaid on the radar image of the A, B,
C and W type radars when they are interfaced with the optional Card I/F Unit
CU-200.

CAUTION
Handle chart cards and memory cards
with care.

Keep cards away from direct sunlight,

heat sources, and active gases.
Keep cards away from water and
chemicals.
Keep the connector free foreign
material.
Do not drop the cards.

Chart cards are intended as an aid to

navigation. The navigator has the
responsibility to check all aids available
to confirm position.

5.7.1 Displaying a chart

To display a chart:
1. Insert a chart card in either of the two card slots in the Card I/F Unit CU-200.
1 2

+ +

Card Slot
Card slot location
2. Press the [POWER] button on the control unit to turn the power on. With the
radar in transmit status, choose the radar display (NU, CU, TM modes only)
or the radar/video plotter display to display the chart.

To display a chart after the power has been turned on, change the range by
pressing the [RANGE+] or [RANGE-] key or operating the RANGE box.

5-9
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.7.2 Chart position correction

There may be a case where the chart overlay is not aligned with the radar image.
This is due to an error in the position fixing system (GPS, Loran, etc.) or the
different coordinates between the position fixing system and the radar. In this
case, align the chart with the radar image as below.

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display
“CHART ALIGN L=OFF / EXIT” in the guidance box.
2. Operate the trackball to align the chart with the radar map. Note that track is
neither recorded nor displayed at this point.
3. Push the left button to set. “CHART ALIGN” appears (in red) at the right side
of the screen.

To release the chart position correction, display “CHART ALIGN L=OFF /

EXIT” in the guidance box and then push the left button until “CHART ALIGN”
disappears from the screen.

5.7.3 Correcting cursor data

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the left button.

[PLOTTER]

1 BACK
2 CHART COLOR*
GRN/YEL/CYA
ORANGE/GRAY
3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL
OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/
1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
4 OWN TRACK COLOR
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
5 TGT TRACK INTERVAL*
OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/
1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
6 TGT TRACK COLOR*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN
OFF/ON
8 [DATA ERASE]
9 [DISPLAY]
0 AUTO TARGET TRACK*
OFF/ON * Not available on IMO type

PLOTTER menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN and then push the wheel or
the left button.

5-10
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

4. Roll the wheel to choose ON and then push the wheel or the left button.
“ALIGN” appears (in red) next to cursor position in the cursor data box. (To
remove the correction, choose OFF. If you are using the AIS function, choose
ON.)
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

5.7.4 Chart land color

You may choose the color for the land on charts as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the left button.

[PLOTTER]

1 BACK
2 CHART COLOR*
GRN/YEL/CYA
ORANGE/GRAY
3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL
OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/
1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
4 OWN TRACK COLOR
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
5 TGT TRACK INTERVAL*
OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/
1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
6 TGT TRACK COLOR*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN
OFF/ON
8 [DATA ERASE]
9 [DISPLAY]
0 AUTO TARGET TRACK*
OFF/ON * Not available on IMO type

PLOTTER menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 CHART COLOR and then push the left button or
the wheel.
4. Choose color desired and push the wheel or the left button.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

5-11
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.8 Hiding/Showing Graphics on the Video Plotter

Display
1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left
button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 9 [DISPLAY] and then push the wheel or the left
button. Roll the wheel to choose an item and then push the wheel or the left
button. To go to page 2, choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left
button. You may return to page 1 by choosing 1 BACK and pressing the
wheel or the left button.
[DISPLAY (1/2)] [DISPLAY (2/2)]

1 BACK 1 BACK
2 GRID Choose 2 NAV LINE(MAP)
OFF/ON 0 NEXT OFF/ON
3 OWN TRACK to show 3 DANGER HIGHLIGHT
OFF/ON page 2. OFF/ON
4 TARGET TRACK* 4 PROHIBITED AREA
OFF/ON OFF/ON
5 MARK 5 BUOY
OFF/ON OFF/ON
6 LAND DENSITY*
OFF/ON
7 PLACE NAME* Page 2
OFF/ON
8 COAST LINE
OFF/ON
9 CONTOUR LINE
OFF/ON/DEPTH
0 NEXT
* Not available on IMO type
Page 1
DISPLAY menus
4. Push the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate.
Note: LAND DENSITY fills (ON) or hollows (OFF) land on an electronic
chart. Land will be hollow when wrong card or wrong scale is used,
regardless of LAND DENSITY setting.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set other items.
6. Push the right button three or four times to close the menu depending on
which page of the DISPLAY menu you are using.

5-12
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.9 Track
5.9.1 Plotting own ship’s track
A total of 20,000 points are allotted for storage of own ship’s track, marks and
lines. When this memory becomes full, the oldest track is deleted to make room
for the latest. For that reason you may want to adjust the recording interval to
conserve the memory.

The table below shows the relation between plotting interval and maximum track
recording time.

Own track plotting interval and storage time

Interval Max. Recording Time Interval Max. Recording Time

10 s 55 hr 30 min 2 min 27 days 18 hr 40 min
30 s 166 hr 40 min 3 min 41 days 16 hr
1 min 13 days 21 hr 20 min 6 min 83 days 8 hr

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel.

[PLOTTER]

1 BACK
2 CHART COLOR*
GRN/YEL/CYA
ORANGE/GRAY
3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL
OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/
1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
4 OWN TRACK COLOR
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
5 TGT TRACK INTERVAL*
OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/
1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
6 TGT TRACK COLOR*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN
OFF/ON
8 [DATA ERASE]
9 [DISPLAY]
0 AUTO TARGET TRACK*
OFF/ON * Not available on IMO type

PLOTTER menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL and then push the
wheel or the left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate option and then push the wheel or the
left button. Choose OFF to stop plotting own ship’s track. DRAW displays the
track but does not record it.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

5-13
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.9.2 Plotting other ships’ track (A, B, C and W types)

The tracks of 15 targets (other ships) can be recorded. The memory capacity for
other ships’ track is 15,000 points (1,000 points per each of 15 targets). When
the other ships’ track memory becomes full the oldest track is deleted to make
room for the latest. For that reason you may want to adjust the recording interval
to conserve the memory. Note that the track of ARP targets

The table below shows the relation between plotting interval and maximum track
recording time for other ships’ track.

Other target plot interval and storage time

Interval Max. Recording Time Interval Max. Recording Time

10 s 2 hrs 46 min 2 min 66 hrs 20 min
30 s 8 hrs 20 min 3 min 50 hrs
1 min 16 hrs 40 min 6 min 100 hrs

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left
button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 5 TGT TRACK INTERVAL and then push the wheel
or the left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate option and then push the wheel or the
left button. Choose OFF to stop plotting own ship’s track. DRAW displays the
track but does not record it.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

5.9.3 Choosing track color

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left
button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 OWN TRACK COLOR or 6 TGT TRACK COLOR
(not available on IMO-type radar), whichever track color you want to set, and
then push the wheel or the left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose color desired and then push the wheel or the left
button.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

5-14
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.9.4 Erasing track

The display may become full of track when, for example, own ship traces the
same route several times or there are many tracks from other ships. You may
erase track two ways: through the menu (by color or percentage) or directly on
the screen (track between specified points is erased).

Erasing track through the menu

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left
button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [DATA ERASE] and then push the wheel or the
left button.
[DATA ERASE]

1 BACK
2 OWN TRACK
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT/
30%/50%/80%/ALL
3 TARGET TRACK*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT/
30%/50%/80%/ALL
4 MARK ALL ERASE
NO/YES
5 WPT ALL ERASE
NO/YES
6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE
7 OWN TRACK DELETE*
2POINTS/AREA
8 TARGET TRACK DELETE*
2POINTS/AREA * Not available on IMO or A type

DATA ERASE menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 OWN TRACK or 3 TARGET TRACK (not
available on IMO-type radar), whichever track you want to erase, and then
push the wheel or the left button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose color or percentage to erase and then push the
wheel or the left button. For example, “30” erases the oldest 30% of the track
selected at step 4. Choose “ALL” to erase all of the corresponding track.
6. Push the right button three times close the menu.

Erasing track between two points

1. Roll the thumbwheel to display MARK DELETE/EXIT in the guidance box.
2. Place the cursor on the start of the track section you want to erase and then
push the wheel.
3. Place the cursor on the end of the track section you want to erase and then
push the wheel.

5-15
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.10 Waypoints
A particular location is known as a “waypoint,” whether it be a starting point, a
destination point or an intermediate point on a voyage. This unit can store 200
waypoints, numbered 001 to 200. Waypoints may be entered with the cursor or
by input of latitude and longitude.

5.10.1 Entering waypoints

Entering waypoints with the cursor
1. Roll the trackball to choose the MARK box at the left side of the screen.
MARK >
Mark type last 1
selected, mark -> +
number 162.5°T 11.7NM
Bearing and range from
own ship to waypoint

MARK box
2. Push the right button to open the MARK menu.

[MARK MENU]

1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA
2 MARK KIND
ORIGIN MARK(No. )/
ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/
MAP MARK/
WP 1~50/
WP 51~ 100/
WP 101~150/
WP 151~ 200/
OWN SHIP SHAPE
8 MARK POSN
CURSOR/OS/L/L
00°000.00 N
000°000.00 E
9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
0 MAP MARK COLOR* * Not available on IMO
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/ or A type
CYA/MAG/WHT

MARK menu
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK KIND and then push the wheel.
4. Roll the wheel to choose the WPT item which best matches the waypoint
number you wish to enter and then push the wheel or the left button. For
example, if you want to enter waypoint number 59, choose “WPT 51-100.”
5. Push the right button to close the menu. The guidance box now reads
“MARK SELECT / MARK MENU.”

5-16
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

6. With the MARK box selected, roll the wheel to display waypoint number
desired and then push the left button. The cursor jumps into the effective
display area and the guidance box reads “MARK / EXIT.”
7. Roll the trackball to place the cursor where you want to inscribe a waypoint
mark and then push the left button to inscribe the mark. The waypoint mark
(“ ” + waypoint number) appears at the location selected. (You can see the
range and bearing to the cursor location by monitoring the mark range and
bearing indication just below the MARK box.)
• To enter another waypoint, push the right button when the guidance box reads
“MARK / EXIT” and then repeat steps 6-8. (“WPT” should be chosen on the
MARK menu.)
• To quit entering waypoints, push the right button when the guidance box reads
“MARK / EXIT.”

Entering waypoints by manual input of latitude and longitude

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the
left button.

[NAV LINE•WPT (1/2)]

1 BACK
2 NAV LINE DATA
OFF/EXT DATA/
INTERNAL DATA/
WPT MARK*
3 NAV LINE SELECT
--
FORWARD/REVERSE
4 SKIP NEXT WPT
5 NAV LINE WIDTH
0.0NM
6 [WPT SET]
7 [WPT LIST]
8 [NAV LINE SET]
9 [NAV LINE LIST]
* Not available on IMO type
0 NEXT

NAV LINE•WPT menu

5-17
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 [WPT SET] and then push the wheel or the left
button.
[WPT SET]

1 BACK
2 WPT NO. SELECT
000
3 WPT NAME

4 WPT L/L
00°00.000 N
000°00.000 E
5 CLEAR DATA

WPT SET menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 WPT NO. SELECT and then push the wheel or
the left button.
5. Use the wheel to choose waypoint number: Roll the wheel to choose location
and then push the wheel to set.
6. To enter waypoint name, follow the procedure below. If you do not require
waypoint name go to step 7.
a) Roll the wheel to choose 3 WPT NAME and then push the wheel or the left
button.
b) Roll the wheel to choose alphanumeric character desired and then push the
wheel.
c) Repeat step 2 to complete the waypoint name. You may use up to 15
alphanumeric characters for waypoint name.
7. Roll the wheel to choose 4 WPT L/L and then push the wheel or the left
button.
8. Enter latitude and longitude position as follows:
a) Roll the wheel to choose location desired and then push the wheel. (The
wheel may be pushed again to skip a place.) For input by keyboard, press
appropriate numeric keys and then press the [ENTER MARK] key.
b) To switch co-ordinate polarity, roll the wheel or use the [2] key in case of
keyboard operation.
9. To enter another waypoint, repeat steps 4-8.
10. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5-18
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.10.2 Editing, erasing waypoints from the menu

You may edit or erase waypoints from the menu as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the
left button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 [WPT SET] and then push the wheel or the left
button.

[WPT SET]

1 BACK
2 WPT NO. SELECT
000
3 WPT NAME

4 WPT L/L
00°00.000 N
000°00.000 E
5 CLEAR DATA

WPT SET menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 WPT NO. SELECT and then push the wheel or
the left button.
5. Use the wheel to enter waypoint number you wish to edit and then push the
wheel or the left button. Then, do one of the following:
• To change the waypoint name, roll the wheel to choose 3 WPT NAME and
then push the wheel or the left button. Use the wheel to edit waypoint
name.
• To edit the waypoint position, roll the wheel to choose 4 WPT L/L and then
push the wheel or the left button. Use the wheel to edit waypoint position.
• To erase the waypoint, roll the wheel to choose 5 CLEAR DATA and then
push the wheel or the left button. Note that a waypoint cannot be erased if
it is part of a nav line.
6. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5-19
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.10.3 Erasing waypoints

Waypoints may be erased individually or collectively. Note that a waypoint
cannot be erased if it is part of a nav line.

Erasing individual waypoints

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display
“MARK DELETE / EXIT” in the guidance box.
2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint you wish to erase. A
flashing “+” appears on the mark when it is correctly selected.
3. Push the left button or the wheel to erase the waypoint.
4. To erase another waypoint, repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. To finish, push the right button when the guidance reads “MARK DELETE /
EXIT”.

Erasing all waypoints

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left
button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [DATA ERASE] and then push the wheel or the
left button.
[DATA ERASE]

1 BACK
2 OWN TRACK
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT/
30%/50%/80%/ALL
3 TARGET TRACK*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT/
30%/50%/80%/ALL
4 MARK ALL ERASE
NO/YES
5 WPT ALL ERASE
NO/YES
6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE
7 OWN TRACK DELETE*
2POINTS/AREA
8 TARGET TRACK DELETE*
2POINTS/AREA * Not available on IMO or A type

DATA ERASE menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 5 WPT ALL ERASE.
5. Roll the wheel to choose YES and then push the wheel or the left button to
erase all waypoints.
6. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5-20
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.10.4 Waypoint list

The waypoint list stores position data of all registered waypoints. Each page of
the waypoint list holds eight waypoints.

To display the waypoint list:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 NAV LINE•WPT and then push the wheel or the
left button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 7 [WPT LIST] and then push the wheel or the left
button. Asterisks indicate no data.

[WPT LIST (1/25)]

1 BACK (L=TOP)
001 001
34°42.110 N
136°31.580 E
002 002
33°97.690 N
134°64.350 E
003

004

005

006

007

008

0 NEXT (L=LAST)

WPT list
4. To go to a next page, choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left
button.
5. Push the right button several times to close the waypoint list and the menu.

5-21
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.10.5 Displaying waypoint name and number

You may turn waypoint name and number display on or off as desired.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the
left button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left button.

[NAV LINE•WPT (2/2)]

1 BACK
2 ARRIVAL WPT ALARM
OFF/ON
3 TURNING LINE
OFF/ON/REVISED
4 DISP WPT NO.
OFF/ON
5 DISP WPT NAME
OFF/ON

NAV LINE•WPT menu (2/2)

4. Roll the wheel to choose 4 DISP WPT NO. and then push the wheel or the
left button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel
or the left button.
6. Roll the wheel to choose 5 DISP WPT NAME and then push the wheel or the
left button.
7. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel
or the left button.
8. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5-22
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.11 Nav Lines

30 nav lines may be entered, and each line may have up to 30 waypoints.

5.11.1 Entering new nav line

To enter a nav line, first enter appropriate waypoints. Then, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the
left button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE SET] and then push the wheel or the
left button.

[NAV LINE SET]

1 BACK
2 NAV LINE NO. SELECT
00
3 NAV LINE NAME

4 NAV LINE ENTRY

— — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
5 CLEAR DATA

NAV LINE SET menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAV LINE NO. SELECT and then push the wheel
or the left button.
5. Use the wheel to enter nav line no., in two digits.
6. Roll the wheel to choose 3 NAV LINE NAME and then push the wheel or the
left button.
7. Use the wheel to enter a name.
8. Roll the wheel to choose 4 NAV LINE ENTRY and then push the wheel or left
button.
9. Use the wheel to enter waypoint numbers (in three digits): Roll the wheel to
choose numeral and push it to set.
10. To enter another nav line, roll the wheel to choose 0 BACK to return to the
NAV LINE SET menu and then repeat steps 4-9.
11. To finish, push the right button several times to close the menu.

5-23
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.11.2 Editing nav lines

Follow the procedure below to edit a nav line. Before editing a nav line it must be
disabled. See paragraph 5.13.6.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the
left button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE SET] and then push the wheel or the
left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAV LINE NO. SELECT and then push the wheel
or the left button.
5. Use the wheel to enter nav line number to edit and then push the wheel or
the left button.
6. To edit nav line name, roll the wheel to choose 3 NAV LINE NAME and then
push the wheel or the left button. Use the wheel to change name.
7. To replace waypoints in a nav line, do the following:
1) Roll the wheel to choose 4 [NAV DATA ENTRY] and then push the wheel or
the left button.
2) Push the wheel to choose the waypoint you wish to replace.
3) Roll the wheel to set new waypoint number.
4) Push the wheel to finish.
8. Push the right button several times to close the menu.

5-24
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.11.3 Nav line list

The nav line list, which shows all nav lines registered, may be displayed as
follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the
left button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 9 [NAV LINE LIST] and then push the wheel or the
left button.

[NAV LINE LIST (1/30)]

1 BACK (L=TOP)
001—002—003
004—005—006
— — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
0 NEXT (L=LAST)

NAV LINE LIST

4. To go to a next page choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left
button. To return to a previous page, choose 1 BACK and then push the
wheel or the left button.
5. Push the right button as many times as necessary to close the menu.

5-25
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.11.4 Erasing nav lines

30 nav lines may be entered. You may erase unnecessary nav lines as shown
below. A nav line which is currently in use cannot be erased.

Erasing individual nav lines

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and
then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the
left button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE SET] and then push the wheel or the
left button.

[NAV LINE SET]

1 BACK
2 NAV LINE NO. SELECT
00
3 NAV LINE NAME

4 NAV LINE ENTRY

— — —
— — —
— — —
— ——
— — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
— — —
5 CLEAR DATA

NAV LINE SET menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAV LINE NO. SELECT and then push the wheel
or the left button.
5. Use the wheel to enter nav line no., in two digits.
6. Roll the wheel to choose 5 CLEAR DATA.
7. Push the wheel or the left button to delete the nav line.
8. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5-26
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

Erasing all nav lines

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [DATA ERASE] and then push the wheel.
[DATA ERASE]

1 BACK
2 OWN TRACK
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT/
30%/50%/80%/ALL
3 TARGET TRACK*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT/
30%/50%/80%/ALL
4 MARK ALL ERASE
NO/YES
5 WPT ALL ERASE
NO/YES
6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE
7 OWN TRACK DELETE*
2POINTS/AREA
8 TARGET TRACK DELETE*
2POINTS/AREA * Not available on IMO or A type

DATA ERASE menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE.
5. Roll the wheel to choose YES and then push the wheel or the left button to
erase all nav lines and their data.
6. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5.11.5 Setting up nav lines

Nav lines can be set up as follows:
[NAV LINE•WPT (1/2)]

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and 1 BACK

then push the left button. 2 NAV LINE DATA
OFF/EXT DATA/
2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT]
INTERNAL DATA/
and then push the wheel or the left button. WPT MARK*
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAV LINE DATA 3 NAV LINE SELECT
and then push the wheel or the left button. 00
FORWARD/REVERSE
4. Roll the wheel to choose INTERNAL DATA and
4 SKIP NEXT WPT
then push the wheel or the left button. 5 NAV LINE WIDTH
5. Roll the wheel to choose 5 NAV LINE WIDTH. 0.00NM
6. Use the wheel to enter the width for the nav 6 [WPT SET]
7 [WPT LIST]
line, from 0.0-9.9(nm). A pair of red lines mark
8 [NAV LINE SET]
the width of the nav line. 9 [NAV LINE LIST]
0 NEXT
* Not available on IMO or A type
NAV LINE•WPT menu (1/2)

5-27
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

7. If you want to be alerted when own ship nears a waypoint by a preset

distance, choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel.

[NAV LINE•WPT (2/2)]

1 BACK
2 ARRIVAL WPT ALARM
OFF/ON
3 TURNING LINE
OFF/ON/REVISED
4 DISP WPT NO.
OFF/ON
5 DISP WPT NAME
OFF/ON

NAV LINE•WPT menu (2/2)

8. Use the wheel to choose ARRIVAL WPT ALARM and then push the wheel.
9. Choose ON and then push the wheel.
10. Roll the wheel to choose 3 TURNING LINE and then push the wheel or the
left button.
11. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate option and then push the wheel or the
left button.
OFF: Turns turning lines off.
ON: Use this setting when the vessel is not to correct cross track error to return
to course set, after arriving at turning line location.
REVISED: Use this setting when vessel is to return to course set after correcting
cross track error, after arriving at turning line location.
Note: Before using the turning line feature, set the Trial Maneuver function as
appropriate, on the ARP●AIS menu.
No cross track error Cross track error
correction at turning line correction at turning line

Nav
line
Turning line
Course
Turning line

Own ship

Track

TURNING LINE: ON TURNING LINE: REVISED

Turning line
12. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5-28
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.11.6 Displaying nav line, waypoint mark

Displaying internal nav lines
1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the
left button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAV LINE DATA and then push the wheel or the
left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose INTERNAL DATA and then push the wheel or the
left button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose 3 NAV LINE SELECT and then push the wheel or
the left button.
6. Use the wheel to enter the nav line number you want to display. Roll the
wheel to choose numeral and push it to set. Note that the same nav line no.
cannot be entered more than once.
7. Use FORWARD or REVERSE to choose the order to display waypoints on
the nav line. FORWARD to display them in original order or REVERSE to
display them in reverse order. Choose appropriate option and then push the
wheel.
8. To skip the next waypoint, roll the wheel to choose 2 SKIP NEXT WPT and
then push the wheel or the left button.
9. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

Displaying external nav lines

Nav lines from an external navigator can be displayed as below. RTE and WPL
sentences are necessary to display a nav line from a navigator.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the
left button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAV LINE DATA and then push the wheel or the
left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose EXT DATA and then push the wheel or the left
button.
5. Do the following as appropriate:
1) Set width (0.0-9.9 nm) of the nav line with 5 NAV LINE WIDTH.
2) Turn waypoint number display on or off with 4 DSP WPT NO (page 2 of NAV
LINE•WPT menu).
3) Set turning line with 3 TURNING LINE (page 2 of NAV LINE•WPT menu).
6. Push the right button two or three times depending on which page of the NAV
LINE•WPT menu you are using.

5-29
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

Waypoint mark (A, B, C and W types only)

The waypoint mark shows the location of a destination waypoint which is set on
a navigator. You may mark this location on the radar display by following the
procedure shown below.
350 000 010
340 020
330 030
320 040 Waypoint Mark
310 050

300 060

290 070

280 080

270 090

260 100

250 110

240 120
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170

Waypoint mark

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the
left button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAV LINE DATA and then push the wheel or the
left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose WPT MARK and then push the wheel or the left
button.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

5-30
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.12 Recording Data

The optional Card I/F Unit CU-200 is required to record or replay data. The
CU-200 has two card slots and you can connect two units, for a total of four card
slots.

5.12.1 Initializing memory (RAM) cards

Before you can use a memory (RAM) card it must be initialized. Formatting
prepares the recording surface of the card for use with the system, and deletes
all data recorded in the memory card. You can format cards you’ve used before,
however, in which case all prior information on them is erased.

1. Insert a blank memory card into the appropriate card slot in the Card I/F Unit.
1 2

+ +

Card Slot
Card I/F unit, front view
2. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 [CARD] and then push the wheel or the left button.
(Note that “WR” in the CARD menu means “Write.”)
[CARD (1/2)]

1 BACK
2 DRIVE SELECT
A/B/C/D*
3 [READ CARD]
4 [WR MARK]
5 [WR NAV LINE•WPT]
6 [WR OWN TRACK]
7 [WR TARGET TRACK]** * Drives available are shown.
8 [WR SETTING DATA] ** Not available on IMO type
9 [WR INSTALL DATA]
0 NEXT

CARD menu, page 1

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 DRIVE SELECT and then push the wheel or the
left button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate drive and then push the wheel or the
left button.
Note: If one unit is connected the drives are, from the left drive on the unit,
A=1 and B=2. In case of a second drive unit, its drives are, from the
left drive on the unit, C=1 and D=2.

1 2 1 2

+ A B + + C D +

One Unit 2nd Unit

5-31
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

6. Roll the wheel to choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left button.

[CARD (2/2)]

1 BACK
2 [FILE DELETE]
3 [CARD INITIALIZE]

CARD menu, page 2

7. Roll the wheel to choose 3 CARD INITIALIZE and then push the wheel or the
left button.
[CARD INITIALIZE]

1 BACK
2 INITIALIZE START

CARD INITIALIZE menu

8. Roll the wheel to choose 2 INITIALIZE START and then push the wheel or
the left button to initialize the card. The LED near the card flashes, the CARD
menu disappears and the message “FORMAT CARD” appears.

5.12.2 Recording data

When the memory becomes full, the oldest track is erased to make room for the
latest. Further, when the memory is full you cannot enter another mark or line
unless you erase unnecessary marks, lines or track. Thus you should save
important data to a memory card so as not to lose important data.

1. Insert initialized memory card into appropriate drive in Card I/F Unit.
2. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 [CARD] and then push the wheel or the left
button.
[CARD (1/2)]

1 BACK
2 DRIVE SELECT
A/B/C/D*
3 [READ CARD]
4 [WR MARK]
5 [WR NAV LINE•WPT] * Drives available are shown.
6 [WR OWN TRACK] ** Not available on IMO type
7 [WR TARGET TRACK]**
8 [WR SETTING DATA]
9 [WR INSTALL DATA]
0 NEXT

CARD menu

5-32
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

4. Roll the wheel to choose DRIVE SELECT and then push the wheel or the left
button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate drive and then push the wheel or the
left button.
6. Roll the wheel to choose data to record (one item among 4-9) and then push
the wheel or the left button. For example choose 4 WR MARK and then push
the wheel or the left button. The display then looks something like the one
below.

[WR MARK]

1 BACK
2 NAME (See note below.)
R0000000

CARD WRITE menu

Note: The file name is composed of a single alphabet, the file type, and
seven alphanumeric characters, the file number. The file type is
denoted as follows:
M: Mark
W: Waypoint, nav line
T: Own track
A: Target track
S: Setting data
I: Installation data
7. Use the wheel and the left button to enter file title. You may use up to seven
alphanumeric characters.
8. After entering the last digit of the file name the chosen item is recorded.

The message “WR CARD DATA” is shown during recording.

5-33
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.13 Replaying Data

Video plotter data (track, marks, etc.) may be replayed on the screen. This is
useful for analyzing past data.

1. Insert memory card into the appropriate slot in an I/F card unit.
2. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 [CARD] and then push the wheel or the left
button.
[CARD (1/2)]

1 BACK
2 DRIVE SELECT
A/B/C/D*
3 [READ CARD]
4 [WR MARK]
5 [WR NAV LINE•WPT] * Drives available are shown.
6 [WR OWN TRACK] ** Not available on IMO type
7 [WR TARGET TRACK]**
8 [WR SETTING DATA]
9 [WR INSTALL DATA]
0 NEXT

CARD menu
4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 DRIVE SELECT and then push the wheel or the
left button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose the drive where you inserted the memory card.
6. Push the wheel or the left button.
7. Roll the wheel to choose 3 READ CARD and push the wheel or the left
button.

[READ CARD (1/1)]

1 BACK
2 NAME
T200304109
.
.
.
9 NAME
R200307318
0 NEXT

READ CARD menu

8. Roll the wheel to choose the data to replay.
9. Push the wheel or the left button to replay chosen data.

The message “RD CARD DATA” is shown during playback. If you chose WR
INSTALL DATA, the prompt “POWER ON RESET” appears; turn the power off
and on again to read in installation data.

5-34
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

Note: Marks, own ship’s track and other ships’ tracks replayed from a memory
card are added to the data currently displayed. If, at replay, the memory is full,
the message “MEMORY FULL” appears. Press the [ALARM ACK] key to erase
the message. Memory capacity is as shown below.

Mark: 20,000 points

Own ship’s track: 20,000 points
Other ships’ tracks: 20,000 points

5.14 Deleting Files

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.
2. Roll the wheel to choose 6 [CARD] and then push the wheel or the left
button.
3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 DRIVE SELECT and then push the wheel or the
left button.
4. Roll the wheel to choose the appropriate drive and then push the wheel or
the left button.
5. Roll the wheel to choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left button.

[CARD]

1 BACK
2 FILE DELETE
3 CARD INITIALIZE

CARD menu, page 2

6. Roll the wheel to choose 2 FILE DELETE and then push the wheel or the left
button.

[FILE DELETE (1/1)]

1 BACK
2 T2003410
3 W2003126
4 A20035311
5 S20030129
6 S20030118

FILE DELETE display

7. Roll the wheel to choose the file to delete and then push the wheel or the left
button.

The message “DELETE CARD DATA” appears while data is being deleted.

5-35
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

(This page intentionally left blank.)

5-36
6. MAINTENANCE,
TROUBLESHOOTING
Periodic checks and maintenance are important for proper operation of any
electronic system. This chapter contains maintenance and troubleshooting
instructions to be followed to obtain optimum performance and the longest
possible life of the equipment. Before attempting any maintenance or
troubleshooting procedure please review the safety information below.

WARNING
Do not open the equipment.

Hazardous voltage which can

cause electrical shock exists
inside the equipment. Only
qualified personnel should
work inside the equipment.

Turn off the radar power

switch before servicing the
antenna unit. Post a warn-
ing sign near the switch
indicating it should not be
turned on while the antenna
unit is being serviced.

Prevent the potential risk of

being struck by the rotating
antenna and exposure to
RF radiation hazard.

Wear a safety belt and hard

hat when working on the
antenna unit.

Serious injury or death can

result if someone falls from
the radar antenna mast.

NOTICE
Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive sealant
or contact spray to coating or plastic
parts of the equipment.

Those items contain organic solvents that

can damage coating and plastic parts,
especially plastic connectors.

6-1
6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule

Regular maintenance is essential to good performance. A regular maintenance
program should be established and should at least include the items shown in
the table below.
Maintenance schedule

Interval Check point Check and measures Remarks

When The LCD will in Wipe the LCD carefully to Do not use chemical-based
needed time accumulate a prevent scratching, using cleaners to clean the LCD. They
layer of dust which tissue paper and an LCD can remove paint and markings.
tends to dim the cleaner. To remove stubborn
picture dirt, use an LCD cleaner,
wiping slowly with tissue
paper so as to dissolve the
dirt. Change paper frequently
so the dirt will not scratch the
LCD.
Processor unit Dust and dirt may be Do not use chemical-based
cleanliness removed with a soft cloth. cleaners to clean the processor
unit. They can remove paint and
markings.
3 to 6 Exposed nuts and Check for corroded or Sealing compound may be used
months bolts on antenna loosened nuts and bolts. If instead of paint. Apply a small
unit necessary, clean and repaint amount of grease between nuts
them thickly. Replace them if and bolts for easy removal in
heavily corroded. future.
Antenna radiator Check for dirt and cracks on Do not use chemical-based
radiator surface. Thick dirt cleaners for cleaning. They can
should be wiped off with soft remove paint and markings. If
cloth dampened with fresh you need to remove ice from the
water. If a crack is found, antenna unit, use a wooden
apply a slight amount of hammer or plastic head
sealing compound or hammer. Crack on the unit may
adhesive as a temporary cause water ingress, causing
remedy, then call for repair. serious damages to internal
circuits.
Terminal strips and Open antenna cover to check When closing antenna covers in
plugs in antenna terminal strip and plug position, be careful not to catch
unit connections inside. Also loose wires between covers and
(TECHNICIANS check the rubber gasket of unit.
only) antenna covers for
deterioration.
6 months to Terminal strips, Check for loose connections.
one year sockets, earth Check contacts and plugs for
terminal on proper seating, etc.
processor unit
(TECHNICIANS
only)

6-2
 6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 Life Expectancy of Major Parts

Parts Type Life Remarks
expectancy
Antenna Motor D8G-516 (24 rpm, X-band) Gear motor
D8G-571 (42 rpm, X-band) 10,000 h
GOB-8222 (18/22 rpm, X-band)
RM-6585 (22 rpm, X-band)
RM-7398 (21/26 rpm, S-band)
RM-7435 (21/26 rpm, S-band)
RM-9519 (45 rpm, S-band)
RM-9520 (45 rpm, S-band)
RM-9520 (45 rpm, S-band)
Carbon brush MG120-5X6X11 D8G (X-band) 2,000 h Check for wear when
replacing magnetron.
Replace if worn.
Magnetron MAF-1425B (X-band, 12 kW) 4,000 h Check no. of hours
MG4010 (X-band, 12 kW) 4,000 h used at Tx time. Reset
MG5436 (X-band, 25 kW) 4,000 h time after replacement.
MG5223F (S-band, 30 kW) 7,000 h
Backlight Unit for 201LHS2F 45,000 h (25°C) Replace when brilliance
Display Unit 30,000 h (50°C) is uneven or too low.
MU-201CR
Cold Cathode FLCL-23 50,000 h (25°C) Replace when brilliance
Fluorescent Lamp 35,000 h (50°C) is uneven or too low.
for Display Unit
MU-231CR
LCD assy. 856JAU1745V3 40,000 h
(MU-170C)
LCD assy. LQ190E1LX51 50,000 h
(MU-190)
LCD assy. LQ231U1LW32 50,000 h
(MU-231)
The life expectancy figures are typical values. Actual life depends on usage.

6-3
6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6.3 Replacing the Fuse

The fuse at the rear of the processor unit and the display unit protects the
equipment from overcurrent and equipment fault. If you cannot turn on the power,
first check the fuse. Find the cause of the trouble before replacing the fuse.

WARNING
Use the proper fuse.

Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage

to the equipment or cause fire.

Ship’s mains and fuse to use

Unit Power Fuse to use

24 VDC 20A
Processor Unit 100-115 VAC 10A
220-230 VAC 5A
100-230 VAC 2A
Display Unit MU-201CR
24 VDC 5A
100-230 VAC 2A
Display Unit MU-231CR
24 VDC 6A
12 VDC 10A
Display Unit MU-170C
24 VDC 5A
Display Unit MU-231 100-230 VAC 1.5A
Display Unit MU-190 100-230 VAC 1A

6.4 Replacement of Battery on GC Board

The battery installed on the GC (GyroCompass) Board inside the processor unit
preserves gyro data when the power is turned off. The life of the battery is about
five years. When the battery voltage is low, NG appears at the diagnostic test for
the GC Board. When this occurs, contact your dealer for replacement.

Battery on GC Board

Location of battery Battery type Code number

GC board CR 1/2 8.L 000-103-769

6-4
 6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6.5 Trackball Maintenance

If the cursor skips or moves abnormally, clean the trackball as below.

1. Turn the retaining ring counterclockwise 45° to unlock it.

Retaining Ring

2. Remove the retaining ring and ball.

3. Clean the ball with a soft, lint-free cloth, then blow carefully into the ball-cage
to dislodge dust and lint.
4. Look for a build-up of dirt on the metal rollers. If dirty, clean the rollers using a
cotton swab moistened lightly with isopropyl-rubbing alcohol.
5. Make sure that fluff from the swab is not left on the rollers.
6. Replace the ball and retaining ring. Be sure the retaining ring is not inserted
reversely.

6-5
6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6.6 Easy Troubleshooting

This section provides troubleshooting procedures that the user may follow to
restore normal operation. If you cannot restore normal operation, do not attempt
to check inside any unit. Any repair work is best left to a qualified technician.

Easy troubleshooting procedures

Problem Cause Remedy

Key beep inaudible Key beep turned off Adjust key beep level on the OPERATION menu,
referring to section 1.43.
Picture not updated or Video freeze Turn the power off and on again to restore normal
picture freeze. 30 operation.
seconds after the
picture freezes, the
buzzer sounds, the
[ALARM ACK] key
blinks and alarm
signal is output.
Power is ON but Brilliance is too low. Keyboard-type control unit: Turn BRILL control
nothing appears on clockwise to increase the brilliance.
monitor. Trackball-type control unit: Press any one of
F1-F4 for five seconds to increase the brilliance to
"50".
Marks, indications and Tx high voltage Reset the power to restore normal operation.
noise appear but no protection circuit has
echo activated.
Range changed but Defective range key Try to hit RANGE [+] and [-] keys (or RANGE box)
radar picture does not or video freeze up several times. (If unsuccessful, replacement of
change keypad may be required in case of the
keyboard-type control unit.) If that does not work
try to turn the power off and on again to see if the
problem might be video freeze up.
Only 2 PI lines when 6 Incorrect setting of Incorrect setting of PI line interval. Adjust PI line
lines are wanted PI line interval interval, referring to section 1.31.2. Also, the
setting for number of PI lines to display may be
inappropriate. Check the menu setting for number
of PI lines, referring to section 1.31.4.
Range rings are not Range rings turned Try turning on the range rings with 0 RINGS in the
displayed off MARK menu. If they do not appear, their brilliance
may be too low. Adjust their brilliance at page 1 of
the BRILL menu.
Tracked target not Poor definition of Adjust A/C SEA and A/C RAIN referring to section
tracked correctly targets in sea clutter 1.17 and 1.18.
Tuning adjusted but 2nd trace echo • Turn off the 2nd trace echo rejector, referring to
poor sensitivity rejector on or dirt on section 1.38.
radiator face • Clean the radiator face.

6-6
 6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6.7 Advanced-level Troubleshooting

This section describes how to cure hardware and software troubles that should
be carried out by qualified service personnel.

Note 1: This radar equipment contains complex modules in which fault

diagnosis and repair down to component level are not practicable by
users.
Note 2: When replacement of the SPU board is necessary, the previous settings
can be transferred to new SPU board as follows:
- Use the CU-200 to save settings to a RAM card.
- After replacing the SPU board, load the entire contents of the RAM
card to the radar, referring to section 5.12 for the procedure.

Advanced troubleshooting

Problem Probable causes or check Remedy

points
Power turned on but radar 1) Blown fuse. 1) Replace blown fuse.
does not operate at all
2) Mains voltage/polarity 2) Correct wiring and input voltage.
3) Power supply board 3) Replace power supply board.
Brilliance adjusted but no SPU board Replace SPU board.
picture
Antenna not rotating 1) Antenna drive 1) Replace antenna drive mechanism.
mechanism
2) Defective antenna drive 2) Press relay reset button.
motor relay (thermal
relay K2, 200/220/380,
440/100 VAC)
Data and marks not SPU board Replace SPU board.
displayed in Transmit
status

Adjust GAIN with A/C SEA 1) IF amplifier 1) Replace IF amplifier.

set at minimum. Marks and
2) Signal cable between 2) Check continuity and isolation of
indications appear but no
antenna and processor coaxial cable.
noise or echo
unit Note: Disconnect the plug and lugs
at both ends of coaxial cable before
checking it by ohmmeter.

3) Video amplifier board 3) Check video coax line for secure

connection. If connection is good,
replace SPU board.

(Continued on next page)

6-7
6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

Advanced troubleshooting (con’t)

Problem Probable causes or check Remedy

points
Marks, indications and 1) TX high voltage 1) Reset power to restore normal
noise appear but no echo protection circuit has operation.
(Transmission leak activated.
representing own ship
position is absent) 2) Magnetron 2) Check magnetron current.
Replace magnetron.

3) Modulator board 3) Replace modulator board.

4) SPU board 4) Replace SPU board.
Picture not updated or 1) Bearing signal generator 1) Check the connection of signal
picture freeze-up board (in antenna unit) cables.

2) SPU board 2) Replace SPU board.

3) Video freeze-up 3) Turn off and on the radar.
Incorrect orientation of 1) SPU board 1) The message HDG SIG MISSING
picture appears when the heading pulse is
not received during transmitting.
2) Gyro interface 2) Replace the gyro interface.

Cannot operate radar from SPU Board Replace SPU Board.

on-screen boxes
Radar is properly tuned but 1) Deteriorated magnetron 1) With the radar transmitting on 48 nm
poor sensitivity range, check magnetron current.
If current is below normal, magnetron
may be defective. Replace it.
2) Detuned MIC 2) Check MIC detecting current. If it is
below normal value, MIC may have
become detuned. MIC must be
tuned.
3) Dirt on radiator face 3) Clean the radiator surface.
4) Water ingress to the 4) Remove water from the feeder line.
waveguide or other
feeder line
5) Second trace echo 5) Disable the second-trace echo
rejection is ON rejector referring to section 1.38.
Range changed but radar 1) Defective range key 1) Try to hit RANGE [+] and [-] keys
picture not changing several times. If unsuccessful,
replacement of keypad may be
required.
2) SPU board 2) Replace SPU board.
3) Video freeze up 3) Turn off and on radar.

(Continued on next page)

6-8
 6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

Advanced troubleshooting (con’t)

Problem Probable causes or check Remedy

points
Interference rejector is SPU board Replace SPU board.
inoperative (interference
rejection level not
displayed)
Echo stretch is ineffective SPU board Replace SPU board.
(neither ES1, ES2 nor ES3
is displayed)
Range rings are not 1) Adjust the brilliance of 1) Replace associated circuit board if
displayed range rings on the unsuccessful.
BRILL menu to see if
intensity is increased
2) SPU board 2) Replace SPU board.
Poor discrimination in Sea clutter control not Improper setting of A/C SEA. If A/C SEA
range functioning properly is seen only at very close range,
suspect inaccurate frequency of
reference oscillator.
True motion presentation 1) Poor contact of MODE 1) Try to press MODE key a little
not working correctly key (full keyboard) harder.
2) Selection not accessed. 2) Press MODE key or operate
PRESENTATION MODE box until TM
appears.
3) Speed entry incorrect 3) Enter correct own ship speed
referring to section 1.13.
4) TM display inaccurate 4) Make sure that speed and compass
inputs are accurate.
Target not tracked Poor definition of targets in Adjust A/C SEA and A/C RAIN controls
correctly sea clutter referring to section 1.17 and 1.18.
Buttons on trackball Trackball module Replace trackball module.
module operated but no
response

6-9
6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Diagnostics
A diagnostic test program is provided to test major circuit boards in the control
unit, processor unit and card I/F unit. Note that the normal radar picture is lost
during this test.

Proceed as follows to execute the diagnostic test:

1. Left-click the MENU box to open the menu.

2. Select 9 [CUSTOMIZE•TEST].

[CUSTOMIZE•TEST]

1 BACK
2 [DATA BOX]
3 [F1]
4 [F2]
5 [F3]
6 [F4]
7 [OPERATION]
8 [TEST]

CUSTOMIZE•TEST menu
3. Select 8 [TEST].

[TEST]

1 BACK
2 [SELF TEST]
3 [TT TEST]

TEST menu
4. Select 2 [SELF TEST] .

[SELF TEST]

1 BACK
2 START

SELF TEST menu

5. Select 2 START to start the test.
In a few moments the results of the test are displayed and the buzzer
sounds continuously. The ROMs and RAMs of the SPU, RFC, KEYBOARD
(Control Unit), REMOTE (Trackball-only Control Unit) and CARD I/F UNIT
are checked for proper operation. OK appears for normal operation. If NG
(No Good) appears, corresponding components may be defective. Consult
your dealer. In the middle of the display the rpm of the antenna unit and
various voltages are displayed.

6-10
 6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

<SELF TEST>
PROGRAM No. ROM RAM DIP SW
SPU 0359204-03.** OK OK 0000
RFC 0359202-01.** OK OK
KEY 0359203-01.** OK OK
REMOTE1 0359203-01.** OK OK
REMOTE2
# CARD 0359209-01.** OK OK 0000

PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR

-12V -11.6
3.3V 3.3
5V 4.9
12V 11.6
SCANNER MOTOR 20.7

RF UNIT MONITOR
TEMPERATURE 27.3
TUNE IND 1.4
HV 527.9
R. MONITOR 1.6
MAG. CURRENT 1.5
HEATER 1.8
12V 11.9
-12V -11.8
5V 4.8
32V 31.8
TUNE OUT 19.2
TRIGGER FREQ 2273
ANT SPEED 21.6

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

*.**: Program Version No.

#: Installed card units are shown.

Self test results, keyboard test

6. The small squares and circles displayed at the bottom of screen are for
testing the control and keys on the control unit. As you operate controls and
keys, corresponding squares are highlighted, indicating that your control/key
operations are properly recognized. Numerals indicate the position of the
controls under check.

6-11
6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

7. Press the [F1] key to change the display. The buzzer stops and the screen
shows the sentences being input from external equipment (GPS1,
GPS2SPEED, HEADING and NAV DATA). Below is an example. The
sentences shown depend on your system settings.
<GPS1>
GGA
GLL
RMC
RMB
VTG
ZDA
DTM
BWR
BWC
<GPS2>
GGA
GLL
RMC
RMB
VTG
ZDA
DTM
BWR
BWC
<SPEED>
VBW
VHW
VDR
<HEADING>
HDT
<NAV DATA>
WPL
RTE
MWV
VWT
VWR
DPT
DBT
DBS
MTW
VDM
Sentence input display

6-12
 6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

8. Press the [F1] key again to show the data sentences input from AIS and INS.
<AIS>
VDO
VDM
<INS>
ZDA
GGA
GLL
OSD
DPT
MWV
DTM
FUGLL
PAESP
PAESC
PAESF
PLSPL
PLSPS
PAESW
PAESN
8. To terminate the test, press the [F1] key.

6-13
6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

This page intentionally left blank.

6-14
APPENDIX
1. Menu Tree
Main menu (accessed by MENU key or MENU box)
MENU key
or 1 ECHO 1 BACK
MENU box 2 2ND ECHO REJ (OFF, ON) 1 BACK
3 TUNE INITIALIZE 2 (PICTURE 1 (OFF, ON),
4 PM (OFF, ON) PICTURE 2 (OFF, ON),
5 SART (OFF, ON) PICTURE 3 (OFF, ON),
6 WIPER (OFF, 1, 2) PICTURE 4 (OFF, ON),
1
7 ECHO AREA (CIRCLE, WIDE, ALL)* NEAR (OFF, ON),
8 [PICTURE SELECT] FAR (OFF, ON),
9 STC RANGE (-10 to +10, 00) NEAR BUOY (OFF, ON),
2 MARK 1 BACK FAR BUOY (OFF, ON),
2 OWN SHIP MARK (OFF, MIN, SCALED) ROUGH SEA (OFF, ON),
3 STERN MARK (OFF, ON) SHIP (OFF, ON),
4 [PI LINE] 1 BACK HARBOR (OFF, ON),
2 PI LINE BEARING ( REL, TRUE)*
2 COAST (OFF, ON))
3
3 PI LINE (1, 2, 3,6* )
4
4 PI LINE MODE (PARALLEL , PERPENDIC.)*
5 RESET PI LINE (NO, YES)
5 ANCHOR WATCH (OFF, ON, 0.00NM)
6 DROP MARK (OFF, ON)
5
7 [INS MARK]* 1 BACK
2 USER CHART (OFF, ON)
3 CURVED EBL (OFF, ON)
4 CHART SYMBOL (OFF, ON)
5 NOTE BOOK (OFF, ON, DISPLAY)
6 ROUTE (OFF, CENT, ALL)
7 PREDICTOR (OFF, ON)
8 EBL OFFSET BASE (STAB GND , STAB HDG, STAB NORTH)
6
9 [EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET]* 1 BACK
2 EBL1 (REL, TRUE)
3 EBL2 (REL, TRUE)
1 BACK
4 VRM1 (NM, SM, km, kyd)
2 CURSOR (OFF, ON)
5 VRM2 (NM, SM, km, kyd) 3 FRONT HALF LENGTH
6 CURSOR BEARING (REL, TRUE) 4 REAR HALF LENGTH
7 CURSOR RANGE (NM, SM, km, kyd) 5 NET WIDTH
0 RING (OFF, ON) 1
6 ROTATE STEP
8 [CURSOR SHAPE]*
3 ALARM 1 BACK (360°, 32 POINTS)
2 TARGET ALARM MODE (IN, OUT)
3 TARGET ALARM LEVEL (1, 2, 3, 4)
4 WATCH ALARM (OFF, 6M, 10M, 12M, 15M, 20M)
5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL (OFF, LOW, MID, HIGH)
6 [ALARM OUT1] 1 BACK
7 [ALARM OUT2] 2 (TARGET ALARM, WATCH ALARM,
8 [ALARM OUT3] TT NEW TARGET, TT LOST TARGET,
9 [ALARM OUT4] TT CPA LIMIT, TT AUTO ACQ TGT FULL,
0 [PRIMARY ALARM] TT MAN ACQ TGT FULL, TT SYSTEM ERROR,
1 BACK AIS NEW TARGET, AIS LOST TARGET,
2 (TARGET ALARM, WATCH ALARM, TT NEW AIS CPA LIMIT, AIS TGT FULL, AZIMUTH, HEAD
TARGET, TT LOST TARGET, TT AUTO ACQ TGT LINE, TRIGGER, VIDEO, GYRO, LOG,
FULL, TT MAN ACQ TGT FULL, AIS NEW EPFS, XTE, ARRIVAL WPT, DEPTH,
TARGET, AIS LOST TARGET, AIS TGT FULL ALARM ACK OUT, OPERATOR FITNESS,
XTE, ARRIVAL WPT, DEPTH ANCHOR WATCH, ANCHOR WATCH, NO CPA/TCPA FOR AIS)
NO CPA/TCPA FOR AIS) 9 ALARM OUT POLARITY (NORMAL , INVERT)

(Continued on next page)

1
* Not available on IMO or A type.
2
* W type shows PI LINE1. Same choices as "PI LINE".
3
* W type shows PI LINE2. Same choices as "PI LINE".
4
* Appears when 3 PI LINE is set for other than "1".
Not shown on IMO or A type.
5
* When INS MARK is OFF, BARGE MARK menu appears.
7 [BARGE MARK] 1 BACK
2 BARGE MARK (OFF, ON)
3 BARGE SIZE (LENGTH and WIDTH)
4 ARRANGEMENT
6
* IMO and A types show 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING (REL, TRUE).

AP-1
APPENDIX

(Continued from previous page)

4 TT AIS 1 BACK
2 AZ STAB (STAB HDG , STAB NORTH)
3 AZ POLYGON (OFF, STAB GND, STAB HDG, STAB NORTH)
4 [TRIAL MANEUVER] 1 BACK
2 TRIAL (OFF, STATIC, DYNAMIC)
3 TRIAL SPEED RATE ( 0-99 kn, 0.00-99.99 kn/s, two sets)
4 TRIAL TURN RATE ( 0-99 kn,0.00-99.99 kn/s, two sets)
5 TRIAL TGT DATA ( ACTUAL , TRIAL)
5 [TT AIS SYMBOL] 1 BACK
2 TT AIS SYMBOL COLOR (RED, GRN, BLU, CYA, MAG, WHT)
3 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT (000.0°-720.0°/min)
4 TT PAST POSN POINTS (5, 10)
5 AIS PAST POSN POINTS (5,10)
6 AIS SCALED SYMBOL (OFF, ON)
6 [CPA AUTO ACTIVATE] 1 BACK
2 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON, 0-99 NM)
3 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON, 0.0-9.9 kn)
4 EXCEPT CLASS B (OFF, ON)
5 MIN SHIP LENGTH (OFF, ON, 0-999 m)
7 [AIS DISP FILTER] 1 BACK
2 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON, 0-99 NM)
3 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON, 0.0-9.9 kn)
4 EXCEPT CLASS B (OFF, ON)
5 MIN SHIP LENGTH (OFF, ON, 0-999 m)
8 [AIS LOST FILTER] 1 BACK
2 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON, 0-99 NM)
3 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON, 0.0-9.9 kn)
4 EXCEPT CLASS B (OFF, ON)
5 MIN SHIP LENGTH (OFF, ON, 0-999 m)
9 [TT LOST FILTER] 1 BACK
2 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON)
3 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON)
0 [ASSOCIATION] 1 BACK
2 ASSOCIATION TARGET (OFF, AIS, TT)
3 GAP (0.000-0.999(nm))
4 RANGE (0.000-0.999(nm))
5 BEARING (00.0-99.9°)
6 SPEED (0.0-9.9(kn))
7 COURSE (00.0-99.9°)
5 PLOTTER 1 BACK
2 CHART COLOR (GRN, YEL, CYA, ORANGE, GRAY)*
3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL (OFF, DRAW, 10S, 30S, 1M, 2M, 3M, 6M, 15M)
4 OWN TRACK COLOR (RED, GRN, BLU, YEL, CYA, MAG, WHT)
5 TGT TRACK INTERVAL (OFF, DRAW, 10S, 30S, 1M, 2M, 3M, 6M, 15M)*
6 TGT TRACK COLOR (RED, GRN, BLU, YEL, CYA, MAG, WHT)*
7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN (OFF, ON)
8 [DATA ERASE] 1 BACK
2 OWN TRACK (RED, GRN, BLU, YEL, CYA, MAG,
WHT, 30%, 50%, 80%, ALL)
3 TARGET TRACK (RED, GRN, BLU, YEL, CYA, MAG,
(Continued on next page) WHT, 30%, 50%, 80%, ALL)**
4 MARK ALL ERASE (NO, YES)
5 WPT ALL ERASE (NO, YES)
6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE (NO, YES)
* Not available on IMO type radar 7 OWN TRACK DELETE (2POINTS, AREA )**
** Not available on IMO or A type radar 8 TARGET TRACK DELETE (2POINTS, AREA )**

AP-2
 APPENDIX

(Continued from previous page)

9 [DISPLAY] 1 BACK
2 GRID (OFF, L/L )
3 OWN TRACK (OFF, ON)
4 TARGET TRACK (OFF, ON)*
5 MARK (OFF, ON)
6 LAND DENSITY (OFF, ON)*
7 PLACE NAME (OFF, ON)*
8 COAST LINE (OFF, ON)
9 CONTOUR LINE (OFF, ON, DEPTH)
0 NEXT 1 BACK
2 NAV LINE(MAP) (OFF, ON)
3 DANGER HIGHLIGHT (OFF, ON)
4 PROHIBITED AREA (OFF, ON)
5 BUOY (OFF, ON)
0 AUTO TARGET TRACK (OFF, ON)*

6 CARD 1 BACK
2 DRIVE SELECT
3 READ CARD
4 WR MARK
5 WR NAV LINE WPT
6 WR OWN TRACK
7 WR TARGET TRACK*
8 WR SETTING DATA
9 WR INSTALL DATA

0 NEXT 1 BACK
2 FILE DELETE
3 CARD INITIALIZE
7 NAV DATA 1 BACK
2 DEPTH (OFF, m, ft)
3 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE (10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500)
4 DEPTH MARK (000 - 500)
5 CURRENT (OFF, ON)
6 WIND (OFF, m/s, kn, RELATIVE, TRUE THEORETICAL, TRUE NORTH)
7 TEMP (OFF, ON)
8 DATE-TIME (OFF, UTC, LOCAL)
9 LOCAL TIME ADJ (00:00 - +13:30)
0 WPT DATA (OFF, REL, TRUE)

8 NAV LINE WPT 1 BACK

2 NAV LINE DATA SOURCE (OFF, EXT DATA, INTERNAL DATA, WPT*)
3 NAV LINE SELECT (Enter nav line no., FORWARD, REVERSE)
4 SKIP NEXT WPT
5 NAV LINE WIDTH (0.00 - 9.99 (NM))
6 [WPT SET] 1 BACK
2 WPT NO. SELECT
3 WPT NAME
4 WPT L/L
5 CLEAR DATA (NO, YES)
* Not available on IMO type
(Continued on next page)

AP-3
 APPENDIX

(Continued from previous page)

7 [WPT LIST]
8 [NAV LINE SET] 1 BACK
2 NAV LINE NO. SELECT
3 NAV LINE NAME
4 NAV LINE ENTER
5 CLEAR DATA
9 [NAV LINE LIST]
0 NEXT 1 BACK
2 ARRIVAL WPT ALARM (OFF, ON(0.00-9.99 nm))
3 TURNING LINE (OFF, ON, REVISED)
4 DISP WPT NO. (OFF, ON)
5 DISP WPT NAME (OFF, ON)

9 CUSTOMIZE 1 BACK
TEST 2 [DATA BOX] 1 BACK
3 NAV DATA (OFF, ON)
4 ZOOM (OFF, 2TIMES, 3TIMES)
5 ZOOM DISPLAY (STAB GND, STAB HDG, STAB NORTH, TT TRACK)
6 TARGET DATA (1BOX, 2BOX, 3BOX, LARGE)

3 [F1] 1 BACK
4 [F2] 2 [ECHO] 1 BACK
5 [F3] 2 (PICTURE, IR, ES, EAV, NOISE
6 [F4] REJ, ANT SELECT, PULSE LENGTH,
A/C SEA SELECT, AUTO RAIN
Default settings:
SELECT, TUNE SELECT, ANT
F1: IR
HEIGHT, SEA CONDITION, 2ND
F2: ES
ECHO REJ, PM, SART, WIPER)
F3: AUTO RAIN SELECT
F4: HL OFF 3 [STD KEY] 1 BACK
2 (ALARM ACK, STBY TX, HL
OFF, EBL OFFSET, MODE, OFF
CENTER, CU TM RESET, PI
LINE, VECTOR TIME, VECTOR
MODE, TARGET LIST, TRAIL,
BRILL, MARK, MENU, RANGE
UP, RANGE DOWN, ACQ,
TARGET DATA, TARGET CANCEL)
4 [TT AIS] 1 BACK
2 (DISP TT, DISP AIS, TARGET
DATA & ACQ, PAST POSN
INTERVAL, REF MARK, CPA LIMIT,
CPA, TCPA, AZ1, AZ2, TARGET LIST
SORT, TRIAL MANEUVER, ASSOCIATION,
AIS MESSAGE, TRIAL MODE CHANGE,
AIS SCALED SYMBOL)
5 [OPERATION] 1 BACK
2 (ECHO COLOR, PALETTE,
RING, ALARM1, ALARM2, WATCH
ALARM RESET, ZOOM, MARK
(Continued on next page) DELETE, OWN TRACK DELETE,
TGT TRACK DELETE*, CHART ALIGN,
DISPLAY SELECT, MOB, USER DEFAULT
TLL, ANCHOR WATCH, COLOR SHIFT,
ICON DISP, OWN TRK ALL ERASE,
* B, C and W types
TGT TRK ALL ERASE, MARK ALL ERASE,
DROP MARK)

AP-4
 APPENDIX

(Continued from previous page)

6 [PICTURE] 1 BACK
2 (PICTURE1, PICTURE 2, PICTURE 3, PICTURE 4,
NEAR, FAR, NEAR BUOY, FAR BUOY, ROUGH SEA, SHIP,
HARBOR, COAST)

7 [OPERATION] 1 BACK
2 WHEEL DRIVE (NORMAL , REVERSE)
3 KEY BEEP (OFF, LO, MID, HI)
4 REMOTE KEY (F*-KEY, DISPLAY SELECT)
1
5 POPUP GUIDANCE (OFF, ON)*
6 OWN SHIP VECTOR (OFF, HDG, COURSE)
7 STERN-UP (OFF, ON)
8 SHUTTLE FERRY (OFF, MODE1, MODE2)
0 NEXT 1 BACK
2 USER DEFAULT BACKUP
(F-KEY, HOLD, STORE)
3 VRM TTG
(OFF/ 1/ 2/ 1+2)

8 [TEST] 1 BACK
2 [SELF TEST]
3 [TT TEST]

*1 Not available on IMO or A type

AP-5
APPENDIX

Pop-up menus of on-screen boxes

[HDG MENU] [SPD MENU] [CURSOR MENU]
1 HDG SOURCE 1 SHIP SPEED 2
AD-10 /SERIAL LOG(BT)/LOG(WT)/ TARGET DATA & ACQ/
2 GC-10 SETTING GPS/MANUAL/REF TARGET CANCEL/
000.0° 2 MANUAL SPEED TT TGT DATA & ACQ/
0.0kn TARGET TRACK ON*3/
HDG menu 3 SET DRIFT TARGET TRACK OFF*3/
OFF/ON REF MARK/
EBL OFFSET/
OFFCENTER/
SPEED menu ZOOM/
MARK DELETE/
OWN TRACK DELETE/
TGT TRACK DELETE*3/
CHART ALIGN
TRAIL ERASER*3,*4/
8
9 CURSOR*3,*4/
SMALL/LARGE

* Not available on IMO type

CURSOR menu

[OS POSN MENU] [TT TARGET MENU] [AIS TARGET MENU]

1 NAV AID 1 TT SELECT 1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS

GPS1/GPS2/ MANUAL 100/ NO/YES
DEAD RECKONING/ AUTO 25/ 2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS
LAN AUTO 50/ NO/YES
2 MANUAL L/L AUTO 75/ 3 AUTO DISP MESSAGE
00°00.000 N AUTO 100 OFF/ON
000°00.000 W 2 ALL CANCEL 4 [RECEIVED MESSAGES]
3 SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT NO/YES 5 [TRANSMIT MESSAGE]
OFF/ON 3 REF TARGET VECTOR 6 [VOYAGE DATA]
OFF/ON 7 [STATIC DATA]
OS POSN menu 8 [AIS ALM MESSAGES]
TT TARGET menu
AIS TARGET menu

[TRANSMIT MESSAGE] [VOYAGE DATA] [STATIC DATA]

1 BACK
1 BACK 1 BACK
TYPE OF SHIP
2 ADDRESS TYPE 2 NAVIGATION STATUS 000
ADDRESSED/BROADCAST 00 ALL SHIPS OF
3 MESSAGE TYPE 3 ETA THIS TYPE
SAFETY/BINARY 00/000/0000 00:00 CALL SIGN
4 MMSI NO. 000000000 4 DESTINATION
5 CHANNEL NAME
A/B/A or B/A and B 5 DRAUGHT
6 OPEN FILE 1 00.0m EXT GPS ANT POSN
7 SAVE FILE 1 6 CREW A: 000m B: 000m
8 EDIT 0002 C: 00m D: 00m
9 TRANSMIT MESSAGE
VOYAGE DATA menu STATIC DATA menu
TRANSMIT MESSAGE menu

[TARGET LIST MENU] [TRAIL MENU] [TRAIL COLOR]

1 SORT BY 1 TRAIL MODE 1 BACK

CPA /TCPA/BCR/BCT/ REL /TRUE 2 COLOR SHIFT
RANGE/SPEED 2 TRAIL GRAD NO/YES
SINGLE /MULTI 3 TRAIL COLOR
3 NARROW TRAIL *3, *4 1: FUCHSIA
TGT LIST menu OFF/1/2 2: MAROON
4 TRAIL LEVEL 3: RED
*1 Shown when 12H, 24H or 48H is 1/2/3/4 4: PURPLE
chosen at 8 TRAIL LENGTH. 5 TRAIL RESTART 5: YELLOW
OFF/ON 6: LIME
*2 B and W types. 48H not 6 TRAIL COPY 7: GREEN
available on W type. OFF/ON 8: OLIVE
*3 Not available on IMO type 7 OS TRAIL 9: TEAL
OFF/1/2
*4 Not available on A type 8 TRAIL LENGTH* 2
10: CYAN
11: BLUE
*5 Not available on W type NORMAL /12/24H/48H 12: NAVY
9 TRAIL HIDE*1,*3,*4/
START: 00:00 TRAIL COLOR menu
END: 00:00
TRAIL menu 0 [TRAIL COLOR]*3,*4, *5

AP-6
 APPENDIX

[BRILL1 MENU (1/2)] [BRILL1 MENU (2/2)]

1 ECHO COLOR 1 BACK

YEL/GRN/ 2 BEARING CURSOR
WHT/COLOR* 3 EBL
2 PALETTE 4 VRM
DAY-GRY/DAY-BLU/ 5 PI LINE
DUSK-GRY/DUSK BLU/ 6 TT SYMBOL
NIGHT-GRY/NIGHT-BLU 7 AIS SYMBOL
3 PANEL DIMMER 8 L/L GRID
4 CHARACTER 9 MARK
5 CURSOR 0 CHART*
6 ECHO
7 TRAIL BRILL menu, page 2
8 HL
9 RING
0 NEXT

BRILL menu, page 1

[PICTURE MENU] [PULSE MENU]

1 INT REJECT 1 BACK

OFF/1/2/3 2 0.5NM
2 ECHO STRETCH S1/S2
OFF/1/2/3 3 0.75NM
3 ECHO AVERAGE S1/S2/M1
OFF/1/2/3 4 1.5NM
4 NOISE REJ S1/S2/M1
OFF/ON 5 3NM
5 AUTO STC S2/M1/M2/M3
OFF/ON 6 6NM
6 AUTO RAIN M1/M2/M3/L
OFF/1/2/3/4 7 12-24NM
7 VIDEO CONTRAST M2/M3/L
1/2/3/4 A/B/C
8 [PULSE] PULSE menu
9 [CONDITION]
0 DEFAULT
NO/SAVE/FACTORY/
DEFAULT

PICTURE menu
[CONDITION MENU]
[ANT SELECT] [MARK MENU]
1 BACK
ANT NO 1: X-BAND 1 ORIGIN MARK STAB 2 SEA CONDITION
12 MAIN TOP GND/SEA 1/2/3/4/5
ANT NO 2: X-BAND 2 MARK KIND 3 ANT HEIGHT
12 MAIN TOP ORIGIN MARK(No. )/ 5/7.5/10/15/20/
ANT NO 3: ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/ 25/30/25/30/35/40/45/
MAP MARK / more 50 m
ANT NO 4: WP 1~50/ 4 LOW LEVEL ECHO
WP 51~ 100/ 0
OWN RADAR NO: 2 WP 101~150/
1 DISP ANT1
WP 151~ 198/ CONDITION menu
MASTER
OWN SHIP SHAPE
2 DISP ANT2
MASTER 8 MARK POSN
8 STORE INTER-SW CURSOR/OS/L/L
OFF/ON 00°000.00 N
9 SUB MONITOR* 000°000.00 E
OFF/ON 9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
ANTENNA SELECT menu 0 MAP MARK COLOR*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT * Not available on IMO or A type
MARK menu

AP-7
APPENDIX

2. Digital Interface
Input sentences (RP Board, J4)
ABK, ACK, BWC*, BWR*, DBS, DBT, DPT, DTM, GGA, GLL, GNS, HDT, MTW, MWV, RMB,
RMC, RTE, THS, VBW, VDR, VHW, VTG, VWR, VWT, WPL, ZDA, !AIVDM, !AIVDO,
$AIALR

Output sentences
ABM, ALR, BBM, OSD, RSD, TLB, TLL*, TTD, TTM, VSD
*: Not available on IMO radar

Data reception
Data is received in serial asynchronous form in accordance with the standard referenced in
IEC 61162-2.

The following parameters are used:

Baud rate: 38,400 bps: HDT, !AIVDM, !AIVDO and $AIALR. All other sentences: 4800 bps
Data bits: 8 (D7 = 0), Parity: none, Stop bits: 1

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

Start Stop
bit Data bits bit

Validity and integrity of input data (mode indicator)

Data HDG Latitude and Longitude SPD COG/SOG WP
indication
GREEN color GNS-A,D*
(normal data) GGA-1 2,3,4,5* BWC-A,D
THS-A GLL-A,D and (status: A)* VBW-A BWR-A,D
HDT RMC- A,D and (status: A)* VHW VTG-A,D RMB-A,D and status A
RED color GNS-E,M,S,N
(invalid data) GGA-0,6,7,8
GLL-E,M,S,N or (status:V)
RMC-E,M,S,N or (status:V) VBW-V VTG-E,M,S,N
BWC-E,M,S,N
BWR-E,M,S,N
***.* THS-E,M,S,N RMB-E,M,S,N or (status:V)
* Low or doubtful integrity can occur when the GBS sentence gives RAIM error rate of 10 m
or higher and "Age of differential GPS data" in GGA and GNS sentences is 10 seconds or
higher. In this case the ship's latitude and longitude indications are shown in yellow.

AP-8
 APPENDIX

Data sentences
Data used is shown in bold italics.

Input sentences
ABK - UAIS Addressed and binary broadcast acknowledgement

$--ABK,xxxxxxxxx,x,x.x,x,x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +--- 6
| | | | +----- 5
| | | +------- 4
| | +---------- 3
| +------------- 2
+------------------- 1

1. MMSI of the addressed AIS unit

2. AIS channel of reception
3. Message type
4. Message sequence number
5. Type of acknowledgement
6. Checksum

ACK – Acknowledge alarm

$--ACK,x.x,x.*hh<CR><LF>
| +------------ 2
+------------------- 1

1. Local alarm number (identifier)

2. Checksum

BWC - Bearing and distance to waypoint (Not available on IMO radar)

$--BWC, hhmmss.ss, llll.ll, a yyyyy.yy, a, x.x, T, x.x, M, x.x, N, c--c, a*hh<CR><LF>

Checksum
Mode indicator
(see note 1)
Waypoint ID
Distance, nautical miles
Bearing, degrees magnetic
Bearing, degrees true
Waypoint longitude, E/W
Waypoint latitude, N/S
UTC of observation

NOTE 1: Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
E = Estimated (dead reckoning)
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
The Mode indicator field shall not be a null field.

AP-9
APPENDIX

BWR - Bearing and distance to waypoint - rhumb line (Not available on IMO radar)

$--BWR,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,c--c,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +---- 9
| | | | | | | | | | | | +------ 8
| | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 7
| | | | | | | | | +--+------------- 6
| | | | | | | +--+------------------- 5
| | | | | +--+------------------------- 4
| | | +-----+------------------------------- 3
| +-----+------------------------------------------- 2
+---------------------------------------------------------- 1

1. UTC of observation
2. Waypoint latitude, N/S
3. Waypoint longitude, E/W
4. Bearing, degrees true
5. Bearing, degrees magnetic
6. Distance, nautical miles
7. Waypoint ID
8. Mode indicator (see note)
9. Checksum

NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
E = Estimated (dead reckoning)
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
The Mode indicator field shall not be a null field.

AP-10
 APPENDIX

DTM - Datum reference

$--DTM,ccc,a,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,ccc*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | +--- 7
| | | | | | | +------ 6
| | | | | | +---------- 5
| | | | +--+------------- 4
| | +---+------------------- 3
| +------------------------- 2
+---------------------------- 1

1. Local datum W84 - WGS84

W72 - WGS72
S85 - SGS85
P90 - PE90
999 - User defined
IHO datum code
2. Local datum subdivision code
3. Lat offset, min, N/S
4. Lon offset, min, E/W
5. Altitude offset, m
6. Reference datum W84 - WGS84
W72 - WGS72
S85 - SGS85
P90 - PE90
7. Checksum

DBS - Depth below surface

$--DBS,x.x,f,x.x,M,x.x,F*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 4
| | | | +--+----------- 3
| | +--+----------------- 2
+--+---------------------- 1

1. Water depth, feet

2. Water depth, m
3. Water depth, fathoms
4. Checksum

DBT - Depth below transducer

$--DBT,x.x,f,x.x,M,x.x,F*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 4
| | | | +--+----------- 3
| | +--+----------------- 2
+--+---------------------- 1

1. Water depth, feet

2. Water depth, m
3. Water depth, fathoms
4. Checksum

AP-11
APPENDIX

DPT - Depth
$--DPT,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | |
| | | +----- 4
| | +--------- 3
| +------------ 2
+---------------- 1

1. Water depth relative to transducer, in meters

2. Offset from transducer, in meters (see notes 1 and 2)
3. Maximum range scale in use
4. Checksum

NOTE1 "positive"=distance from transducer to water-line.

"-"=distance from transducer to keel.
NOTE2 For IEC applications the offset should always be applied
so as to provide depth relative to the keel.
GGA - Global positioning system fix data
$--GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +-- 11
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +---- 10
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 9
| | | | | | | | | | +---+------------ 8
| | | | | | | | +---+------------------ 7
| | | | | | | +------------------------- 6
| | | | | | +---------------------------- 5
| | | | | +------------------------------- 4
| | | +----+--------------------------------- 3
| +---+--------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------------- 1

1. UTC of position
2. Latitude, N/S
3. Longitude, E/W
4. GPS quality indicator (see note)
5. Number of satellite in use,00-12, may be different from the number in view
6. Horizontal dilution of precision
7. Antenna altitude above/below mean sea level, m
8. Geoidal separation, m
9. Age of differential GPS data
10. Differential reference station ID, 0000-1023
11. Checksum
NOTE
0 = fix not available or invalid
1 = GPS SPS mode, fix valid
2 = differential GPS, SPS mode, fix valid
3 = GPS PPS mode, fix valid (GPS_PPS)
4 = Real Time Kinetic. Satellite system used in RTK mode with fixed integers (GPS_RTK_I)
5 = Float RTK. Satellite system used in RTK mode with floating fingers (GPS_RTK_F)
6 = Estimated (dead reckoning) mode
7 = Manual input mode
8 = Simulator mode
The GPS quality indicator shall not be a null field.
Position data shown in green in case of 1 and 5; red in case of "0" and "6-8".

AP-12
 APPENDIX

GLL - Geographic position, latitude/longitude

$--GLL,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | +------- 6
| | | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | | +----------- 4
| | | | +---------------- 3
| | +------+----------------------- 2
+---+----------------------------------- 1

1. Latitude, N/S
2. Longitude, E/W
3. UTC of position
4. Status: A=data valid, V=data invalid
5. Mode indicator (see note)
6. Checksum

NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
E = Estimated (dead reckoning)
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid

The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field shall be
set to V=invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for A=Autonomous and
D=Differential. The positioning system Mode indicator and Status field shall not
be null fields.
Position data shown in green in case of A=data valid and A and D; red in
case of V=data invalid, E, M, S and N.

GNS - GNSS fix data

$--GNS,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,c--c,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 11
| | | | | | | | | | | +------ 10
| | | | | | | | | | +---------- 9
| | | | | | | | | +-------------- 8
| | | | | | | | +------------------ 7
| | | | | | | +---------------------- 6
| | | | | | +------------------------- 5
| | | | | +------------------------------ 4
| | | +-------+--------------------------------- 3
| +---+--------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------------- 1

1. UTC of position
2. Latitude, N/S
3. Longitude, E/W
4. Mode indicator
5. Total number of satllite in use,00-99
6. HDOP
7. Antenna altitude, metres, re:mean-sea-level(geoid)
8. Geoidal separation
9. Age of differential data
10. Differential reference station ID
11. Checksum

AP-13
APPENDIX

HDT - Heading, true

$--HDT,x.x,T*hh<CR><LF>
| | |
| | +--------- 2
+----+----------- 1

1. Heading, degrees true

2. Checksum

MTW - Water temperature

$--MTW,x.x,C*hh<CR><LF>
| | |
| | +--------- 2
+--+----------- 1

1. Temperature, degrees C
2. Checksum

MWV - Wind speed and angle

$--MWV,x.x,a,x.x,a,A*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +--------- 6
| | | | +----------- 5
| | | +------------- 4
| | +---------------- 3
| +------------------- 2
+---------------------- 1

1. Wind angle, 0 to 359 (degrees)

2. Reference, R=relative, T=true
3. Wind speed
4. Wind speed units, KN/M/N
5. Status, A=data valid, V=data invalid
6. Checksum

Data is used in case of A=data valid.

Data is not used in case of V=data invalid.

AP-14
 APPENDIX

RMB - Recommended minimum navigation information

$--RMB,A,x.x,a,c--c,c--c,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x.x,x.x,x.x,A,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 13
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +----- 12
| | | | | | | | | | | | +------- 11
| | | | | | | | | | | +---------- 10
| | | | | | | | | | +-------------- 9
| | | | | | | | | +------------------ 8
| | | | | | | +-----+--------------------- 7
| | | | | +----+--------------------------------- 6
| | | | +--------------------------------------------- 5
| | | +-------------------------------------------------- 4
| | +------------------------------------------------------ 3
| +--------------------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------------ 1

1. Data status: A=data valid, V=navigation receiver warning

2. Cross track error (see note 2) nautical miles
3. Direction to steer L/R
4. Origin waypoint ID
5. Destination waypoint ID
6. Destination waypoint latitude,N/S
7. Destination waypoint longitude,E/W
8. Range to destination, nautical miles (see note 1)
9. Bearing to destination, degrees true
10. Destination closing velocity, knots
11. Arrival status: A=arrival circle entered or perpendicular passed
12. Mode indicator (see note 3)
13. Checksum

NOTES
1 If range to destination exceeds 999.9 nautical miles, display 999.9.
2 If cross track error exceeds 9.99 nautical miles, display 9.99.
3 Positioning system Mode indicator:
A = Autonomous
D = Differential
E = Estimated (dead reckoning)
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid

The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field
shall be set to V=invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for
A=Autonomous and D=Differential. The positioning system Mode indicator
and Status field shall not be null fields.

Data is used in case of A=data valid and A and D. Data is not used in
case of V=data invalid, E, M, S and N.

AP-15
APPENDIX

RMC - Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data

$--RMC,hhmmss.ss,A,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x.x,x.x,xxxxxx,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 10
| | | | | | | | | | | +----- 9
| | | | | | | | | +--+------- 8
| | | | | | | | +--------------- 7
| | | | | | | +--------------------- 6
| | | | | | +------------------------- 5
| | | | +---+---------------------------- 4
| | +---+---------------------------------------- 3
| +--------------------------------------------------- 2
+---------------------------------------------------------- 1

1. UTC of position fix

2. Status: A=data valid, V=navigation receiver warning
3. Latitude, N/S
4. Longitude, E/W
5. Speed over ground, knots
6. Course over ground, degrees true
7. Date: dd/mm/yy
8. Magnetic variation, degrees E/W
9. Mode indicator(see note)
10. Checksum

NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
E = Estimated (dead reckoning)
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid

The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field
shall be set to V=invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for
A=Autonomous and D=Differential. The positioning system Mode indicator
and Status field shall not be null fields.

Data is used in case of A=data valid and A and D. Data is not used in
case of V=data invalid, E, M, S and N.

AP-16
 APPENDIX

RTE - Route
$--RTE,x.x,x.x,a,c--c,c--c,.....,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 7
| | | | | +------------ 6
| | | | +---------------------- 5
| | | +--------------------------- 4
| | +------------------------------- 3
| +---------------------------------- 2
+-------------------------------------- 1

1. Total number of messages being transmitted

2. Message number
3. Message mode:
c=complete route, all waypoints
w=working route, first listed waypoint is "FROM",
second is "TO" and remaining reset of route
4. Route identifier
5. Waypoint identifier
6. Waypoint "n" identifier
7. Checksum

THS - True heading and status

$--THS,xxx.x,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | ---------------- 3
| | ---------------- 2
+----------- 1

1. Heading, degrees true

2. Status
A: Autonomous
E: Estimated (dead reckoning)
M: Manual input
S: Simulator mode
V: Data not valid
3. Checksum

AP-17
APPENDIX

VBW - Dual ground/water speed

$--VBW,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,A,x.x,A*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | +--- 11
| | | | | | | | | +----- 10
| | | | | | | | +-------- 9
| | | | | | | +----------- 8
| | | | | | +-------------- 7
| | | | | +----------------- 6
| | | | +-------------------- 5
| | | +------------------------- 4
| | +--------------------------- 3
| +------------------------------ 2
+---------------------------------- 1

1. Longitudinal water speed, knots

2. Transverse water speed, knots
3. Status: water speed, A=data valid* V=data invalid**
4. Longitudinal ground speed, knots
5. Transverse ground speed, knots
6. Status: ground speed, A=data valid* V=data invalid**
7. Stern transverse water speed, knots
8. Status: stern water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
9. Stern transverse ground speed, knots
10. Status: stern ground speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
11. Checksum

*= Data shown in green

**= Data shown in red

VHW - Water speed and heading

$--VHW,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | | | +--+----------- 4
| | | | +--+----------------- 3
| | +---+----------------------- 2
+---+----------------------------- 1

1. Heading, degrees true

2. Heading, degrees magnetic
3. Speed, knots
4. Speed, km/h
5. Checksum

VDR - Set and drift

$--VDR,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 4
| | | | +--+----------- 3
| | +--+----------------- 2
+--+----------------------- 1

1. Direction, degrees true

2. Direction, degrees magnetic
3. Current speed, knots
4. Checksum

AP-18
 APPENDIX

VSD - UAIS Voyage static data

$--VSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,c--c,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | +--- 10
| | | | | | | | +------ 9
| | | | | | | +---------- 8
| | | | | | +------------- 7
| | | | | +---------------- 6
| | | | +----------------------- 5
| | | +------------------------------ 4
| | +----------------------------------- 3
| +--------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------- 1

1. Type of ship and cargo category, 0 to 255

2. Maximum present static draught, 0 to 25.5 Meters
3. Persons on-board, 0 to 8191
4. Destination, 1-20 characters
5. Estimated UTC of arrival at destination
6. Estimated day of arrival at destination, 00 to 31(UTC)
7. Estimated month of arrival at destination, 00 to 12(UTC)
8. Navigational status, 0 to 15
9. Regional application flags, 0 to 15
10. Checksum

VTG - Course over ground and ground speed

$--VTG,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | +------- 6
| | | | | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | | | +--+----------- 4
| | | | +--+----------------- 3
| | +--+----------------------- 2
+--+----------------------------- 1

1. Course over ground, degrees true

2. Course over ground, degrees magnetic
3. Speed over ground, knots
4. Speed over ground, km/h
5. Mode indicator (see note)
6. Checksum

NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
E = Estimated (dead reckoning)
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid

The positioning system Mode indicator field shall not be a null field.
Data shown in green in case of A and D; red in case of E, M, S
and N.

AP-19
APPENDIX

VWR - Relative (Apparent) wind speed and angle

$--VWR,x.x,a,x.x,N,x.x,M,x.x,K*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | +----------------------- 5
| | | | | +---+------------------------- 4
| | | +---+---------------------------------- 3
| +--+---------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------ 1

1. Measured wind angle relative to the vessel, 0 to 180°, left/right L/R of vessel heading
2. Measured wind speed, knots
3. Wind speed, meters/second
4. Wind speed, Km/Hr
5. Checksum

VWT - True wind speed and angle

$--VWT,x.x,a,x.x,N,x.x,M,x.x,K*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | +----------------------- 5
| | | | | +---+------------------------- 4
| | | +---+---------------------------------- 3
| +--+---------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------ 1

1. Calculated wind angle relative to the vessel, 0 to 180°, left/right L/R of vessel heading
2. Calculated wind speed, knots
3. Wind speed, meters/second
4. Wind speed, Km/Hr
5. Checksum

WPL - Waypoint location

$--WPL,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +--------- 4
| | | | +------------ 3
| | +-----+---------------- 2
+-----+---------------------------- 1

1. Waypoint latitude, N/S

2. Waypoint longitude, E/W
3. Waypoint identifier
4. Checksum

AP-20
 APPENDIX

ZDA - Time and date

$--ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 7
| | | | | +----------- 6
| | | | +-------------- 5
| | | +------------------ 4
| | +---------------------- 3
| +------------------------- 2
+--------------------------------- 1

1. UTC
2. Day, 01 to 31 (UTC)
3. Month, 01 to 12 (UTC)
4. Year (UTC)
5. Local zone hours, 00h to +-13h
6. Local zone minutes, 00 to +59
as local hours
7. Checksum

$AIALR - Set alarm state

$AIALR,hhmmss.ss,xxx,A,A,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +----------------- 6
| | | | +----------------- 5
| | | +-------------------- 4
| | +---------------------- 3
| +------------------------- 2
+--------------------------------- 1

1. Time of alarm condition change, UTC

2. Local alarm number (identifier)
3. Alarm condition (A=threshold exceeded, V=not exceeded)
4. Alarm’s acknowledge state, A=acknowledged V=unacknowledged
5. Alarm’s description text
6. Checksum

!AIVDM - VHF data-link message

!AIVDM,x,x,x,a,s--s,x*hh<CR><LF>
| || | | | |
| | | | | | +----- 7
| | | | | +----- 6
| | | | +-------- 5
| | | +------------ 4
| | +-------------- 3
| +---------------- 2
+------------------ 1

1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message, 1 to 9

2. Message sentence number, 1 to 9
3. Sequential message identifier, 0 to 9
4. AIS channel Number
5. Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message*
6. Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
7. Checksum

*= Message no. 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 12, 14, 18, 19 are used.

AP-21
APPENDIX

!AIVDO - UAIS VHF Data-link Own-vessel report

!AIVDO,x,x,x,a,s--s,x*hh<CR><LF>
| | || | | |
| | | | | | +--- 7
| | | | | +----- 6
| | | | +-------- 5
| | | +------------ 4
| | +-------------- 3
| +---------------- 2
+------------------ 1

1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message, 1 to 9

2. Message sentence number, 1 to 9
3. Sequential message identifier, 0 to 9
4. AIS channel Number
5. Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message*
6. Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
7. Checksum

*= Data are MMSI no., navigation status, ETA, destination, draught,

type of ship, call sign, ship's name and GPS antenna position.

Output sentences
ABM- UAIS Addressed binary and safety related message
!--ABM,x,x,x,xxxxxxxxx,x,xx,s--s,x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | +--- 9
| | | | | | | +----- 8
| | | | | | +-------- 7
| | | | | +------------ 6
| | | | +--------------- 5
| | | +--------------------- 4
| | +--------------------------- 3
| +----------------------------- 2
+------------------------------- 1
1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message, 1 to 9
2. Message sentence number, 1 to 9
3. Message sequence identifier, 0 to 3
4. The MMSI of destination AIS unit for the ITU-R M.1371 message 6 or 12
5. AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message
6. VDL message number(6 or 12), see ITU-R M.1371
7. Encapsulated data
8. Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
9. Checksum

AP-22
 APPENDIX

ALR- Set alarm state

$--ALR,hhmmss.ss,xxx,A,A,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +------------- 6
| | | | +----------------- 5
| | | +-------------------- 4
| | +---------------------- 3
| +------------------------- 2
+--------------------------------- 1

1. Time of alarm condition change, UTC

2. Local alarm number(identifier)
3. Alarm condition(A=threshold exceeded, V=not exceeded)
4. Alarm’s acknowledge state, A=acknowledged V=unacknowledged
5. Alarm’s description text
6. Checksum

BBM- UAIS Broadcast binary message

!--BBM,x,x,x,x,xx,s--s,x*hh<CR><LF>
| || | | | | |
| | | | | | | +--- 8
| | | | | | +------ 7
| | | | | +--------- 6
| | | | +------------- 5
| | | +---------------- 4
| | +------------------ 3
| +-------------------- 2
+---------------------- 1

1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message, 1 to 9

2. Message sentence number, 1 to 9
3. Sequential Message identifier, 0 to 9
4. AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message
5. VDL message number(8,14,19 or 21), see ITU-R M.1371
6. Binary data
7. Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
8. Checksum

AP-23
APPENDIX

OSD- Own ship data

$--OSD,x.x,A,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | +--------- 10
| | | | | | | | +----------- 9
| | | | | | | +-------------- 8
| | | | | | +------------------ 7
| | | | | +--------------------- 6
| | | | +------------------------ 5
| | | +--------------------------- 4
| | +------------------------------ 3
| +--------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------ 1

1. Heading, degrees true

2. Heading status: A=data valid, V=data invalid
3. Vessel course, degrees true
4. Course reference, B/M/W/R/P (see note)
5. Vessel speed
6. Speed reference, B/M/W/R/P (see note)
7. Vessel set, degrees true---Manually entered
8. Vessel drift (speed) ---Manually entered
9. Speed units, K(km/h) / N(Knots) / S(statute miles/h)
10. Checksum

NOTES - Reference systems (speed/course):

B = bottom tracking log
M = manually entered
W = water referenced
R = radar tracking (of fixed target)
P = positioning system ground reference

AP-24
 APPENDIX

RSD - Radar system data

$RARSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +----- 14
| | | | | | | | | | | | +------- 13
| | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 12
| | | | | | | | | | +------------ 11
| | | | | | | | | +---------------- 10
| | | | | | | | +-------------------- 9
| | | | | | | +------------------------ 8
| | | | | | +---------------------------- 7
| | | | | +-------------------------------- 6
| | | | +------------------------------------ 5
| | | +---------------------------------------- 4
| | +-------------------------------------------- 3
| +------------------------------------------------ 2
+---------------------------------------------------- 1

1. Origin 1 range, from own ship (see note 2)

2. Origin 1 bearing, degrees from 0 (see note 2)
3. Variable range marker 1(VRM1), range
4. Bearing line 1(EBL1), degrees from 0
5. Origin 2 range (see note 2)
6. Origin 2 bearing (see note 2)
7. VRM2, range
8. EBL2, degrees
9. Cursor range, from own ship
10. Cursor bearing, degrees clockwise from 0
11. Range scale in use
12. Range units, K/N/S
13. Display rotation (see note 1)
14. Checksum

NOTES
1 Display rotation:
C = course-up, course-over-ground up, degrees true
H = head-up, ship’s heading(center-line) 0 up
N = north-up, true north is 0 up
2 Origin 1 and origin 2 are located at the stated range and bearing
from own ship and provide for two independent sets of variable range
markers (VRM) and electronic bearing lines (EBL) originating away from
own ship position.

AP-25
APPENDIX

TLB - Target label

$--TLB,x.x,c--c,x.x,c--c,......x.x,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--- 4
| | +----+--------+----+------ 3
| +------------------------------ 2
+----------------------------------- 1

1. Target number ’n’ reported by the device

2. Label assigned to target ’n’
3. Additional label pairs
4. Checksum

TLL - Target latitude and longitude

For non-IMO specification radar. This function outputs event mark position.
$--TLL,xx,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,c--c,hhmmss.ss,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | +--------- 8
| | | | | | | | +----------- 7
| | | | | | | +------------- 6
| | | | | | +--------------------- 5
| | | | | +-------------------------- 4
| | | +-----+------------------------------ 3
| +----+------------------------------------------ 2
+----------------------------------------------------- 1

1. Target number 00 - 99
2. Latitude, N/S
3. Longitude, E/W
4. Target name
5. UTC of data
6. Target status (see note)
7. Reference target=R, null otherwise
8. Checksum

NOTE - Target status

L = lost, tracked target has been lost
Q = query, target in the process of acquisition
T = tracking

AP-26
 APPENDIX

TTD - Tracked target data

$--TTD,hh,hh.x,s--s,a,x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | |
| | | | +----- 5
| | | +------- 4
| | +------- 3
| +----- 2
+-----1

1. Total hex number of sentences need to transfer the messages

2. Hex sentence number, 1 to FF
3. Sequential message identifier, 0 to 9
4. Encapsulated tracked target data
5. Number of fill bits, 0 to 5

TTM - Tracked target message

$--TTM,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,c--c,a,a,hhmmss.ss,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +----- 14
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +------- 13
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +-------------- 12
| | | | | | | | | | | | +------------------- 11
| | | | | | | | | | | +--------------------- 10
| | | | | | | | | | +------------------------ 9
| | | | | | | | | +---------------------------- 8
| | | | | | | | +------------------------------- 7
| | | | | | | +----------------------------------- 6
| | | | | +--+-------------------------------------- 5
| | | | +--------------------------------------------- 4
| | +--+------------------------------------------------ 3
| +------------------------------------------------------- 2
+---------------------------------------------------------- 1

1. Target number, 00 to 99
2. Target distance from own ship
3. Bearing from own ship, degrees, true/relative (T/R)
4. Target speed
5. Target course, degrees true/relative (T/R)
6. Distance of closet point of approach
7. Time to CPA, min., "-"increasing
8. Speed/distance units, K/N/S
9. User data (e.g. target name)
10. Target status (see note)
11. Reference target = R, null otherwise
12. Time of data (UTC)
13. Type of acquisition A=automatic, M=manual, R=reported
14. Checksum

NOTE - Target status:

L = lost, tracked target has been lost
Q = query, target in the process of acquisition
T = tracking

AP-27
APPENDIX

Serial interface – input ports

Heading sensor
Baud rate is selectable from 4800 bps (non-IMO only) and 38.4 kbps. Complies with IEC
61162-2.
Isolated RS485 Transceiver

RD-A

LTC1535 RD-B

GND

Logical High: A-B> +0.2V

Logical Low: A-B< -0.2V

Log/navigator
Baud rate is adaptive with RX data. Complies with IEC 61162-1.

Photo Coupler
470 ohm
RD-A

PC-400

RD-B

This port is an opticoupler used to isolate I/F terminal on RD terminal.

Absolute maximum rating

Input
Forward current: 50 mA
Reverse voltage: 6 V

Output
Supply voltage: 16 V
High level output voltage: 16 V
Low level output current: 50 mA

AP-28
 APPENDIX

3. Longitude Error Table (on 96 nm range scale)

The longitude lines concentrate on the north pole and south pole, namely, 1 nm is
equivalent to 1 minute at 0 degree latitude, 2 minutes at 60 degrees latitude, 3 minutes at
70 degrees latitude and so on. For this reason, a longitude error occurs on the radar display.
For example, when own ship is at 60°N and 135°E, even if the cursor indication is 62°N and
139°E, the real cursor position is deviated to the left (west) side. The table below shows the
longitude error, represented from 0° to 90° at 96 nm from the radar center (own ship).
Real cursor position Real cursor position
R: Error
62°N °N
Cursor position Cursor position
indicated indicated

96 nm
θ

60°N LAT °E
135°E 139°E OS position

Distance error in direction of longitude due to latitude

AP-29
APPENDIX

(nm)
θ
LAT 5° 10° 15° 20° 25° 30° 35° 40° 45°

75° 0.2256 0.4444 0.6496 0.8350 0.9950 1.1248 1.2202 1.2786 1.2980
70° 0.21980213 0.43290201 0.632803 0.8134132 0.96923215 1.09551918 1.1884382 1.24517456 1.26402037
65° 0.21229339 0.41810678 0.61115946 0.78556318 0.93600295 1.05790007 1.14755221 1.20224625 1.22034042
60° 0.20316898 0.40012949 0.58486463 0.75173456 0.89565021 1.0122297 1.09793265 1.15016811 1.16737294
55° 0.19249832 0.37910698 0.55411863 0.71218478 0.84848102 0.95885565 1.03998717 1.08933651 1.10552105
50° 0.18036264 0.35519924 0.51915545 0.66721485 0.79485438 0.89818413 0.97406698 1.02021439 1.03525547
45° 0.16685429 0.32858822 0.48024119 0.61716701 0.73517843 0.83067689 0.90076355 0.94332783 0.95711098
40° 0.15207608 0.29947644 0.437672 0.56242216 0.66990732 0.7568477 0.82060477 0.85926197 0.87168229
35° 0.13614047 0.26808546 0.39177186 0.53339693 0.59953781 0.67725844 0.73420069 0.76865661 0.77961957
30° 0.11916876 0.2346542 0.3428901 0.44054055 0.52460545 0.59251483 0.6422089 0.67220131 0.68162348
25° 0.10129001 0.19943707 0.29139874 0.37433139 0.44568053 0.50326182 0.54532952 0.57063015 0.57843983
20° 0.08264056 0.16270211 0.23768966 0.30527334 0.36336372 0.41017869 0.44429984 0.46471615 0.47085389
15° 0.06336208 0.12472888 0.18217162 0.23389198 0.27828148 0.31397386 0.33988878 0.35526538 0.35968447
10° 0.04360137 0.0858064 0.12526714 0.16073056 0.19108136 0.21537949 0.23289096 0.24311083 0.24577764
5° 0.02350833 0.04623087 0.0674093 0.08634588 0.10242699 0.11514595 0.1241207 0.12910605 0.13000029
0° 0.00323737 0.0063035 0.00903844 0.01130406 0.01299309 0.01403609 0.0144058 0.0141187 0.01323356

(nm)
θ
LAT 50° 55° 60° 65° 70° 75° 80° 85° 90°

75° 1.2780 1.2192 1.1233 0.9933 0.8332 0.6479 0.4431 0.2249 0

70° 1.24442563 1.18701379 1.09356117 0.96694117 0.81103484 0.3061092 0.43117887 0.21881975 0
65° 1.20131324 1.14577786 1.05546143 0.93315023 0.78260251 0.60843159 0.41596331 0.21107193 0
60° 1.14905813 1.09582188 1.00932899 0.89225746 0.74821409 0.58162173 0.397582 0.20171772 0
55° 1.08805799 1.03752602 0.95551494 0.84457408 0.70813132 0.55038538 0.37617487 0.19082831 0
50° 1.0187708 0.97133397 0.89442885 0.79046297 0.66265924 0.51496026 0.35190481 0.17848659 0
45° 0.94174265 0.89774948 0.82653562 0.73033596 0.61214392 0.47561599 0.32495654 0.16478648 0
40° 0.85754099 0.81733258 0.75235195 0.66465066 0.55696981 0.43265198 0.29553516 0.14983224 0
35° 0.76681293 0.73069528 0.63744242 0.59390696 0.49755683 0.38639524 0.26386458 0.13373769 0
30° 0.67024897 0.63849695 0.58741521 0.51864327 0.43435714 0.33719779 0.23018583 0.11662531 0
25° 0.568584 0.54143927 0.49791741 0.43943239 0.36785173 0.28543407 0.19475522 0.09862535 0
20° 0.46259176 0.44026091 0.40463016 0.35687717 0.29854675 0.23149802 0.15784242 0.07987479 0
15° 0.35307892 0.3357319 0.30826343 0.2716059 0.22696965 0.17580013 0.11972833 0.06051633 0
10° 0.2487894 0.22864776 0.20955062 0.18426754 0.15366517 0.1187643 0.08070304 0.0406973 0
5° 0.12684572 0.11982348 0.10624302 0.09552679 0.0791912 0.04106355 0.04106355 0.02056855 0
0° 0.01184713 0.01008727 0.008104 0.00605903 0.00411455 0.00111154 0.00111154 0.00028325 0

AP-30
INDEX
2 symbol size......................................4-11
2nd-trace echo rejector ....................... 1-74 system messages .......................... 4-26
target data ........................................ 4-9
A
turning on/off .................................... 4-2
A/C RAIN adjustment
AIS DISP box ....................................... 4-2
auto................................................. 1-29
ALARM ACK box ...................... 1-40, 3-23
manual............................................ 1-29
ALARM ACK key................................ 1-40
A/C SEA adjustment
ALARM box........................................ 1-39
automatic ........................................ 1-28
Alarms
manual............................................ 1-27
description ...................................... 1-84
method............................................ 1-27
list ................................................... 1-87
A/C SEA box ...................................... 1-27
output ............................................. 1-88
Abbreviations .................................. AP-46
primary ........................................... 1-89
Acquisition zone (TT)
Alert box............................................. 1-83
acknowledging................................ 3-23
Anchor watch ................................... 1-102
activating ........................................ 3-22
Antenna
deactivating .................................... 3-23
information...................................... 1-90
reference ........................................ 3-24
selection ......................................... 1-91
shape.............................................. 3-24
ANTENNA box ................................... 1-90
sleeping .......................................... 3-23
AZ box................................................ 3-22
AIS
activating targets, all......................... 4-5 B
activating targets, automatically ..... 4-18 Barge marker ..................................... 1-61
activating targets, manually.............. 4-5 Battery replacement............................. 6-4
AIS DISP box.................................... 4-2 Bearing measurement ....................... 1-34
association ..................................... 4-19 BRILL box ...........................................1-11
collision alarm................................. 4-17 BRILL control ......................................1-11
controls ............................................. 4-1 Brilliance
detailed target data......................... 4-10 monitor ............................................1-11
display criteria .................................. 4-4 screen data..................................... 1-75
lost target........................................ 4-14
C
messages, alarm messages........... 4-25
CCRP................................................. 1-99
messages, creating ........................ 4-22
COG.......................................... 1-22, 3-20
messages, displaying automatically4-25
Collision alarm
messages, saving........................... 4-22
AIS.................................................. 4-17
messages, system.......................... 4-26
TT ................................................... 3-21
messages, transmitting .................. 4-23
Colors................................................. 1-97
messages, viewing manually.......... 4-24
Control description............................... 1-4
past position display plotting
Control unit........................................... 1-3
interval ........................................ 4-12
Course-up mode ................................ 1-18
past position points......................... 4-13
CPA AUTO ACTIVATE box ................ 4-17
ROT setting .................................... 4-16
CPA LIMIT box .......................... 3-21, 4-17
sleeping a target ............................... 4-6
CU/TM RESET box............................ 1-21
symbol brilliance..............................4-11
CU/TM RESET key ............................ 1-21
symbol color ....................................4-11

IN-1
INDEX

CURSOR DATA box ...........................1-93 HL OFF box ........................................ 1-59

CURSOR menu ..................................1-10 HL OFF key ........................................ 1-59
D I
Dangerous target..................................4-5 INDEX LINE key................................. 1-52
Data sentences INS marker ......................................... 1-61
input ............................................... AP-9 Interference rejector ........................... 1-43
output ........................................... AP-24
K
Diagnostics
Key beep ............................................ 1-82
radar................................................6-10
TT....................................................3-30 L
Digital interface.................................. AP-8 LOST TARGET ALARM box........3-9, 4-15
DISPLAY MODE box ..........................1-12 Lost target filter (AIS) ......................... 4-14
DRIFT box ..........................................3-20 Lost target filter (TT)............................. 3-9
Drop mark M
activating.......................................1-103 Main menu............................................ 1-5
erasing ..........................................1-104 Maintenance
inscribing.......................................1-104 battery replacement.......................... 6-4
E fuse replacement .............................. 6-4
EBL parts replacement ............................. 6-3
bearing measurement with .............1-34 periodic ............................................. 6-2
reference.........................................1-35 trackball ............................................ 6-5
EBL box ..............................................1-34 MARK box .......................................... 1-55
EBL offset MENU box ............................................ 1-6
assessing risk of collision ...............1-36 Menu tree .......................................... AP-1
measuring range and bearing MODE key .......................................... 1-17
between two targets ....................1-38 N
reference for origin point.................1-37 Nav data ............................................. 1-77
EBL OFFSET key ......................1-36, 1-38 Net cursor
EBL ON, EBL OFF keys .....................1-34 activating....................................... 1-106
Echo averaging...................................1-44 adjustment of ................................ 1-107
Echo stretch........................................1-43 Noise rejector ..................................... 1-45
F North marker ...................................... 1-59
False echoes ........................................2-3 North-up mode ................................... 1-19
Function keys .....................................1-68 O
Fuse replacement.................................6-4 OFF CENTER key.............................. 1-42
G Off centering....................................... 1-42
GAIN box ............................................1-26 Origin marks
GAIN control .......................................1-26 entering........................................... 1-55
Guidance box .......................................1-7 erasing ............................................ 1-57
Gyro readout.......................................1-16 stabilization ..................................... 1-57
OS POSN box .................................... 1-72
H
Own ship marker ................................ 1-96
HDG box.............................................1-16
Own ship symbol ................................ 1-60
HDG menu..........................................1-16
Own ship vector.................................. 1-82
Heading line........................................1-59
Head-up mode....................................1-18
Head-up true bearing mode ...............1-19

IN-2
 INDEX

Set and drift........................................ 3-20

P
SET box ............................................. 3-20
Past position display
Shuttle ferry........................................ 1-82
AIS.................................................. 4-12
SOG .......................................... 1-22, 3-20
SPD box............................................. 1-22
PI line boxes....................................... 1-52
Speed
PI lines
automatic input............................... 1-22
displaying, erasing.......................... 1-52
echo-referenced input ...................... 3-3
interval ............................................ 1-53
manual input................................... 1-23
number of lines............................... 1-54
SPEED menu..................................... 1-22
orientation.............................. 1-53, 1-54
STBY/TX key ....................................... 1-1
reference ........................................ 1-53
Stern marker ...................................... 1-59
resetting.......................................... 1-54
Stern-up mode
PICTURE box..................................... 1-64
description ...................................... 1-20
Picture setup
enabling, disabling ......................... 1-82
choosing ......................................... 1-64
Sub monitor...................................... 1-105
default settings ............................... 1-66
Switching Hub HUB-100 .................. 1-101
disabling unnecessary.................... 1-67
Symbols ...........................................AP-49
user programming .......................... 1-64
user settings ................................... 1-66 T
Position .............................................. 1-72 Target alarm
POWER switch .................................... 1-1 acknowledging offending target ..... 1-40
Presentation mode attributes......................................... 1-41
choosing ......................................... 1-17 deactivating .................................... 1-40
description ...................................... 1-18 setting............................................. 1-39
PRESENTATION MODE box ............. 1-17 TARGET LIST box ............................. 3-15
Pulselength ........................................ 1-24 Target trails
PULSELENGTH box.......................... 1-25 cancelling ....................................... 1-50
copying ........................................... 1-49
Q
gradation ........................................ 1-48
Quick start ............................................ 1-2
level (afterglow) .............................. 1-50
R longer trails..................................... 1-51
RACON ................................................ 2-8 narrow trails.................................... 1-50
Range reference ........................................ 1-47
choosing ......................................... 1-23 saving ............................................. 1-49
measurement ................................. 1-31 time................................................. 1-48
RANGE box........................................ 1-23 TCPA LIMIT box........................ 3-21, 4-17
RANGE key........................................ 1-23 Text window setup ............................. 1-79
Range ring.......................................... 1-31 Trackball maintenance......................... 6-5
Reference position ............................. 1-99 TRAIL MODE box .............................. 1-48
S Troubleshooting
SART.................................................... 2-5 advanced.......................................... 6-7
Scrollwheel drive................................ 1-82 diagnostics ....................................... 6-9
Second-trace echo rejector................ 1-74 easy................................................ 6-10
Sensitivity ........................................... 1-26 True motion mode.............................. 1-21
Serial interface TT
input ports.................................... AP-30 acquisition zone, acknowledging.... 3-23
output ports.................................. AP-31 acquisition zone, activating ............ 3-22
acquisition zone, deactivating ........ 3-23

IN-3
INDEX

acquisition zone, reference.............3-24 chart position correction ................. 5-10

acquisition zone, shape ..................3-24 cursor data correction ..............5-8, 5-10
acquisition zone, sleeping...............3-23 displaying nav lines ........................ 5-28
acquisition zone, stabilization .........3-24 graphics on/off ................................ 5-12
activating, deactivating .....................3-3 initializing memory cards ................ 5-30
automatic acquisition ........................3-5 memory card file deletion ............... 5-34
collision alarm, acknowledgement ..3-22 nav line deleting.............................. 5-25
collision alarm, setting ....................3-21 nav line editing................................ 5-23
controls .............................................3-2 nav line entry .................................. 5-22
criteria for selecting targets for nav line list ...................................... 5-24
tracking........................................3-32 nav line setup.................................. 5-26
factors affecting operation of ..........3-34 other track plotting .......................... 5-14
manual acquisition ............................3-7 own track plotting............................ 5-13
past position display attributes........3-19 radar map, activation ........................ 5-3
past position display interval ...........3-18 radar map, mark and line erasure .... 5-6
past position display points .............3-18 radar map, marks and lines .............. 5-4
set and drift .....................................3-20 radar map, position correction .......... 5-8
symbol brilliance ............................. 3-11 recording data................................. 5-31
symbol color....................................3-12 replaying data ................................. 5-33
symbol description ..........................3-10 track color ....................................... 5-14
symbol selection ............................. 3-11 track erasure................................... 5-15
system messages ...........................3-25 waypoint editing .............................. 5-18
target data.......................................3-13 waypoint entry by L/L input ............. 5-17
target list .........................................3-15 waypoint entry with cursor .............. 5-16
terminating tracking of targets...........3-6 waypoint erasure ............................ 5-19
test ..................................................3-30 waypoint list .................................... 5-20
trial maneuver, activation ................3-27 waypoint name and number ........... 5-21
trial maneuver, description..............3-26 VRM
trial maneuver, termination .............3-29 range measurement with ................ 1-32
TT VECTOR box.............................3-17 TTG to............................................. 1-33
vector description............................3-16 unit .................................................. 1-33
vector motion and time ...................3-17 VRM box............................................. 1-32
TT ACQ MODE box ..............................3-3 VRM ON, VRM OFF keys .................. 1-32
TT VECTOR box ................................3-17
W
TUNE box ...........................................1-15
Watch alarm ....................................... 1-76
Tuning
WATCH box........................................ 1-76
automatic or manual .......................1-16
Wiper .................................................. 1-46
initializing ........................................1-15
TX STBY box........................................1-1 Z
Zoom .................................................. 1-58
V
Video plotter
auto target track ..............................5-15
chart display......................................5-9
chart land color ............................... 5-11

IN-4
 FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
9-52 Ashihara-Cho, Nishinomiya City, 662-8580, Hyogo, Japan
Tel: +81 798-65-2111 Fax: +81 798-65-4200

Pub No. DOC-921

Declaration of conformity
0735
We FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Manufacturer)

9-52 Ashihara-Cho, Nishinomiya City, 662-8580, Hyogo, Japan

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Address)
hereby declare under our sole responsibility that the product
Marine radar with ARPA and AIS display Types FAR-2XX7 series
(for details, see Configuration matrix at page 2/2 of this Declaration)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Model names, type numbers)
to which this declaration relates conforms to the following standard(s) or normative document(s)
IMO standards Test standards
IMO Resolution MSC.36(63) IEC 60936-1 1st edition: 1999-12
IMO Resolution MSC.64(67) Annex 4 IEC 60936-1 Am1: 2002-06
IMO Resolution MSC.74(69) annex 3 IEC/PAS 60936-5: 2003-09
IMO Resolution A.694(17) IEC 60872-1 1st edition: 1998-09
IMO Resolution A.813(19) IEC 60872-2 1st edition: 1999-01
IMO Resolution A.820(19) IEC 60945 4th edition: 2002-08
IMO Resolution A.823(19) IEC 61162-1 2nd edition 2000-07
IEC 61162-2 1st edition: 1998-09
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(title and/or number and date of issue of the standard(s) or other normative document(s))

For assessment, see:

• EC Type Examination (Module B) Certificate No. BSH/4612/4340219/06, USCG Approval No. 165.120/EC0735/1114/1/2004
(ARPA); 165.111/EC0735/1114/1/2004 (ATA) of 28 July 2006 issued by Federal Maritime and Hydrographic Agency (BSH),
The Federal Republic of Germany
• EC Quality System (Module D) Certificate No. BSH/4613/02202/0339/06 of 04 July 2006 and Annex of 2006-09-20 to
BSH/4613/02202/0339/06 issued by Federal Maritime and Hydrographic Agency (BSH), The Federal Republic of Germany
• Test reports 6522/1114-1/2004, 6522/1114-2/2004, 6522/1114-3/2004, 2004, 6522/1114-4/2004 of Aug. 16, 2004,
6522/1114-5/2004 of Jul. 13, 2004, 6522/1114-6/2004 of Sep. 2, 2004, 6522/1114-7/2004 of Aug. 23, 2004 and 6522/1114-
8/2004 of Jul. 20, 2004 issued by Federal Maritime and Hydrographic Agency (BSH), The Federal Republic of Germany
• Test reports FLI 12-03-033 of 14 July 2003, FLI 12-03-048, 12-03-049, 12-03-053 of 26 Sep. 2003, 12-03-052 of 22 Sep.
2003, 12-03-057 of 15 Jan. 2004, 12-03-058 of 23 Feb. 2004, 12-04-014, 12-04-015, 12-04-016, 12-04-017 of 19 Mar. 2004,
12-04-019, 12-04-020 of 23 Mar. 2003 and 12-04-021 of 30 Mar. 2004 issued by Furuno Labotech International Co., Ltd.,
Japan
• Test report QINETIQ/FST/TR031505 of 17 March 2003 issued by QinetiQ, UK
• Technical report No. 2005-3125 of 2005-12-02 issued by DET NORSKE VERITAS CERTIFICATION AS, Norway

This declaration is issued according to the provisions of European Council Directive 96/98/EC on marine
equipment modified by Commission Directive 2002/75/EC.

On behalf of Furuno Electric Co., Ltd.

Hiroaki Komatsu
Nishinomiya City, Japan Manager,
March 20, 2007 International Rules and Regulations
-------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Place and date of issue) (name and signature or equivalent marking of authorized person)

1/2
 Configuration matrix of FAR-2XX7 series
(This is part of the Declaration of Conformity DOC-907.)

FAR-2137SW

FAR-2837SW
Type

FAR-2127W

FAR-2827W

FAR-2137S

FAR-2837S

FAR-2137S

FAR-2837S
FAR-2117

FAR-2127

FAR-2817

FAR-2827

FAR-2117

FAR-2127

FAR-2817

FAR-2827
Remarks

For regular SOLAS Convention ships For high-speed-craft (HSC)

X-band S-band X-band S-band
Designation
TR-up TR-down TR-up TR-down TR-up
XN-12AF x x x x x x x x X-band 4 ft
XN-20AF x x x x x x x x x x X-band 6.5 ft
Scanner XN-24AF x x x x x x x x x x X-band 8 ft
SN-30AF x x S-band 10 ft
SN-36AF x x x x x x S-band 12ft
RTR-078 x x x x X-band 12 kW
RTR-079 x x x x X-band 25 kW
Transceiver RTR-080 x x x x S-band 30 kW
RTR-081 x x X-band 25 kW
RTR-082 x x S-band 30 kW
RSB-096 x x x x X-band 24 rpm
RSB-097 x x x x X-band 42 rpm
RSB-098 x x S-band 21 rpm
RSB-099 x x S-band 26 rpm
Turning unit RSB-100 x x S-band 45 rpm
RSB-101 x x S-band 45 rpm
RSB-102 x x S-band 45 rpm
RSB-103 x x X-band 24 rpm
RSB-104 x x S-band 21 rpm
Display unit MU-201CR x x x x x x x x 250 mm color
JH20T06 FUR-E1 x x x x x x x x 20 inch color
JH19T02 FUR-E1 x x x x x x x x 19 inch color
MU-231CR x x x x x x x x 340 mm color
JH23T02 FUR-E1 x x x x x x x x 23 inch color
Processor RPU-013 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Processor
Control unit RCU-014 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x with keyboard &
trackball
RCU-015 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x with trackball
Gyro AD-100 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x external
stabilization GC-10 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x integrated
Performanc PM-31 x x x x x x x x x x X-band
e monitor PM-51 x x x x x x S-band
Power PSU-007 x x x x Power supply
supply
HUB-100 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Hub
CU-100 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Card reader
Optional unit CU-200 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Card reader
RCU-016 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Remote control
RJB-001 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Junction box

2/2